English

Operating Manual

PanelX
Hottinger Brüel & Kjaer GmbH
Im Tiefen See 45
64293 Darmstadt
Tel. +49 6151 803-0
Fax +49 6151 803-9100
info@hbkworld.com
www.hbkworld.com

DVS: A05901 02 E00 01

02.2023

© Hottinger Brüel & Kjaer GmbH

Subject to modifications.
All product descriptions are for general information only.
They are not to be understood as a guarantee of quality or
durability.
TABLE OF CONTENTS

1 Technical support 13
2 Introduction 15
2.1 System requirements 15
2.2 Installation/upgrade 16
2.3 Uninstalling 16
2.4 Typographical conventions 17
3 Quick start 19
3.1 Target groups for this documentation 19
3.2 Sensor electronics units covered by this documentation 20
3.3 What other documentation is available? 21
3.4 PanelX software 22
3.4.1 The user interface 22
3.4.2 The Home menu item in PanelX 24
3.4.3 Working with the PanelX program 26
4 Communication via one of the interfaces 31
4.1 CANopen® 31
4.1.1 Process Data Objects (PDOs) 34
4.1.2 Service Data Objects (SDOs) 36
4.1.3 Measured value status 40
4.1.4 Alarm status (event mask) 42
4.1.5 Control word 44
4.1.6 Busy flag 45
4.1.7 Emergency object 46
4.2 DeviceNet® 47
4.2.1 Examples of DeviceNet communication 50
4.2.2 Measured value status 66
4.3 PROFIBUS® 70
4.3.1 Cyclic data exchange 73
4.3.2 Acyclic data exchange 74
4.4 Serial interfaces 74
4.4.1 RS-232 interface 75
4.4.2 RS-422 interface 76
4.4.3 RS-485 interface 78
4.4.4 Serial communication, commands and responses 81

PanelX 3
 4.4.5 Examples of serial communication 83
4.5 Ethernet (WTX110/120) 85
4.6 Modbus/TCP (CiA309) 86
5 Starting up 87
5.1 General settings and definitions 89
5.2 Calibration (and adjustment) with a direct load 90
5.3 Adjustment in mV/V 92
5.4 Changing the working standard calibration 93
5.5 Using linearization 94
5.6 Synchronization of multiple sensor electronics units 95
5.6.1 Synchronization via the digital inputs/outputs 95
5.6.2 Synchronization via a CANopen sync message 97
5.7 Starting up WTX110/120 98
6 Applications 101
6.1 Filling and batching 101
6.1.1 General settings 103
6.1.2 Start 105
6.1.3 Coarse flow 106
6.1.4 Fine flow 108
6.1.5 Residual flow 110
6.1.6 Stabilization 110
6.1.7 Emptying/filling 111
6.2 Checkweigher 112
6.2.1 Level pre-trigger 114
6.2.2 External pre-trigger 116
6.2.3 Level post-trigger 117
6.2.4 External post-trigger 118
6.3 Sorting weigher 119
7 Functions 123
7.1 General signal flow diagram 123
7.2 Motion detection (standstill recognition) 125
7.3 Zeroing 126
7.3.1 Zeroing on start-up 127
7.3.2 Zero tracking 127
7.3.3 Zero balance after delay 130
7.3.4 Automatic zeroing 131

4 PanelX
 7.3.5 Zero balance options for filling 133
7.4 Taring 134
7.4.1 Taring after delay 135
7.4.2 Tare limit (empty weight) 136
7.5 Filter 136
7.5.1 Filters in PanelX 137
7.5.2 Filter mode 138
7.5.2.1 Notch filter 139
7.5.2.2 Mean value filter 141
7.5.3 Filter cut-off frequency 142
7.5.4 Output rate of measured values (mean value calculation) 149
7.5.5 Increased analog-to-digital converter sampling rate 151
7.6 Triggers 151
7.6.1 Pre-triggering via level 153
7.6.2 External pre-triggering 154
7.6.3 Post-triggering via level 155
7.6.4 External post-triggering 157
7.6.5 Trigger delay time 158
7.6.6 Retriggering 159
7.6.7 Trigger stop (level, time) 161
7.7 Limit switches 162
7.8 Peak values 162
7.9 IO settings in PanelX 163
7.10 Systematic difference 164
7.11 Legal-For-Trade mode 165
8 Scope in PanelX 167
9 Service and diagnostic functions 169
10 Command reference 171
10.1 Overview: Which commands are in which firmware version? 172
10.2 Overview: Commands for P8x grouped by application category 190
10.3 ADF (Adaptive Noise Suppression) 198
10.4 ADR (Device Address) 200
10.5 ALS (Alarm Status) 202
10.6 AOV (ADC Overflow Counter) 205
10.7 APD (Alternative Poll Data) 207
10.8 APP (Alternative Control Word) 209

PanelX 5
 10.9 ARP (Adaptive Residual Flow Time) 210
10.10 ASD (Adaptive Dosing Times) 211
10.11 ASF (Amplifier Signal Filter) 213
10.12 ASS (Amplifier Signal Selection) 214
10.13 AST (Adaptive Trigger Settling) 216
10.14 AT1 (Active Time Output 1) 217
10.15 AT2 (Active Time Output 2) 219
10.16 AT3 (Active Time Output 3) 221
10.17 AT4 (Active Time Output 4) 223
10.18 ATP (Adaptive Lockout Times) 225
10.19 BDR (Baud Rate) 227
10.20 BRK (Abort Dosing) 232
10.21 BSY (Busy State) 234
10.22 CBK (Coarse Flow Monitoring) 236
10.23 CBT (Coarse Flow Monitoring Time) 239
10.24 CD1 (Zeroing Delay 1) 241
10.25 CD2 (Zeroing Delay 2) 243
10.26 CDL (Zeroing) 245
10.27 CDT (Zeroing Delay) 247
10.28 CFD (Coarse Flow Disconnect) 249
10.29 CFT (Coarse Flow Time) 251
10.30 COF (Configure Output Format) 253
10.30.1 Standard formats COF0 … COF15 256
10.30.2 Formats COF16 … COF31 for bus mode 260
10.30.3 Formats COF32 … COF47 without end label crlf 261
10.30.4 Formats COF64 … COF79 for 2-wire bus mode 262
10.30.5 Formats COF128 … COF143 for continuous output 263
10.31 CPV (Clear Peak Values) 264
10.32 CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) 266
10.33 CSM (Checksum) 268
10.34 CSN (Clear Dosing Results) 270
10.35 CTO (Zeroing Tolerance) 272
10.36 CTR (Clear Trigger Results) 274
10.37 CWT (Calibration Weight) 276
10.38 DGA (Diagnostic Activation) 278

6 PanelX
 10.39 DGL (Diagnostic Trigger Level) 280
10.40 DGN (Diagnostic Number) 282
10.41 DGP (Diagnostic Buffer Pointer) 284
10.42 DGR (Diagnostic Read) 286
10.43 DGS (Diagnostic Start And Status) 288
10.44 DL1 (Delay Time 1) 293
10.45 DL2 (Delay Time 2) 295
10.46 DMD (Dosing Mode) 297
10.47 DPT (Decimal Point) 300
10.48 DPW (Define Password) 302
10.49 DST (Dosing Time) 303
10.50 DT1 (Delay Time Output 1) 305
10.51 DT2 (Delay Time Output 2) 307
10.52 DT3 (Delay Time Output 3) 309
10.53 DT4 (Delay Time Output 4) 311
10.54 DWE (Diagnosis Buffer Enable) 313
10.55 DWR (Write Diagnostic Byte) 315
10.56 DZB (Automatic Zeroing Band) 317
10.57 DZC (Automatic Zeroing Count) 319
10.58 DZH (Automatic Zeroing Hold-off) 320
10.59 DZM (Automatic Zeroing Mode) 322
10.60 DZT (Dynamic Zero Tracking/Automatic Zeroing Time) 324
10.61 EMA (Event Mask A) 326
10.62 EMB (Event Mask B) 328
10.63 EMD (Emptying Mode) 330
10.64 ENU (Engineering Unit) 332
10.65 EPT (Emptying Time) 333
10.66 ERR (Extended Error Status) 335
10.67 ESR (Error Status) 337
10.68 EWT (Empty Weight) 340
10.69 FBK (Fine Flow Monitoring) 342
10.70 FBT (Fine Break Time) 345
10.71 FFD (Fine Flow Disconnect) 347
10.72 FFL (First Fine Flow Time) 349
10.73 FFM (Fine Feed Minimum) 351

PanelX 7
 10.74 FFT (Fine Flow Time) 353
10.75 FLO (Flow Rate) 355
10.76 FMD (Filter Mode) 356
10.77 FNB (Dosing Parameter Set) 358
10.78 FPT (Time Base Fine Flow Prediction) 360
10.79 FRS (Filling Result) 362
10.80 FRT (Flow Rate Measurement Time) 365
10.81 FST (Filter Settling Time) 366
10.82 FTL (Fast Track Level (FMD3)) 368
10.83 FWT (Filling Weight) 370
10.84 GRU (Group Address) 372
10.85 HRN (High Resolution) 374
10.86 HSM (High Speed Mode ADC) 376
10.87 HWV (Hardware Version) 378
10.88 ICR (Internal Conversion Rate) 380
10.89 IDN (Identification) 383
10.90 IM1 (Input Mode Input 1) 385
10.91 IM2 (Input Mode Input 2) 387
10.92 IMD (Input Mode) 389
10.93 IOM (IO Mode) 392
10.94 IS1 (Digital Input State Input 1) 394
10.95 IS2 (Digital Input State Input 2) 395
10.96 LDW (Load Cell Dead Weight) 396
10.97 LFT (Legal-For-Trade) 398
10.98 LIC (Linearization Coefficient) 400
10.99 LIV1 (Limit Value 1 Monitoring) 405
10.100 LIV2 (Limit Value 2 Monitoring) 410
10.101 LIV3 (Limit Value 3 Monitoring) 415
10.102 LIV4 (Limit Value 4 Monitoring) 420
10.103 LTC (Lockout Time Coarse Flow) 425
10.104 LTF (Lockout Time Fine) 427
10.105 LTL (Lower Tolerance Limit) 429
10.106 LWT (Load Cell Weight) 431
10.107 MAC (Moving Average Filter for FMD5) 433
10.108 MAV (Measured Alternative Data) 435

8 PanelX
 10.109 MDT (Maximum Dosing Time) 438
10.110 MFO (Material Flow Last Dosing Cycle) 440
10.111 MRA (Multirange Switch Point) 442
10.112 MRM (Multi-Range Mode) 444
10.113 MSV (Measured Signal Value) 446
10.114 MSW (Minimum Start Weight) 452
10.115 MTD (Motion Detection) 454
10.116 MUX (Control of Digital Outputs OUT5 And OUT6) 456
10.117 MVC (Retrigger Mean Value Count) 458
10.118 NAM (Manufacturer) 460
10.119 NDS (Number of Dosings) 461
10.120 NOV (Nominal Value) 463
10.121 NTF (Notch Filter) 465
10.122 OM1 (Output Mode Output 1) 469
10.123 OM2 (Output Mode Output 2) 472
10.124 OM3 (Output Mode Output 3) 475
10.125 OM4 (Output Mode Output 4) 478
10.126 OM5 (Output Mode Output 5) 481
10.127 OM6 (Output Mode Output 6) 484
10.128 OMD (Output Mode) 487
10.129 OS1 (Digital Output 1) 489
10.130 OS2 (Digital Output 2) 490
10.131 OS3 (Digital Output 3) 491
10.132 OS4 (Digital Output 4) 492
10.133 OS5 (Digital Output 5) 493
10.134 OS6 (Digital Output 6) 494
10.135 OSN (Optimization) 495
10.136 PDT (Firmware Date) 497
10.137 POL (Light Sensor Polarity) 498
10.138 POR (Port Set And Read) 500
10.139 PTD (Post-Trigger Delay) 504
10.140 PVA (Read Peak Value) 506
10.141 PVS (Peak Value Select) 509
10.142 PZN (Check Number) 511
10.143 RDP (Select Dosing Parameter Set) 513

PanelX 9
 10.144 RDS (Redosing) 515
10.145 RES (Reset) 517
10.146 RFO (Residual Flow Last Dosing Cycle) 518
10.147 RFT (Residual Flow Time) 520
10.148 RIO (Read Status Digital I/O) 522
10.149 RSN (Resolution) 525
10.150 RTB (Re-Trigger Tolerance Band) 527
10.151 RUN (Start Filling) 529
10.152 S (Select) 531
10.153 SCR (Set Current Range) 533
10.154 SDF (Special Dosing Functions) 535
10.155 SDM (Mean Value Dosing Results) 537
10.156 SDO (State of Dosing) 539
10.157 SDS (Standard Deviation Dosing Results) 541
10.158 SFA (Sensor Fullscale Adjust) 543
10.159 SNR (Serial Number) 546
10.160 SOV (Sensor Overflow Counter) 548
10.161 SPL (Input Level) 550
10.162 SPW (Set Password) 551
10.163 SRV (Software Sub-Version) 552
10.164 SST (Sync Status) 553
10.165 STB (Control Byte) 555
10.166 STP (Stop) 557
10.167 STR (Set Termination Resistor) 558
10.168 STT (Stabilization Time) 560
10.169 STW (Control Word) 562
10.170 SUM (Cumulative Weight) 565
10.171 SWI (Software Identification) 567
10.172 SWV (Software Version) 569
10.173 SYD (Systematic Difference) 571
10.174 SYN (Sync Mode) 572
10.175 SYT (Sync Cycle Ticks) 573
10.176 SZA (Sensor Zero Adjust) 575
10.177 TAD (Tare Delay) 577
10.178 TAR (Tare) 579

10 PanelX
 10.179 TAS (Gross Signal) 581
10.180 TAV (Tare Value) 583
10.181 TCR (Trade Counter) 585
10.182 TDD (Store Parameters) 587
10.183 TEX (Text Separator) 591
10.184 TIM (Date/Time) 593
10.185 TMA (Maximum Filter Settling Time) 595
10.186 TMD (Tare Mode) 597
10.187 TMO (Temperature Alarm Sensor) 599
10.188 TMP (Temperature) 600
10.189 TRC (Trigger Command) 601
10.190 TRF (Trigger Correction Factor) 605
10.191 TRM (Trigger Mean Value) 607
10.192 TRN (Trigger Number) 609
10.193 TRS (Trigger Standard Deviation) 611
10.194 TSL (Trigger Stop Level) 613
10.195 TST (Trigger Stop Time) 615
10.196 TSW (Software Trigger) 617
10.197 TVT (Trigger Delay Time) 619
10.198 TYP (Amplifier Type) 621
10.199 UDC (Supply Voltage) 623
10.200 UIT (Input Threshold) 624
10.201 UTL (Upper Tolerance Limit) 625
10.202 VCT (Valve Control) 627
10.203 WDP (Write Dosing Parameter Set) 631
10.204 ZMD (Zeroing Mode) 633
10.205 ZSE (Zero Setting) 635
10.206 ZTR (Zero Tracking) 637
11 Index 639

PanelX 11
12 PanelX
1 Technical support

If problems occur when working with the PanelX program, HBM technical support offers
you:

E-mail support
support@hbkworld.com

Telephone support
Telephone support is available on all working days from 09:00 to 5:00 PM (CET):
+49 6151 803-0

You can get more assistance by signing up to a support or maintenance con-

tract.

The following options are also available:

HBM on the Internet

https://www.hbkworld.com

Download software update from HBM

https://www.hbm.com/panelx

PanelX
1 TECHNICAL SUPPORT 13
 PanelX
14 1 TECHNICAL SUPPORT
2 Introduction

We assume in this manual that

You know how to use your Windows®operating system
You know how to use Windows® online help
You are familiar with the selected interface and its special features, for example the
permitted line length at a given transmission speed or the minimum cable diameters
to use.

In this section you will find

1. A list of system requirements.
2. A description of installation.
3. Instructions for uninstalling.
4. An explanation of the conventions and notations used in this help.

See also Quick start.

2.1 System requirements

To operate the PanelX program in the current version, you need a PC with the following
minimum requirements:
Intel Pentium processor or equivalent, with at least 1 GHz
Windows® 7 or 8
At least 1024 MBytes of main memory (RAM)
Graphics or screen card with a resolution of at least 1024 x 768 pixels
About 40 MBytes of free memory for the program installation
One of the following interfaces to connect devices:
RS-232, RS-422 or RS-485 (connecting to standard commercial adapter via
USB is also possible)
CANopen/DeviceNet: PCAN–USB adapter from PEAK-System Technik GmbH
PROFIBUS: Plug-in boards CP551x, CP561x or CP571x from Siemens. The
Step7 programming environment must be installed to be able to use the func-
tions.

PanelX
2 INTRODUCTION 15
2.2 Installation/upgrade

The installation requires Administrator rights. We recommend that you close

all open programs.

Insert the USB flash drive in a USB interface on your PC. If you have deactivated the Win-
dows Autostart function or have received the installation files via a download, find the
“Setup.exe” file (root directory of the USB flash drive or download). Double-click on the
associated icon to obtain the Start window.
Follow the instructions of the installation program. Define the directory where you want
the software to be installed and specify the folder for the start menu in which the link to
the program will be created. If necessary, setup.exe will create the directory you have spe-
cified and then copy all the files to it.
STEP7 from Siemens must be installed to be able to use the PROFIBUS inter-
face.

The version of your program is displayed after the program starts in the win-
dow title and in menu Help -> About.

Upgrade
To upgrade from an existing version to a new version, you can install the new version
without having to remove the old one previously. The installation program takes care of
removing old components if necessary.

2.3 Uninstalling
To uninstall the PanelX program, open the list of installed Windows applications. Choose
the PanelX entry and click on Uninstall.

Opening the list of applications under Windows 10

In the taskbar search box type Change or remove a program and open the suggested Con-
trol Panel program.
Alternatively, you can also use Settings -> System -> Apps & Features in the Start menu.

Opening the list of apps under Windows 8/8.1

From the Charms menu on the Windows desktop (not in tile view) open Settings -> Con-
trol Panel. Double click on Programs and Features (View by: Small Icons) or Uninstall

PanelX
16 2 INTRODUCTION
program (View by: Category).

Opening the list of programs under Windows 7

From the Windows Start menu select Control panel -> Network and sharing center.
Double click on Programs and Features (View by: Small Icons) or Uninstall program
(View by: Category).

Only the files created during installation are deleted. Files created during the
use of the program are not removed.

2.4 Typographical conventions

For clear identification and improved legibility, the following conventions have been used
in these instructions:

This symbol indicates an important detail or a special feature.

Paragraphs with this symbol offer a tip or explain an interesting feature.

Lines with this symbol prompt you to do something, for example make an entry.
Individual terms within the text are highlighted in italics. Other special notations include
the entries you need to make, all buttons, checkboxes, the names of input fields, etc. The
menus, commands, dialog boxes and windows used in the program, as well as tabs and
groups on the menu ribbon, are also identified.

We hope these notations will help you identify the relevant sections and menus more
quickly, and guide you through the program in a user-friendly way.

PanelX
2 INTRODUCTION 17
 PanelX
18 2 INTRODUCTION
3 Quick start

Digital sensor electronics, as an independent device or integrated into a transducer, allow

for high-precision weight measurements as well as control of filling and batching pro-
cesses and more. In Legal-For-Trade applications you can set up scales with resolution
up to 6000 parts. You can also use linearization with intermediate points and various fil-
ters to optimize your measurements.
With independent devices you can connect up to 8 transducers. No distinction is made in
this documentation between separate electronics (in a dedicated housing) and elec-
tronics integrated into a transducer. The term “sensor electronics” is used as a term to
cover both.
The various versions offer you a series of different interfaces, from RS-232 to RS-422,
RS-485 2-wire to RS-485 4-wire or PROFIBUS DP, CANopen or DeviceNet. Functionality
does not depend on the interface. However, not all commands are available for every
interface. This is indicated where appropriate in the list of commands.

The PanelX PC software is available to make it easy for you to set all parameters. You
can download the software free of charge from the HBM web site in the “Digital weighing
electronics” area: https://www.hbm.com/panelx.

3.1 Target groups for this documentation

This documentation is intended for two groups of users:

1. Users who would like to parameterize one of the sensor electronics units with the
PanelX software or at least become familiar with the interface commands relevant
for them in the software.
2. Users who have one of the applications listed in the Applications section and would
like to become familiar with the settings and procedure required for it.
You should start with different sections in this documentation depending on which user
group you belong to.

PanelX software
The best approach is to read the following sections:
PanelX software
The part of Interfaces about the one you are using

PanelX
3 QUICK START 19
 The section in Starting up with an explanation of the basic settings you have to
make
Refer to the Functions as needed for explanations of working methods.
Use the Command reference for details about individual commands and how they
are used.

Applications
First read through the section about your Interface and consult details of your application
in Applications to determine what procedure is suitable and which parameters should be
set. Individual descriptions of the commands listed in the Applications section can be
found in the Command reference.

This documentation also contains sections with sample applications for:

Filling and dosing
Checkweighers
Sorting weighers

3.2 Sensor electronics units covered by this documentation

This documentation describes how to connect and operate via interfaces for the fol-
lowing sensor electronics units. The firmware version used is shown in brackets.
See also Overview: Which commands are in which firmware version?, Overview: Com-
mands for P8x grouped by application category.

Transducer electronics
AED9101B/C with AD103C (P7x)
AED9101C-Z2/22 with AD103C (P7x)
AED9101D with AD103C (P7x)
AED9201B with AD103C (P7x)
AED9301B with AD103C (P7x)
AED9401A with AD103C (P7x)
AED9501A with AD103C (P7x)
PAD400xA (P8x)

PanelX
20 3 QUICK START
Digital transducers of the FIT family
FIT/0 (P7x)
FIT/1 (P7x)
FIT/5 (P7x)
FIT5A (P8x)
FIT7A (P8x)

Digital transducers of the PW15 family

PW15AHi (P6x)
PW15iA (P8x)
C16i (P5x)

Measuring chains
Measurement chain with AD104C (P5x)
Measurement chain with AD105C (P5x)

Amplifier boards
AD103C (P7x)
AD104C (P5x)
AD105C (P5x)
AD105D (P8x)
AD112D (P8x)

3.3 What other documentation is available?

Each of the individual sensor electronics units has its own installation location instruc-
tions, which you can download from the HBM website if necessary: https://www.hb-
m.com/support/downloads. You need Adobe Acrobat Reader to read this
documentation. You can obtain Acrobat Reader at no cost if necessary from the Adobe
website.

PanelX
3 QUICK START 21
3.4 PanelX software
The PanelX software is available free of charge. You can download the current version
from the HBM website if necessary: https://www.hbm.com/panelx.
The following sections will introduce you to working with the software.

3.4.1 The user interface

The menu ribbon contains various menu items for settings. For example, if you select
Checkweigher for Application, an additional symbol appears so that you can configure
that application. Some actions, for example saving the current settings for sensor elec-
tronics, are also accessible via an additional menu above the menu ribbon.

Fig. 3.1 PanelX Ribbon in user level Administrator.

User level
You can open different user levels from menu Options -> User level. To enhance clarity,
different menu items are hidden depending on the level. All menu items are available on
the Administrator user level.
The setting is not saved in the sensor electronics. It only applies to the cur-
rent program (and the Windows user who is currently logged in). A password
is not required.

Opening Help or a description of the command

Provided you have not clicked on any of the input fields that appear on the main page,
open general Help for this page with . First click on the input field and then press
to open a description of the corresponding command. Once Help is displayed, it follows
the selected content dynamically. The pages appear in an additional component window
in the default setting to the right of the main screen.

Component window
In addition to the main window, there are two component windows in the default setting
after the program starts: the Measured values window and the Devices window. You can
also dock these windows at other places in the program window or position them

PanelX
22 3 QUICK START
anywhere on the screen. The windows appear again in their most recent position when
the program starts.

Component window for measured values

Fig. 3.2 Information displayed in component window Measurement.

1: Display of weighing range (in figure 1)

2: True zero
3: Displayed signal
4: If digital outputs are active, L and 1, 2, etc. are displayed for each active output. In the
example shown here outputs 1 and 2 are active.
5: If the color of the unit in the display is black, this means standstill has been reached.
Otherwise the color of the unit in the display is gray.
6: The rotating wheel indicates that the program is working and in contact with the
sensor electronics.
7: If digital inputs are active, IN and 1 or 2 are displayed for each active output. Input 1 is
active in the figure.
8: If errors occur the error message and an error number are displayed.
Clicking on one of the buttons, Tare or Zero (setting) starts the action. Clicking on x10

increases the display resolution. Clicking on Gross( ) or Net ( ) switches the signal (3)
that is displayed.

PanelX
3 QUICK START 23
Devices component window

Fig. 3.3 Information displayed in component window Devices.

1: Terminates the connection to the currently displayed device

2: Opens the Scan dialog
3: Shows the connected sensor electronics with address, type, interface and serial num-
ber
If the connection to your sensor electronics has problems or is disconnected,
click on the button with that sensor electronics unit (3) in the window. A con-
nection is set up again.

3.4.2 The Home menu item in PanelX

The Home menu item leads to the home page, which shows the following areas after it
has been connected with a sensor electronics unit:
Device Info
Device State
The Filler or Checkweigher area if you have selected one of these applications. No
checkweigher function is available with WTX110/120.

PanelX
24 3 QUICK START
Device information
This area shows you detailed information about your sensor electronics:
Type of sensor electronics
Serial number or ID
For electronics installed in a transducer, the maximum capacity of the transducer.
The sensor electronics generation, for example the 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C,
AD105C, AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics or 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA.
The version of the firmware and
the date of the firmware version.

Device status
This area shows you:
Status of digital inputs and outputs
Peak values
You can also define which signal will be monitored by the peak values and you can manu-
ally reset the peak values.

Filler
If you have selected the “Filler” application, this area shows:
The current measured value as a bar
The status of the sensor electronics as a dosing process progresses, and which
action is currently being performed
Which values are currently being used for the values settings
You can use the two buttons to start or cancel the filling process

Checkweigher
If you have selected the “Checkweigher” application, this area shows:
The trigger result (MAV)
The number of triggerings since switching on or reset (TRN)
The mean value of all triggerings since switching on or reset (TRN)
The standard deviation of all triggerings since switching on or reset (TRN)
You can use Reset to delete old values (equivalent to reset, RES).

PanelX
3 QUICK START 25
3.4.3 Working with the PanelX program

See also the The user interface.

Requirements
Connect the transducer(s) to the electronics if you are not using any of the trans-
ducers with installed electronics.
Connect the supply voltage.
Connect the digital inputs and/or outputs if they are needed for your application.
Connect the interface.

Connecting with the sensor electronics unit(s)

Start the PanelX program.
The first time the program starts, the Scan window opens automatically. When the
program starts again, the most recently connected sensor electronics are con-
nected again. However, you can open the dialog again by clicking on Scan in the
Devices component window.

PanelX
26 3 QUICK START
Fig. 3.4 The Scan window.

In the Buses and Devices area mark the interface you use to connect the sensor elec-
tronics unit(s) with the PC.
Enter the required data depending on the interface in the Settings area, for example
the baud rate or the interface port to use if several are possible. You can use Add
device and Add serial number with serial interfaces to search for a specific sensor
electronics unit by its address or serial number and also to assign a new address to
it with Change address. With WTX110/120, you can set a new IP address in the dia-

PanelX
3 QUICK START 27
 log: Click on Change IP and set with Write. In this case a new SSL certificate is auto-
matically generated by PanelX; see also Ethernet (WTX110/120).
Click on Find to search for the connected sensor electronics.
Instead of “Read” you now see “Search running” and a progress bar appears next
to the button. The number of sensor electronics units found is then displayed, with
their address, type, serial number and firmware version shown under the marked
interface.

Fig. 3.5 The Scan window with found sensor electronics.

Close the dialog with OK.

PanelX
28 3 QUICK START
Adjusting sensor electronics units
After the connection is made the Home menu appears. Go through the Adjustment and
Scale menus and set the parameters required for your application. Either use Application
to select your applications and directly view and make the settings needed for them, or
go through the menus (Filter, Limit values etc.) to make the settings you need. For
WTX110/120, first go to the WTX menu item and read in the data of your device.
See also Start-up, Starting up WTX110/120.
Use Scope to detect the effect of various settings or to find better settings with the cur-
rent measured values.

Once you have connected to a device, the connection will be made auto-
matically the next time you start PanelX. Click on Disconnect and then Scan
to connect to a new device.

PanelX
3 QUICK START 29
 PanelX
30 3 QUICK START
4 Communication via one of the interfaces

Communication behaves differently depending on the interface, even the same para-
meters are actually always set or read for the command. This section describes the gen-
eral requirements for communication and setting up the commands you must send to
the sensor electronics.

To set up the connection with a sensor electronics unit in the PanelX program, simply
scan the interface on your PC that is connected to the sensor electronics: See Working
with the PanelX program

4.1 CANopen®
The CANopen interface operates according to the CiA DS301 standard (CAN in Auto-
mation), see also ISO 11898. Communication is carried out over 2 lines with CAN H and
CAN L. A bus termination resistor is required at the beginning and end of the bus, each
with 120 Ω. You can only activate the resistors at the end of the bus system: If you activ-
ate more than 2 terminating resistors or they are not located at the ends, communication
will only function to a limited extent (bus errors) or not at all.
To simplify wiring, the design of most sensor electronics features double connections for
CAN H (CAN+) and CAN L (CAN-). This allows you to connect the lines on a node from the
previous node and to the next node to separate connections. The connections are intern-
ally joined (bridged) to keep the stub lines as short as possible. All lines refer their levels
to GND. Therefore the GND (0V) of the bridge excitation voltage must also be connected,
but you must not connect GND with the shielding. Use a separate line to connect the
digital ground of the nodes with the GND (0 V) of the power supply. Connect the cable
shields with the housings of the sensor electronics or connector plugs so they cover a
wide area.

PanelX
4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES 31
Connection variants

Bus termination CAN H Bus termination

120 Ω CAN L 120 Ω

OUT

OUT

OUT
IN

IN

IN
...

Leader Node 1 Node X

Fig. 4.1 Recommended connection variant

Bus termination CAN H Bus termination

120 Ω CAN L 120 Ω

...

Leader Node 1 Node X

Fig. 4.2 Possible connection variant

Maximum cable length subject to bit rate

Bit rate in kBaud 10 20 50 125 250 500 800 1000

Max. cable length in m 5000 2500 1000 500 250 100 50 25

The maximum cable length is the total line length, calculated from the length of all the
stub lines for each bus node and the line length between the nodes. The length of the
stub lines per node is limited and depends on the bit rate being used. The stub lines in all
sensor electronics with double connections are so short that they can be ignored.

PanelX
32 4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES
Bit rate
The factory setting for bit rate is 125 kBaud. To change the bit rate use the PanelX pro-
gram or a configuration tool for CANopen. The sensor electronics support the LSS pro-
tocol as defined by CiA DS305. So you can change the bit rate and address with the
PanelX program or a CANopen configuration tool. Generally the change can only be made
for one node. If necessary disconnect the node from the bus system or deactivate the
other nodes.

Address range
An address is necessary to be able to identify the nodes in the bus system unam-
biguously. The address may be between 1 and 127. The factory setting is 63. To change
the address use the PanelX program or a configuration tool for CANopen. The sensor
electronics support the LSS protocol as defined by CiA DS305.

Estimating the bus load

The bus load depends on the number of nodes, the baud rate and the sample rate, i.e.
how many measured values will be generated. The following formula can be used for a
system with the sensor electronics described in this documentation:

Bus load = (12000 * number of nodes * sample rate) / baud rate

The bus load is expressed as a percentage if you indicate the baud rate in baud. If the
bus load is more than 75% you should use a higher baud rate.

Project configuration of a bus system

The EDS file is included with delivery for project configuration. You can download the cur-
rent version from the HBM website if necessary: https://www.hb-
m.com/support/downloads (Digital load cells and weighing electronics). You can also
use LARcan from LARsys-Automation GmbH (https://www.larsys.com) or µCAN.open.ER
from MicroControl GmbH & Co. KG (https://www.microcontrol.net) or similar programs
as configuration tools.
Configure the address and baud rate and the cyclic PDOs for your bus system and if
necessary modify the entries in the object directory. To complete the settings, save all
parameters (and the object directory) to the non-volatile memory of the transducer elec-
tronics with the TDD1 command.

Note when parameterizing that some parameters can only be changed in a

certain order, for example adjusting the characteristic curve.

PanelX
4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES 33
CANopen communication
The sensor electronics in this documentation support the following functions:
Cyclic process data (PDOs) for measurement output and to control functions (event-
controlled by measured values or time-controlled). Re-mapping of PDOs is not sup-
ported. You can only change the COBIDs of PDOs by using the node number. The
data format of the PDOs and the value ranges of parameters can be found in the
Command reference.
Service Data Objects (SDOs) for access to all parameters. The data format of the
PDOs and the value ranges of parameters can be found in the Command reference.
Output of an emergency object.
Error messages and alarm states.

It is not practical to overwrite all parameters. Change only the parameters

that make sense for your application.

Special features
Some of the parameters have to be executed in a specific order, for example the
characteristic curve settings.
After password protection is activated, the commands identified in the Password
protection line with Yes are not executed until after you have entered the password
(SPW). Otherwise you will receive an error message.
When Legal-For-Trade mode is activated (LFT, P1 > 0), the commands identified in
the Disabled in Legal-For-Trade mode line with Yes are not executed until after you
have deactivated Legal-For-Trade mode. Otherwise you will receive an error mes-
sage.

4.1.1 Process Data Objects (PDOs)

Measured values and states that are collected are transferred as PDOs (Process Data
Objects). Measured values and states are sent without further identification under a
defined CAN identifier. You do not need a query command for this.
The send PDO1 (measured value/status) is sent cyclically. The sampling rate depends on
the parameters that are set, for example the filters you are using. Then send PDOs 2 to 5
(trigger value, dosing result, peak values and alarm status) are always sent if a new value
is present (acyclic transmission). You can also switch these send PDOs to cyclic mode.
In this case, data is transferred via the SYNC object, regardless of whether there are any

PanelX
34 4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES
current measured values. You can also use SDOs to read out measured values and
states.

Re-mapping of PDO COB-IDs is not supported. The only way to change COB-
IDs is with the node number.

Input data (sent from the transducer electronics)

PDO Command
CAN-ID Meaning
No. shortform

1 MSV 180hex (hexa- Measured value (LSB–MSB, 4 bytes SINT32 (Signed

decimal) + Integer 32 bit)) and Status (2 bytes UINT16
module (Unsigned Integer 16 bit))
address

2 MAV 280hex (hexa- Trigger result (LSB–MSB, 4 bytes SINT32 (Signed

decimal) + Integer 32 bit)), Status (2 bytes UINT16 (Unsigned
module Integer 16 bit)) and Trigger counter (2 bytes UINT16
address (Unsigned Integer 16 bit))1)

3 FRS 380hex (hexa- Dosing result (LSB–MSB, 4 bytes SINT32 (Signed

decimal) + Integer 32 bit)), Status (2 bytes UINT16 (Unsigned
module Integer 16 bit)) and Dosing counter (2 bytes UINT16
address (Unsigned Integer 16 bit))1)

4 PVA 480hex (hexa- Peak value min (LSB–MSB, 4 bytes SINT32 (Signed
decimal) + Integer 32 bit)) and max (LSB–MSB, 4 bytes)
module
address

52) — 300hex (hexa- Alarm status (LSB–MSB, 4 bytes UINT32 (Unsigned

decimal) + Integer 32 bit), defined by the event masks
module EMA/EMB)
address

1) There is no trigger counter or dosing counter with APD0 and APD1; see also APD (Altern-
ative Poll Data).
2) PDO5 (alarm status) is marked in the object dictionary as invalid (index 1804hex (hexa-

decimal), subindex 1, bit 31), because the CiA DS301 defines only 4 transmit PDOs. So use
a configuration tool to enable the transmit PDO5.

PanelX
4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES 35
Output data (sent to the transducer electronics)
The control word is required for functions such as taring, zeroing, setting the target
status of outputs or controlling dosing processes.

Starting/stopping output of cyclic PDOs

Cyclic PDOs are not sent until the nodes are in “Operational” state. To do this send the
following message:

CAN-ID 0hex (hexadecimal)

Data byte 1 1hex (hexadecimal)

Data byte 2 Module address, 0 = all nodes

Sending is stopped if you send the following message (Enter_Pre_Operational_State):

CAN-ID 0hex (hexadecimal)

Data byte 1 80hex (hexadecimal)

Data byte 2 Module address, 0 = all nodes

4.1.2 Service Data Objects (SDOs)

Commands for parameterizing transducer electronics are transferred as SDOs (Service
Data Objects). Various parameters can be addressed via index and subindex, see section
Command reference. Data formats longer than one byte are always transmitted in LSB–
MSB order.

Reading a parameter

Output data (sent to the transducer electronics)

CAN-ID 600hex (hexadecimal) + module address

Data byte 1 40hex (hexadecimal)

Data bytes 2 and 3 Index (LSB–MSB)

Data byte 4 Subindex

Data bytes 5 to 8 0

PanelX
36 4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES
Depending on the parameter, 1 to 4 bytes are send as response. 8 bytes are sent for an
error with information about the error.

Input data for 1-byte response

CAN-ID 580hex (hexadecimal) + module address

Data byte 1 4Fhex (hexadecimal)

Data bytes 2 and 3 Index (LSB–MSB)

Data byte 4 Subindex

Data byte 5 Parameter value

Data bytes 6 to 8 Empty

Input data for 2-byte response

CAN-ID 580hex (hexadecimal) + module address

Data byte 1 4Bhex (hexadecimal)

Data bytes 2 and 3 Index (LSB–MSB)

Data byte 4 Subindex

Data bytes 5 and 6 Value of the parameter (LSB–MSB)

Data bytes 7 and 8 Empty

Input data for 3-byte response

CAN-ID 580hex (hexadecimal) + module address

Data byte 1 47hex (hexadecimal)

Data bytes 2 and 3 Index (LSB–MSB)

Data byte 4 Subindex

Data bytes 5 to 7 Value of the parameter (LSB–MSB)

Data byte 8 Empty

PanelX
4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES 37
Input data for 4-byte response

CAN-ID 580hex (hexadecimal) + module address

Data byte 1 43hex (hexadecimal)

Data bytes 2 and 3 Index (LSB–MSB)

Data byte 4 Subindex

Data bytes 5 to 8 Value of the parameter (LSB–MSB)

Writing a parameter

Output data (sent to the transducer electronics)

CAN-ID 600hex (hexadecimal) + module address

Data byte 1 2Fhex (hexadecimal): Write 1 byte

2Bhex (hexadecimal): Write 2 bytes
27hex (hexadecimal): Write 3 bytes
23hex (hexadecimal): Write 4 bytes

Data bytes 2 and 3 Index (LSB–MSB)

Data byte 4 Subindex

Data bytes 5 to 8 Value of the parameter (LSB–MSB)

Use 0x7FFFFF as the parameter to send a command that does not use a para-
meter via CANopen.

Depending on the parameter, 1 to 4 bytes are required for the parameter value. If the com-
mand can be executed, the following input data is returned by the transducer electronics
(value = 0). 8 bytes are sent for an error with information about the error.

Input data (sent from the transducer electronics)

CAN-ID 580hex (hexadecimal) + module address

Data byte 1 60hex (hexadecimal)

Data bytes 2 and 3 Index (LSB–MSB)

Data byte 4 Subindex

Data bytes 5 to 8 0

PanelX
38 4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES
Input data with error (sent from the transducer electronics)

CAN-ID 580hex (hexadecimal) + module address

Data byte 1 80hex (hexadecimal)

Data bytes 2 and 3 Index (LSB–MSB)

Data byte 4 Subindex

Data bytes 5 and 6 Error code:

10hex (hexadecimal): Parameter value invalid
11hex (hexadecimal): Sub-index does not exist
12hex (hexadecimal): Length too great
13hex (hexadecimal): Length too small
20hex (hexadecimal): Service cannot be executed at present
21hex (hexadecimal): - because of local checking
22hex (hexadecimal): - because of device status
30hex (hexadecimal): Parameter value range overflow
31hex (hexadecimal): Parameter value too big
32hex (hexadecimal): Parameter value too small
40hex (hexadecimal): Value incompatible with other settings
41hex (hexadecimal): Data cannot be mapped
42hex (hexadecimal): PDO length overflow
43hex (hexadecimal): General incompatibility

Data byte 7 Error code:

1: Object access not supported
2: Object does not exist
3: Parameter inconsistent
4: Illegal parameter
6: Hardware errors
7: Type conflict
9: Object attributes inconsistent (sub-index does not exist)

Data byte 8 Error class:

5: Service faulty
6: Access error
8: Other error

PanelX
4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES 39
4.1.3 Measured value status
The measured value status is sent with PDOs 1 to 3. The status information depends on
the operating mode (IMD command). Additional status information is available for
example with the RIO command (firmware version P73 or higher) or process data object
PDO5. The CSM command has no effect on CANopen.
See also MAV for trigger status, FRS for dosing status.

IMD with parameter P1 = 0, standard mode

Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

15 Error in ESR status

14 Control input 2 active (1)

13 Bridge excitation voltage error

12 Short circuit digital outputs OUT1 … 4

11 Tare value has been set manually (preset tare)1)

10 Weighing range 2 active (MRA)2)

9 Indicating range exceeded, see also LFT

8 True zero (0 ± 0.25 d)2)

7 Overflow/underflow (analog-to-digital converter/gross/net, see also ESR)

6 Weighing range 2 active (MRA)

5 Limit value 2 active (LIV2)

4 Limit value 1 active (LIV1)

3 Standstill (MTD)

2 Control input 1 active (1)

1 True zero (0 ± 0.25 d)

0 Gross (bit0 = 0 means the net signal will be transmitted), see also TAS

1) Starting with firmware version P81.

2) Starting with firmware version P73.

PanelX
40 4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES
IMD with parameter P1 = 1, trigger mode

Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

15 Error in ESR status

14 Control input 2 active (taring)

13 Bridge excitation voltage error

12 Short circuit digital outputs OUT1 … 4

11 Zero balance performed (CDL, CDT, DZM, DZT)1)

10 Weighing range 2 active (MRA)2)

9 Indicating range exceeded, see also LFT

8 True zero (0 ± 0.25 d)2)

7 Overflow/underflow (analog-to-digital converter/gross/net, see also ESR)

6 Trigger function active (TRC)

5 Limit value 2 active (LIV2) for LFT < 3 or tare value set (manually) for LFT = 33)

4 Limit value 1 active (LIV1)

3 Standstill (MTD)

2 Trigger result available (MAV)

1 Control input 1 active (external trigger)

0 Gross (bit0 = 0 means the net signal will be transmitted), see also TAS

1) Starting with firmware version P77, the bit is reset after output.
2) Starting with firmware version P73.
3) Starting with firmware version P81.

IMD with parameter P1 = 2, dosing mode

Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

15 Error in ESR status

14 Control input 1 active (stop function)

13 Bridge excitation voltage error

12 Short circuit digital outputs OUT1 … 4

PanelX
4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES 41
 Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

11 Lower tolerance limit exceeded during batching (LTL)

10 Upper tolerance limit exceeded during batching (UTL)

9 Indicating range exceeded, see also LFT

8 Dosing time overrun (MDT)

7 Overflow/underflow (analog-to-digital converter/gross/net, see also ESR)

6 Alarm output active (SDF)

5 Fill flow active, see also CBK, FBK

4 Emptying active, see also EWT

3 Redosing active, see also RDS

2 Batching ready signal (FRS can be read out)

1 Fine flow active

0 Coarse flow active

4.1.4 Alarm status (event mask)

Whether the alarm status is generated and sent depends on the settings for the EMA and
EMB commands.
See also Process Data Objects (PDOs).

EMA EMB Meaning

0 0 PDO 5 (alarm status) is not generated.

1 0 PDO 5 (alarm status) is generated if an error state occurs.

0 1 PDO 5 (alarm status) is generated if an error state disappears.

1 1 PDO 5 (alarm status) is generated if an error state occurs or disappears.

Input data (sent from the transducer electronics)

CAN-ID 300hex (hexadecimal) + module address

Data bytes 1 to 4 Alarm status (LSB–MSB)

PanelX
42 4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES
Meaning of the status bits

Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

31 ESR error

30 Residual flow active

29 Bridge excitation voltage error

28 Short circuit digital outputs OUT1 … 4

27 Lower tolerance limit exceeded during batching (LTL)

26 Upper tolerance limit exceeded during batching (UTL)

25 Indicating range exceeded, see also LFT

24 Dosing time exceeded (MDT)

23 A peak value is available (PVA). The bit will be deleted after a query.

22 Dosing error (ALARM)

21 A peak result is available (FRS). The bit will be deleted after a query.

20 Broken bag/damaged container

19 A measured value is available (MSV). The bit will be deleted after a query.

18 Zero balance was performed. The bit will be deleted after a query.

17 Overflow/underflow analog-to-digital converter, see also ESR

16 Overflow/underflow gross, see also ESR

15 Overflow/underflow net, see also ESR

14 Control input 2 active

13 Batching ready signal (FRS can be read out)

12 Emptying active, see also EWT

11 Fine flow active

10 A trigger result is available (MAV). The bit will be deleted after a query.

9 Coarse flow active

8 Redosing active, see also RDS

7 Trigger function active (TRC)

PanelX
4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES 43
 Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

6 Weighing range 2 active (MRA). Otherwise (bit = 0) weighing range 1 is active.

5 Limit value 2 active (LIV2)

4 Limit value 1 active (LIV1)

3 Standstill, see also MTD

2 Control input 1 active

1 True zero (0 ± 0.25 d)

0 The gross weight is transmitted. Otherwise (bit = 0) the net signal is transmitted. See
also TAS.

4.1.5 Control word

You can trigger various functions with the control word without sending the individual
commands. You can also write the control word in the acyclic data.

Output data (sent to the transducer electronics)

CAN-ID 200hex (hexadecimal) + module address

Data bytes 1 and 2 Control word (LSB–MSB), UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Data byte 4 Subindex

Data bytes 5 to 8 0

For bits 0 and 2 through 7, trigger the corresponding function by setting the bit (= 1). If
you would like to read out the function, first delete the bit and then reset it. For bit 1: If
the bit is set (= 1), gross values will be transmitted, otherwise net values (= 0). Bits 10
through 15 set the target status to the value of the bit.

Meaning of the bits in the control word

Bit Meaning

15 Desired state Output 61)

14 Desired state Output 51)

13 Desired state Output 41)

PanelX
44 4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES
 Bit Meaning

12 Desired state Output 31)

11 Desired state Output 21)

10 Desired state Output 11)

9 Reserved2)

8 Reserved2)

7 Clear peak values (CPV)

6 Zero balance (CDL)

5 Clear trigger results (CTR)

4 Cancel batching (BRK)

3 Start batching (RUN)

2 Delete batching results (CSN)

1 Gross/Net selection3) (TAS)

0 Taring (TAR)

1) The target status of outputs 1 through 6 is only activated if the “Batching” mode of oper-
ation is turned off (IMD with parameter P1 = 0) and the corresponding limit switches 1
through to 4 are deactivated (LIV1 to LIV4).
2) The reserved bits are assigned to internal functions and cannot be set.
3) Starting with firmware version P73.

4.1.6 Busy flag

Commands LDW, LFT, LWT, SFA, SZA and TDD require up to 4.5 seconds to run. The Busy
flag (Bit 0) is set during this time. Watch the flag to see when processing ends.

Output data (sent to the transducer electronics)

CAN-ID 600hex (hexadecimal) + module address

Data byte 1 40hex (hexadecimal)

Data bytes 2 and 3 Index (LSB–MSB): 2000hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES 45
 Data byte 4 Subindex: 0Chex (hexadecimal)

Data bytes 5 to 8 0

Input data (sent from the transducer electronics)

CAN-ID 580hex (hexadecimal) + module address

Data byte 1 4Fhex (hexadecimal)

Data bytes 2 and 3 Index (LSB–MSB)

Data byte 4 Subindex

Data byte 5 Busy flag (UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit))

Data bytes 6 to 8 Empty

Meaning of the bits in the Busy flag

Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

7 Error while executing the command.

6 Reserved

5 Reserved

4 Reserved

3 Reserved

2 Reserved

1 Reserved

0 The command is still being executed.

4.1.7 Emergency object

The object is sent if one of the errors included in the error bits occurs.

You can activate the alarm status independently of the emergency object as
send PDO 5 via EMA and EMB, see Alarm status.

PanelX
46 4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES
Input data (sent from the transducer electronics)

CAN-ID 80hex (hexadecimal)+ module address

Data byte 1 FFhex (hexadecimal)

Data byte 2 Error status tab, see ESR (UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit))

Data byte 3 Error bits

Data bytes 4 to 8 Reserved

Meaning of the error bits (data byte 3)

Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

7 Reserved

6 Reserved

5 Dosing alarm (SDF)

4 Maximum dosing time exceeded (MTD)

3 Fill flow too low (CBK, FBK)

2 Bridge excitation voltage error

1 Short circuit digital outputs OUT1 … 4

0 Overflow or underflow (analog-to-digital converter/gross/net, see also ESR)

4.2 DeviceNet®
The DeviceNet interface is based on ISO 11898 and was standardized in EN 50325. As
the hardware is based on CANopen, also read information about the CANopen interface.
However, there are some restrictions compared to CANopen. Communication is also car-
ried out over 2 lines. A bus termination resistor is required at the beginning and end of
the bus, each with 120 Ω. You can only activate the resistors at the end of the bus sys-
tem. If you activate more than 2 terminating resistors or they are not located at the ends,
communication will only function to a limited extent (bus errors) or not at all.
To simplify wiring, the design of most sensor electronics features double connections for
CAN H and CAN L. This allows you to connect the lines on a node from the previous node
and to the next node to separate connections. The connections are internally joined
(bridged) to keep the stub lines as short as possible. All lines refer their levels to GND.

PanelX
4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES 47
Therefore the GND (0V) of the bridge excitation voltage must also be connected, but you
must not connect GND with the shielding. Use a separate line to connect the digital
ground of the nodes with the GND (0 V) of the power supply. Connect the cable shields
with the housings of the sensor electronics or connector plugs so they cover a wide area.

Only 8/8 attribute format is supported, in other words classes, entities and
attributes are addressed as UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit).

Connection variants

Bus termination CAN H Bus termination

120 Ω CAN L 120 Ω
OUT

OUT

OUT
IN

IN

IN
...

Leader Node 1 Node X

Fig. 4.3 Recommended connection variant

Bus termination CAN H Bus termination

120 Ω CAN L 120 Ω

...

Leader Node 1 Node X

Fig. 4.4 Possible connection variant

PanelX
48 4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES
Maximum cable length subject to baud rate

Baud rate in kBaud 125 250 500

Max. cable length in m 500 250 100

The maximum cable length is the total line length, calculated from the length of all the
stub lines for each bus node and the line length between the nodes. The length of the
stub lines per node is limited and depends on the baud rate being used.

Baud rate
The factory setting for baud rate is 125 kBaud. To change the baud rate use the PanelX
program or a configuration tool for DeviceNet.

Address range
An address is necessary to be able to identify the nodes in the bus system unam-
biguously. The address may be between 1 and 63. The factory setting is 63. To change
the address use the PanelX program or a configuration tool for DeviceNet.

Estimating the bus load

The bus load depends on the number of nodes, the baud rate and the sample rate, i.e.
how many measured values will be generated. The following formula can be used for a
system with the sensor electronics described in this documentation:

Bus load = (33900 * number of nodes * sample rate) / baud rate

The bus load is expressed as a percentage if you indicate the baud rate in baud. If the
bus load is more than 75% you should use a higher baud rate.

Project configuration of a bus system

The EDS file is included with delivery for project configuration. You can download the cur-
rent version from the HBM website if necessary: https://www.hb-
m.com/support/downloads (Digital load cells and weighing electronics). In addition to
the PanelX program, you can also use LARcan from LARsys-Automation GmbH
(https://www.larsys.com).
Configure the address and baud rate and the cyclic data (polled connection) for your bus
system. Finally save all parameters to the non-volatile memory of the device with the
TDD1 command.

PanelX
4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES 49
DeviceNet communication
The sensor electronics in this documentation support "Group2 only, predefined Con-
nection Set" and therefore the following functions:
Cyclic data exchange for measurement output: Cyclic messages/change-of-state
messages, poll messages and bit-strobe messages.
Acyclic data exchange with explicit messages.
Output of an emergency object.
Error messages and event masking.
The data format of the commands and the value ranges of parameters can be found in
the Command reference.

It is not practical to overwrite all parameters. Change only the parameters

that make sense for your application.

Special features
Some of the parameters have to be executed in a specific order, for example the
characteristic curve settings.
The production number set by HBM must not be changed.
Password protection is not taken into consideration for communication via
DeviceNet.
When Legal-For-Trade mode is activated (LFT, P1 > 0), the commands identified in
the Disabled in Legal-For-Trade mode line with Yes are not executed until after you
have deactivated Legal-For-Trade mode. Otherwise you will receive an error mes-
sage.

4.2.1 Examples of DeviceNet communication

Use 0x7FFFFF as the parameter to send a command that does not use a para-
meter via DeviceNet.

PanelX
50 4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES
Example 1: Send reset telegram

Iden- 1st byt- 2nd byt- 3rd byt- 4th byt- 5th byt- 6th byt- 7th byt- 8th byt-
tifier e e e e e e e e

05FF 00 89 03 87 D6 12 00 x

CAN-ID Port- Vendor ID, 0389hex Serial number 1234567= 0012D687hex

Number (hexadecimal) = (hexadecimal)
HBM

Example 2: Open explicit and poll connection to the device

The connection to the device is opened with MAC-ID 8.

Iden- 1st byt- 2nd byt- 3rd byt- 4th byt- 5th byt- 6th byt- 7th byt- 8th byt-
tifier e e e e e e e e

0446 01 4B 03 01 03 01 - -

CAN-ID MAC ID Service Class ID Instance Reason: MAC ID

Leader code ID Explicit allocator
allocate and poll

Response from device:

Iden- 1st byt- 2nd byt- 3rd byt- 4th byt- 5th byt- 6th byt- 7th byt- 8th byt-
tifier e e e e e e e e

0443 01 CB 00 - - - - -

CAN-ID MAC ID Respons- Device

Leader e code sup-
ports 8-
bit mes-
sage
format

PanelX
4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES 51
 52
Example 3: Cyclic data exchange after the poll connection is opened
The Leader (PLC) sends the control word indicating what data/actions are requested. The control word (or control byte)
must be sent again for every response. In the example below a 16-bit control word is specified (APP command with para-
meter P1 = 0). You can also use the APP command with parameter P1 = 1 to define that only one 8-bit control word will be
used.
See also Control word, APP, STB, STW, MSV, MAV, FRS.

Identifier 1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6th byte 7th byte 8th byte

0445 (CAN-ID) Control word LSB Control word MSB —

The following data items are generated, depending on parameters P1 for APD and IMD:

P1 P1
Iden- 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th 13th 14th
of of
tifier byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte
APD IMD

0 0 0400 00 (mes- IMD MSV value (LSB–MSB, meas- MSV MAV value2) (LSB–MSB, MAV
(CAN-ID) sage value ured value in 32 bits) status1) measured trigger in 32 bits) status1)
header) (LSB–MSB, (LSB–MSB,
16 bits) 16 bits)

0 1 0400 00 IMD MSV value (LSB–MSB) MSV MAV value2) (LSB–MSB) MAV
value status1) status1)
(LSB–MSB) (LSB–MSB)

0 2 0400 00 IMD MSV value (LSB–MSB) MSV FRS value (LSB–MSB, dos- FRS status1)
value status1) ing result in 32 bits) (LSB–MSB)
(LSB–MSB)

4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES

PanelX
 P1 P1
Iden- 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th 13th 14th

PanelX
of of
tifier byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte
APD IMD

1 0 0400 00 MSV value (LSB–MSB, meas- MSV status1) MAV value2) (LSB–MSB, MAV IMD
ured value in 32 bits) (LSB–MSB, measured trigger in 32 bits) status1) value
16 bits) (LSB–MSB,
16 bits)

1 1 0400 00 MSV value (LSB–MSB) MSV status1) MAV value2) (LSB–MSB) MAV IMD
(LSB–MSB) status1) value
(LSB–MSB)

1 2 0400 00 MSV value (LSB–MSB) MSV status1) FRS value (LSB–MSB, dos- FRS status1) IMD

4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES

(LSB–MSB) ing result in 32 bits) (LSB–MSB) value

2 0 0400 00 IMD MSV value (LSB–MSB, meas- MSV MAV value3) (LSB–MSB, MAV
value ured value in 32 bits) status1) measured trigger in 32 bits) status1)
(LSB–MSB, (LSB–MSB,
16 bits) 16 bits)

2 1 0400 00 IMD MSV value (LSB–MSB) MSV MAV value3) (LSB–MSB) MAV
value status1) status1)
(LSB–MSB) (LSB–MSB)

2 2 0400 00 IMD MSV value (LSB–MSB) MSV FRS value (LSB–MSB, dos- FRS status1)
value status1) ing result in 32 bits) (LSB–MSB)
(LSB–MSB)

53
 54
P1 P1
Iden- 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th 13th 14th
of of
tifier byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte
APD IMD

3 0 0400 00 MSV value (LSB–MSB, meas- MSV status1) MAV value3) (LSB–MSB, MAV IMD
ured value in 32 bits) (LSB–MSB) measured trigger in 32 bits) status1) value
(LSB–MSB,
16 bits)

3 1 0400 00 MSV value (LSB–MSB) MSV status1) MAV value3) (LSB–MSB) MAV IMD
(LSB–MSB) status1) value
(LSB–MSB)

3 2 0400 00 MSV value (LSB–MSB) MSV status1) FRS value (LSB–MSB, dos- FRS status1) IMD
(LSB–MSB) ing result in 32 bits) (LSB–MSB) value

4 x4) 0400 00 MSV value (LSB– —

MSB, 24 bits)

5 x4) 0400 00 MAV value3) (LSB– —

MSB, 24 bits)

6 x4) 0400 00 FRS value (LSB– —

MSB, 24 bits)

7 x4) 0400 00 MSV value (LSB–MSB, —

32 bits)

8 x4) 0400 00 MAV value3) (LSB–MSB, —

32 bits)

4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES

PanelX
 P1 P1
Iden- 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th 13th 14th

PanelX
of of
tifier byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte
APD IMD

9 x4) 0400 00 FRS value (LSB–MSB, —

32 bits)

10 x4) 0400 00 MSV —

statu-
s1)
(8 bit-
s)

11 x4) 0400 00 MAV —

4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES

statu-
s1)
(8 bit-
s)

12 x4) 0400 00 FRS —

statu-
s1)
(8 bit-
s)

13 x4) 0400 00 MSV status1) —

(LSB–MSB,
16 bits)

55
 56
P1 P1
Iden- 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th 13th 14th
of of
tifier byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte
APD IMD

14 x4) 0400 00 MAV status1) —

(LSB–MSB,
16 bits)

15 x4) 0400 00 FRS status1) —

LSB–MSB,
(16 bits)

16 x4) 0400 00 MSV value (LSB– MSV —

MSB, 24 bits) statu-
s1)
(8 bit-
s)

17 x4) 0400 00 MSV value (LSB– MSV status1) —

MSB, 24 bits) (LSB–MSB,
16 bits)

18 x4) 0400 00 MSV value (LSB–MSB, MSV —

32 bits) statu-
s1)
(8 bit-
s)

4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES

PanelX
 P1 P1
Iden- 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th 13th 14th

PanelX
of of
tifier byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte
APD IMD

19 x4) 0400 00 MSV value (LSB–MSB, MSV status1) —

32 bits) (LSB–MSB,
16 bits)

20 x4) 0400 00 MAV value3) (LSB– MAV —

MSB, 24 bits) statu-
s1)
(8 bit-
s)

4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES

21 x4) 0400 00 MAV value3) (LSB– MAV status1) —
MSB, 24 bits) (LSB–MSB,
16 bits)

22 x4) 0400 00 MAV value3) (LSB–MSB, MAV —

32 bits) statu-
s1)
(8 bit-
s)

23 x4) 0400 00 MAV value3) (LSB–MSB, MAV status1) —

32 bits) (LSB–MSB,
16 bits)

57
 58
P1 P1
Iden- 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th 13th 14th
of of
tifier byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte
APD IMD

24 x4) 0400 00 FRS value (LSB– FRS —

MSB, 24 bits) statu-
s1)
(8 bit-
s)

25 x4) 0400 00 FRS value (LSB– FRS status1) —

MSB, 24 bits) (LSB–MSB,
16 bits)

26 x4) 0400 00 FRS value (LSB–MSB, FRS —

32 bits) statu-
s1)
(8 bit-
s)

27 x4) 0400 00 FRS value (LSB–MSB, FRS status1) —

32 bits) (LSB–MSB,
16 bits)

28 x4) 0400 00 MAV value2) (LSB– —

MSB, 24 bits)

29 x4) 0400 00 MAV value2) (LSB–MSB, —

32 bits)

4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES

PanelX
 P1 P1
Iden- 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th 13th 14th

PanelX
of of
tifier byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte
APD IMD

30 x4) 0400 00 MSV —

statu-
s1)
(8 bit-
s)

31 x4) 0400 00 MAV status1) —

(LSB–MSB,
16 bits)

4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES

32 x4) 0400 00 MAV value2) (LSB– MAV —
MSB, 24 bits) statu-
s1)
(8 bit-
s)

33 x4) 0400 00 MAV value2) (LSB–MSB, MAV status1) —

32 bits) (LSB–MSB,
16 bits)

59
 60
P1 P1
Iden- 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 9th 10th 11th 12th 13th 14th
of of
tifier byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte byte
APD IMD

34 x4) 0400 00 MAV value2) (LSB–MSB, MAV —

32 bits) statu-
s1)
(8 bit-
s)

35 x4) 0400 00 MAV value2) (LSB–MSB, MAV status1) —

32 bits) (LSB–MSB,
16 bits)

1) See Measured value status for MSV status, MAV for MAV status and FRS for FRS status.
2) The MAV value is set to -8,388,608 after sending.
3) The MAV value is not changed after sending.
4) Any value.

4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES

PanelX
Example 4: Read the sample rate (ICR)
The sample rate is read as UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit) via the "Explicit connection"
from the device with module address 8 (class 100, instance 2, attribute 6):

Iden- 1st byt- 2nd byt- 3rd byt- 4th byt- 5th byt- 6th byt- 7th byt- 8th byt-
tifier e e e e e e e e

0444 00 0E 64 02 06 - - -

CAN-ID Mes- Read Class Instance Attribute

sage attribute
header

Device sends result (ICR value):

Iden- 1st byt- 2nd byt- 3rd byt- 4th byt- 5th byt- 6th byt- 7th byt- 8th byt-
tifier e e e e e e e e

0443 00 8E m0 - - - - -

CAN-ID Mes- Respons- m0 = IC-

sage e code R
header

Example 5: Read emptying time (CBT)

The emptying time is read as UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit) from the device with mod-
ule address 8 (class 102, instance 3, attribute 1).

Iden- 1st byt- 2nd byt- 3rd byt- 4th byt- 5th byt- 6th byt- 7th byt- 8th byt-
tifier e e e e e e e e

0444 00 0E 66 03 01 - - -

CAN-ID Mes- Read Class Instance Attribute

sage attribute
header

Device sends result (CBT value):

PanelX
4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES 61
 Iden- 1st byt- 2nd byt- 3rd byt- 4th byt- 5th byt- 6th byt- 7th byt- 8th byt-
tifier e e e e e e e e

0443 00 8E m0 m1 - - - -

CAN-ID Mes- Respons- CBT value

sage e code m0 = LSB
header m1 = MSB

Example 6: Read the NOV value

The NOV value is read as SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit) from the device with module
address 8 (class 101, instance 2, attribute 10):

Iden- 1st byt- 2nd byt- 3rd byt- 4th byt- 5th byt- 6th byt- 7th byt- 8th byt-
tifier e e e e e e e e

0444 00 0E 65 02 0A - - -

CAN-ID Mes- Read Class Instance Attribute

sage attribute
header

Device sends result (NOV value):

Iden- 1st byt- 2nd byt- 3rd byt- 4th byt- 5th byt- 6th byt- 7th byt- 8th byt-
tifier e e e e e e e e

0443 00 8E m0 m1 m2 m3 - -

CAN-ID Mes- Respons- NOV value

sage e code m0 = LSB
header m3 = MSB

Example 7: Write the sample rate (ICR)

The sample rate is written as UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit) via the "Explicit connection"
from the device with module address 8 (class 100, instance 2, attribute 6):

PanelX
62 4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES
 Iden- 1st byt- 2nd byt- 3rd byt- 4th byt- 5th byt- 6th byt- 7th byt- 8th byt-
tifier e e e e e e e e

0444 00 10 64 02 06 m0 - -

CAN-ID Mes- Write Class Instance Attribute ICR para-

sage attribute meter
header

Device sends result (90 = OK):

Iden- 1st byt- 2nd byt- 3rd byt- 4th byt- 5th byt- 6th byt- 7th byt- 8th byt-
tifier e e e e e e e e

0443 00 90 - - - - - -

CAN-ID Mes- Respons-

sage e code
header

Example 8: Write emptying time (CBT)

The emptying time is written as UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit) to the device with mod-
ule address 8 (class 102, instance 3, attribute 1):

Iden- 1st byt- 2nd byt- 3rd byt- 4th byt- 5th byt- 6th byt- 7th byt- 8th byt-
tifier e e e e e e e e

0444 00 10 66 03 01 m0 m1 -

CAN-ID Mes- Write Class Instance Attribute CBT value

sage attribute m0 = LSB
header m1 = MSB

Device sends result (90 = OK):

PanelX
4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES 63
 Iden- 1st byt- 2nd byt- 3rd byt- 4th byt- 5th byt- 6th byt- 7th byt- 8th byt-
tifier e e e e e e e e

0443 00 90 - - - - - -

CAN-ID Mes- Respons-

sage e code
header

Example 9: Write the NOV value

The NOV value is written in two steps as SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit) to the device with
module address 8 (class 101, instance 2, attribute 10):

Iden- 1st byt- 2nd byt- 3rd byt- 4th byt- 5th byt- 6th byt- 7th byt- 8th byt-
tifier e e e e e e e e

0444 80 00 10 65 02 0A m0 m1

CAN-ID Mes- Frag Write Class Instance Attribute NOV value

sage header attribute m0 = LSB
header

Device sends acknowledgment for the 1st fragment:

Iden- 1st byt- 2nd byt- 3rd byt- 4th byt- 5th byt- 6th byt- 7th byt- 8th byt-
tifier e e e e e e e e

0443 80 C0 00 - - - - -

CAN-ID Mes- Respons- Respons-

sage e code e code
header

Leader sends the 2nd fragment:

PanelX
64 4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES
 Iden- 1st byt- 2nd byt- 3rd byt- 4th byt- 5th byt- 6th byt- 7th byt- 8th byt-
tifier e e e e e e e e

0444 80 81 m2 m3 - - - -

CAN-ID Mes- Frag NOV value

sage header m3 = MSB
header

Device sends acknowledgment for the 2nd fragment:

Iden- 1st byt- 2nd byt- 3rd byt- 4th byt- 5th byt- 6th byt- 7th byt- 8th byt-
tifier e e e e e e e e

0443 80 C1 00 - - - - -

CAN-ID Mes- Respons- Respons-

sage e code e code
header

Example 10: Close connection to the device

The connection to the device with MAC-ID 8 is closed.

Iden- 1st byt- 2nd byt- 3rd byt- 4th byt- 5th byt- 6th byt- 7th byt- 8th byt-
tifier e e e e e e e e

0446 00 4C 03 01 03 - - -

CAN-ID Mes- Close Class Instance Reason

sage con-
header nection

Acknowledgment from device:

Iden- 1st byt- 2nd byt- 3rd byt- 4th byt- 5th byt- 6th byt- 7th byt- 8th byt-
tifier e e e e e e e e

0443 00 CC - - - - - -

CAN-ID Mes- Respons-

sage e code
header

PanelX
4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES 65
4.2.2 Measured value status
The measurement status is transmitted in different bytes, depending on the control word.
The status information depends on the APP command (8- or 16-bit status), the operating
mode (command IMD), and the type of measurement status (simple/extended) (com-
mand CSM).
See also Example 3 for DeviceNet communication.

16-bit status, IMD with parameter P1 = 0, standard mode

Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

15 Error in ESR status

14 Control input 2 active (1)

13 Bridge excitation voltage error

12 Short circuit digital outputs OUT1 … 4

11 Tare value has been set manually (preset tare)1)

10 Weighing range 2 active (MRA)2)

9 Indicating range exceeded, see also LFT

8 True zero (0 ± 0.25 d)2)

7 Overflow/underflow (analog-to-digital converter/gross/net, see also ESR)

6 Weighing range 2 active (MRA)

5 Limit value 2 active (LIV2)

4 Limit value 1 active (LIV1)

3 Standstill (MTD)

2 Control input 1 active (1)

1 True zero (0 ± 0.25 d)

0 Gross (bit0 = 0 means the net signal will be transmitted), see also TAS

1) Starting with firmware version P81.

2) Starting with firmware version P73.

PanelX
66 4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES
16-bit status, MD with parameter P1 = 1, trigger mode

Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

15 Error in ESR status

14 Control input 2 active (taring)

13 Bridge excitation voltage error

12 Short circuit digital outputs OUT1 … 4

11 Zero balance performed (CDL, CDT, DZM, DZT)1)

10 Weighing range 2 active (MRA)2)

9 Indicating range exceeded, see also LFT

8 True zero (0 ± 0.25 d)2)

7 Overflow/underflow (analog-to-digital converter/gross/net, see also ESR)

6 Trigger function active (TRC)

5 Limit value 2 active (LIV2) for LFT < 3 or tare value set (manually) for LFT = 33)

4 Limit value 1 active (LIV1)

3 Standstill (MTD)

2 Trigger result available (MAV)

1 Control input 1 active (external trigger)

0 Gross (bit0 = 0 means the net signal will be transmitted), see also TAS

1) Starting with firmware version P77, the bit is reset after output.
2) Starting with firmware version P73.
3) Starting with firmware version P81.

16-bit status, IMD with parameter P1 = 2, dosing mode

Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

15 Error in ESR status

14 Control input 1 active (stop function)

13 Bridge excitation voltage error

PanelX
4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES 67
 Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

12 Short circuit digital outputs OUT1 … 4

11 Lower tolerance limit exceeded during batching (LTL)

10 Upper tolerance limit exceeded during batching (UTL)

9 Indicating range exceeded, see also LFT

8 Dosing time overrun (MDT)

7 Overflow/underflow (analog-to-digital converter/gross/net, see also ESR)

6 Alarm output active (SDF)

5 Fill flow active, see also CBK, FBK

4 Emptying active, see also EWT

3 Redosing active, see also RDS

2 Batching ready signal (FRS can be read out)

1 Fine flow active

0 Coarse flow active

8-bit status, IMD with parameter P1 = 1 and CSM with parameter P1 = 0, trigger
mode with simple trigger status

Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

7 Error, measured value output is no longer possible in the chosen configuration. The
data rate and transmission speed are no longer compatible (baud rate too low)

6 Trigger function active (TRC) or error if bit 7 is also active (then the trigger status will be
overwritten)

5 Limit value 2 active (LIV2)

4 Limit value 1 active (LIV1)

3 Standstill (MTD)

2 A/D converter (ADU) overflow/underflow

1 Gross overflow (e.g. scaling too sensitive)

0 Net overflow (e.g. tare value too high)

PanelX
68 4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES
8-bit status, IMD with parameter P1 = 1 and CSM with parameter P1 = 2, trigger
mode with extended trigger status

Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

7 Error, see ESR

6 Trigger function active (TRC)

5 Limit value 2 active (LIV2)

4 Limit value 1 active (LIV1)

3 Standstill (MTD)

2 Trigger result available (MAV)

1 True zero (0 ± 0.25 d)

0 Gross (bit0 = 0 means the net signal will be transmitted), see also TAS

8-bit status, IMD with parameter P1 = 2 and CSM with parameter P1 = 0, dosing
mode with simple dosing status

Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

7 Alarm dependent on SDF function:

If an alarm bit of the monitor functions is activated, this bit and output OUT4 will be
activated (see also OMD). This bit and OUT4 are reset when
– there is no more overflow,
– the BRK command is sent,
– the digital input for Stop filling is set,
– the next RUN command is sent.

6 Ready signal for batching (FRS can be read out) or emptying active

5 Fine flow active

4 Coarse flow active

3 Standstill (MTD)

2 A/D converter (ADU) overflow/underflow

1 Gross overflow (e.g. scaling too sensitive)

0 Net overflow (e.g. tare value too high)

PanelX
4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES 69
8-bit status, IMD with parameter P1 = 2 and CSM with parameter P1 = 2, dosing
mode with extended dosing status

Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

7 Error, see ESR

6 Alarm output active (SDF)

5 Fill flow active, see also CBK, FBK

4 Emptying active, see also EWT

3 Redosing active, see also RDS

2 Batching ready signal (FRS can be read out)

1 Fine flow active

0 Coarse flow active

4.3 PROFIBUS®
The PROFIBUS interface works according to standards DIN EN 61158 and EN 61784. The
sensor electronics units described in this documentation work with the PROFIBUS-DP
variant (EN 50170). They allow for complete parameterization via the PROFIBUS-DPV1
protocol. Communication is carried out over 2 lines and the transmission process is
based on an RS-485 interface. Bus terminating resistors are required at the beginning
and end. You can only activate the resistors at the end of the bus system. If you activate
more than 2 terminating resistors or they are not located at the ends, communication will
only function to a limited extent (bus errors) or not at all.
To simplify the wiring, the design of most devices that support this interface features
double connections. This allows you to connect the lines on a device from the previous
node and to the next node to separate connections. The connections are internally joined
(bridged). The PROFIBUS is electrically isolated from the measuring system and supply
voltage. Use shielded and twisted-pair lines and connect the cable shields with the hous-
ings of the relevant sensor electronics or connector plugs so they cover a wide area.

PanelX
70 4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES
Connection

Bus termination Bus termination

+U +U
390 W 390 W

220 W 220 W

390 W 390 W
GND OUT GND

OUT

OUT
IN

IN

IN
A B A B A B A B A B A B
...

Master Node 1 Node X

Fig. 4.5 Connect nodes to the PROFIBUS. The bus termination can often be activated in
the connection plug as well.

Maximum cable length subject to baud rate

Baud rate in kBaud 9.6 19.2 93.75 187.5 500 1500 12000

Max. cable length in m 1200 1200 1200 1000 400 200 100

The maximum cable length is the sum of the length of all lines.

Display of PROFIBUS status with LEDs

LED Function Explanation

LED 1 Power supply (to the right of the The supply voltage of the RS-485 driver is
(green) bus termination switch) present if the LED is lit.

LED 2 PROFIBUS Data exchange Shows the status of data exchange for cyclic
(green) data exchange.

LED 3 PROFIBUSdiagnosis The LED is lit if there is an internal error. The

(yellow) measurement data may be invalid.

LED 4 PROFIBUSerror The LED lights up if there is an bus error.

(red) Possible causes:
– Incorrect wiring (A and B reversed?)
– PROFIBUS Leader not (yet) working

PanelX
4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES 71
Baud rate
To set the baud rate use the PanelX program or a configuration tool for PROFIBUS, for
example SIMATIC Step7.

Address range
An address is necessary to be able to identify the nodes in the bus system unam-
biguously. The address may be between 3 and 99. The factory setting is 3. Set the
address while the device is turned off using the switch on the device.

Project configuration of a bus system

The GSD file is included with delivery for project configuration. You can download the cur-
rent version from the HBM website if necessary: https://www.hb-
m.com/support/downloads (Digital load cells and weighing electronics).
Install the GSD file in your system. Then configure your system and set the transmission
speed on the bus (baud rate) as well as the node addresses. After that configure the cyc-
lic PDOs with the information in the GSD file and load the configuration into your PLC. Fin-
ally save all parameters to the non-volatile memory of the device with the TDD1
command.

With many PLCs, direct access from the PLC program to data content more
than 2 bytes long is not possible. As the data content in cyclic data exchange
of the devices described in this documentation often has data lengths
greater than 2 bytes, the content must be read and written as consistent data
blocks with other function blocks of the PLC. With SIMATIC Step7 modules,
for example, use function blocks SFC14 and SFC15 (cyclic mode) and
SFB52/SFB53 (acyclic mode).
Note when parameterizing that some parameters can only be changed in a
certain order, for example adjusting the characteristic curve.

PROFIBUScommunication
The sensor electronics in this documentation support the following functions:
Parameter container for reading parameters in cyclic mode.
Parameter container for writing parameters in cyclic mode.
Cyclic reading of measured value, status, dosing results, etc.
Setting the control word, limit value levels, filling weights, etc.
Acyclic data traffic.

PanelX
72 4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES
The data format of the commands and the value ranges of parameters can be found in
the Command reference.

Special features
Some of the parameters have to be executed in a specific order, for example the
characteristic curve settings.
The production number set by HBM must not be changed.
After password protection is activated, the commands identified in the Password
protection line with Yes are not executed until after you have entered the password
(SPW). Otherwise you will receive an error message.
When Legal-For-Trade mode is activated (LFT, P1 > 0), the commands identified in
the Disabled in Legal-For-Trade mode line with Yes are not executed until after you
have deactivated Legal-For-Trade mode. Otherwise you will receive an error mes-
sage.

4.3.1 Cyclic data exchange

Input data (sent from the transducer electronics)

Measured value and status (gross or net measured value)
Alternative measured value and status (trigger result)
Dosing result and status
Cumulative filling weight
Piece counter
Dosing status
Parameter container for reading settings.

Output data (sent to the transducer electronics)

Control word (for autotaring, autocalibration, clearing the dosing counter, starting
and stopping dosing)
Activation and deactivation level for limit value switches
Filling weight assignment
Parameter container for setting the parameters of commands with one parameter

You can define what data content will be exchanged on the PROFIBUS Leader.

PanelX
4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES 73
Measured values and data are transferred as integer values (integers). The number of
bytes depends on the value range as described in the Command reference. Measured val-
ues are always transmitted signed (two's complement) with 4 bytes (SINT32 (Signed
Integer 32 bit)). The byte sequence corresponds to the PROFIBUS standard in that it
always starts with the most significant byte (MSB - Motorola format).

4.3.2 Acyclic data exchange

DPV1 parameterization allows for asynchronous parameterization messages to be
exchanged in parallel to normal PROFIBUS operation with cyclic data exchange. They
can be sent from the Leader (for example the PLC, class 1 Leader), or even in parallel
from a second, diagnostic master (for example the programming unit, class 2 Leader).
The PanelX program works as a class 2 Leader, so can be plugged into a running
PROFIBUS as an additional Leader. The software determines all the modules described in
this documentation on the bus and gives you the opportunity to set all the parameters
and store them in non-volatile memory in the sensor electronics.
You can use a PLC to invoke the relevant service routines for DPV1 parameterization. A
distinction is made between setting up and terminating a connection and between read
and write access to parameters. The parameters are addressed by index numbers and
slot numbers, see the Command reference.

4.4 Serial interfaces

The commands that are transferred with serial interfaces are identical. Only the inter-
faces themselves differ in the type of transfer. The information is transferred as data
packets. A packet consists of a start bit, 8 bits of actual information, which are trans-
ferred as ASCII characters, maximum 1 parity bit (check bit for transfer) and 1 stop bit.
You must specify in advance whether odd or no parity will be used, the speed of bits in
the data packet and the baud rate. Since there is a pause between individual data pack-
ets, the baud rate is not identical with the data transmission rate.
The following variants of serial interfaces are possible:

1. RS-232
Simple transmission via three lines (send line, receive line and GND) between two
nodes. According to the standard, only distances of a few meters are possible.
Therefore you should not use more than 15 m of cable. The interface is a point-to-
point connection, which means that only one node can be connected for each

PanelX
74 4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES
 interface on the PC or PLC. As only voltage levels are analyzed, the interface is
sensitive to interference. If you do not have the interface on your PC you can work
with standard commercial converters from USB to RS-232.
2. RS-422 (4-wire)
Transmission via 5 lines (2 send lines, 2 receive lines and GND) between two
nodes. According to the standard, distances of up to 1000 meters are possible.
The interface is a point-to-point connection, which means that only one node can
be connected for each interface on the PC or PLC. Transmission is differential and
highly tolerant to interference. If you do not have the interface on your PC you can
work with standard commercial converters from USB to RS-422/485.
3. RS-485 4-wire
This form is the standard for RS-485. It allows for transmission via 5 lines (2 send
lines, 2 receive lines and GND) between multiple nodes (bus-capable interface).
According to the standard, distances of up to 1000 meters are possible. In con-
trast to the RS-422, the circuit for the inputs and outputs is short-circuit-proof.
Transmission is differential and highly tolerant to interference. If you do not have
the interface on your PC you can work with standard commercial converters from
USB to RS-485.
4. RS-485 2-wire
This form of the RS-485 interface is used in the sensor electronics described in
this documentation, for example for the diagnostics bus. It requires only 3 lines (2
for data transfer and GND) for communication between multiple nodes (bus-cap-
able interface). As 2 lines are required for sending and 2 for receiving, however, it
is only possible either to send or to receive. Therefore continuous output of values
is not possible, as it could never be interrupted. According to the standard, dis-
tances of up to 1000 meters are possible. If you do not have the interface on your
PC you can work with standard commercial converters from USB to RS-485.

4.4.1 RS-232 interface

The RS-232 interface uses 2 lines for communication, one for sending and one for receiv-
ing. As the function of the lines is permanently defined, you must ensure when setting up
the connection that the send line of one node is connected with the receive line of
another and vice versa: RxD (receive line of the PC) goes to TxD (send line of the trans-
ducer electronics) and TxD (send line of the PC) goes to RxD (send line of the sensor elec-
tronics). The level of both lines is relative to GND. So the GND must also be connected,
but you must not connect GND with the shielding. Use a separate line to connect the

PanelX
4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES 75
digital ground of a PC with the GND (0 V) of the power supply. Use shielded and twisted-
pair lines. Connect the cable shields with the housings of the sensor electronics or con-
nector plugs so they cover a wide area. The total length of the interface line should not
exceed 15 m.

Fig. 4.6 Diagram for connecting a serial interface (with standard assignment of 9-pin
and 25-pin socket) with voltage supply in the same cable.

Bit rate
You can set bit rates from 1200 to 115200 bit/s with the BDR command. The factory set-
ting is 9600 bit/s.

Saving settings
To complete the settings, save all parameters to the non-volatile memory of the trans-
ducer electronics with the TDD1 command.

4.4.2 RS-422 interface

The connection of an RS-422 interface is identical to that of an RS-485 interface (4
wires), although only two notes can actually be connected with each other, as with RS-
232. True bus mode is not possible. However, since the sensor electronics behave like an
RS-485 node when sending data for this interface as well, you can connect multiple
sensor electronics units with an RS-422 Leader, for example a PC. That means bus mode
is possible with this interface.

PanelX
76 4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES
In contrast to the RS-232 interface, distances of up to 1000 meters are possible, as 2
lines are used for sending and receiving each (from all nodes). Higher transmission rates
(baud rates) can generally be implemented than for RS-232.
As the function of the lines is permanently defined, you must ensure when setting up the
connection that the send lines of the Leader are connected with the receive lines of the
node and vice versa: TA and TB of the Leader go to RA and RB of the node and RA and RB
of the Leader go to TA and TB of the node. All lines refer their levels to GND. Therefore
the GND (0 V) of the supply voltage must also be connected, but you must not connect
GND with the shielding. Use a separate line to connect the digital ground of a PC with the
GND (0 V) of the power supply. Use shielded and twisted-pair lines. Connect the cable
shields with the housings of the sensor electronics or connector plugs so they cover a
wide area.

+5 V +5 V
500 Ω TB 500 Ω

TA
500 Ω 500 Ω
GND GND
+5 V +5 V
500 Ω 500 Ω
RB

RA
500 Ω 500 Ω
GND GND

TB TA RB RA TB TA RB RA
T R T R

TxD RxD TxD RxD

Leader Node
Fig. 4.7 Connection of nodes to an RS-422 interface.

Don't forget to activate the termination resistors on the first and last nodes of the bus
system. Often they are always active for the Leader or they can be activated by software.
On the node side, only one sensor electronics unit (the last in the chain if there are mul-
tiple units) may have the resistors activated. Depending on the sensor electronics, use
the built-in DIP switches or the STR command to do this.

PanelX
4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES 77
Bit rate
You can set bit rates from 1200 to 115200 bit/s with the BDR command. The factory set-
ting is 9600 bit/s.

Saving settings
To complete the settings, save all parameters to the non-volatile memory of the trans-
ducer electronics with the TDD1 command.

4.4.3 RS-485 interface

The RS-485 interface normally uses 4 lines for communication, 2 for sending and 2 for
receiving. As the function of the lines is permanently defined, you must ensure when set-
ting up the connection that the send lines of the Leader are connected with the receive
lines of the node and vice versa: TA and TB of the Leader go to RA and RB of the nodes
and RA and RB of the Leader go to TA and TB of the receiver units. All lines refer their
levels to GND. Therefore the GND (0 V) of the supply voltage must also be connected, but
you must not connect GND with the shielding. Use a separate line to connect the digital
ground of a PC with the GND (0 V) of the power supply. Use shielded and twisted-pair
lines. Connect the cable shields with the housings of the sensor electronics or connector
plugs so they cover a wide area.

Make a note of the serial number printed on the type plate. With this serial
number and the ADR command you can still assign individual addresses to
the sensor electronics units in an RS-485 bus system, even after several
notes have been combined together.

PanelX
78 4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES
Connection with RS-485 4-wire

+5 V +5 V
500 Ω TB 500 Ω

TA
500 Ω 500 Ω
GND GND
+5 V +5 V
500 Ω RB 500 Ω

RA
500 Ω 500 Ω
GND GND

TB TA RB RA TB TA RB RA TB TA RB RA
T R T R ... T R

TxD RxD TxD RxD TxD RxD

Leader Node 1 Node X

Fig. 4.8 Connection of nodes to an RS-485 interface.

Don't forget to activate the termination resistors on the first and last nodes of the bus
system. Often they are always active for the Leader or they can be activated by software.
On the node side, only the last in the chain may have the resistors activated. Depending
on the sensor electronics, use the built-in DIP switches or the STR command to do this.
The interface tolerates a maximum voltage offset compared to GND (common mode
range) of ±7 V. You should therefore check whether potential equalization must be set up
between the sensor electronics and the interface. If necessary lay a separate potential
equalization line. The shield for the lines must not be used for potential equalization.
The quiescent level on the line pairs (TA/TB or RA/RB) must be below 0.35 V. The output
signal of the transmitter is normally ±2 V. However, all levels higher than 0.35 V are still
detected as a valid signal so that signals will not be lost with longer lines.

PanelX
4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES 79
Connection with RS-485 2-wire

+5 V +5 V
500 Ω TB/RB 500 Ω

TA/RA
500 Ω 500 Ω
GND GND

TB TA RB RA TB TA RB RA TB TA RB RA
T R T R ... T R

TxD RxD TxD RxD TxD RxD

Leader Node 1 Node X

Fig. 4.9 Connection of nodes to an RS-485 2-wire interface.

If only one line pair is used for data communication (bidirectional) only one node can
send data at a time. The other nodes are unable to respond until after the data is sent. An
advantage of this bus system is that every node can communicate with every other one
(multimaster).
Send one of the commands COF64 to COF79 to activate operation using the 2-wire con-
nection.

Do not use the MSV?0 command in this operating mode. If you do, it will not
be possible to stop the continuous output of measured values that will be
generated.

Address range
An address is necessary to be able to identify the nodes in the bus system unam-
biguously. Depending on the sensor electronics, the address may be between 0 and 89 or
up to 128. The factory setting for the address is 31. Set the address with the ADR com-
mand.

Baud rate
You can set baud rate from 1200 to 115200 baud with the BDR command. The factory
setting is 9600 baud.

PanelX
80 4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES
Saving settings
To complete the settings, save all parameters to the non-volatile memory of the trans-
ducer electronics with the TDD1 command.

4.4.4 Serial communication, commands and responses

As soon as the connection is set up via one of the serial interfaces, you can send com-
mands to one of the sensor electronics units and receive data. This section explains how
commands are structured and how to send and receive them.
See also Examples of serial communication.

Format of commands
Each command consists of the command shortform as described in the Command ref-
erence and none, one or more parameters separated from each other by comma and the
end label. All ASCII characters ≤20 may stand between these three elements of a com-
mand except for ASCII 0Ahex (hexadecimal) (the end label, lf or line feed), 11hex (hexa-
decimal) (ctrl-q) and 13hex (hexadecimal) (ctrl-s, cr or carriage return)hex (hexadecimal)
(20hex (hexadecimal) = space).

Command shortform
You can enter command shortforms in uppercase or lowercase letters. Use the com-
mand shortform as described in the Command reference to set a parameter. To query the
setting, use the command shortform and add ? at the end.
ExampleNOV: NOV5000; sets the nominal value to 5000 and NOV?; queries the nominal
value.

Parameters
Optional parameters can be omitted. You must specify all other parameters, oth-
erwise the command will not be recognized and executed.
If you would like to specify an additional parameter after an optional parameter,
write only the parameter separator (comma), for example LIV1,,,,2; to set only
parameter P4 to 2.
Text parameters must be enclosed in double quotation marks ("Text").
Numbers are always entered as ASCII numbers, not binary. The data types specified
in the command description apply only to the other interfaces or where so indicated
to the output, for example with status bits. The decimal separator must always be a

PanelX
4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES 81
 point. Note however that you must specify a series of settings without decimal point
(but with decimal places).
You can enter numbers without leading zeros and any leading zeros will not be
taken into account. You can enter numbers directly or in exponential notation, for
example +12000 or +1.2e4.

Delimiter
You can use either a semicolon (;) or a line feed (abbreviated as lf, 0Ahex (hexadecimal) =
10dec (decimal)) as delimiter. If you send only an end label, the input buffer of the sensor
electronics is cleared.

Format of responses
Other than a few exceptions there is always a response to a command. The response
time is specified in the Command reference section, but without the time required to
transfer the command and response. The time depends on the baud rate

Response to correct command

After entering a command you receive the response 0crlf, i.e. the number 0 followed by
carriage return (cr, 0Dhex (hexadecimal) = 13dec (decimal)) and line feed (lf, 0Ahex (hexa-
decimal) = 10dec (decimal)).

In response to a query you receive one or more parameters separated from each other by
commas and followed by crlf. Except for commands FRS, MAV and MSV, numbers are
always generated as an (ASCII) character sequence. The length corresponds to the max-
imum possible number of characters for the relevant parameters. For example, if the para-
meter can be ±1,599,999 (7 digits plus sign), +0092467crlf is generated.

Response to incorrect command

If an incorrect command or query is entered, you receive ?crlf as the response (a ques-
tion mark followed by crlf). Query the error status with commands ERR? and/or ESR?.

Exceptions
You do not receive any response to command RES (Reset), STP (Stop) and S00 to S99
(select command for selecting a node).

Special features
The BDR command responds with two parameters, the current baud rate and the par-
ity in the new baud rate.

PanelX
82 4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES
 If you are using the RS-485 2-wire interface (commands COF64 to COF79), there is
no response to input errors. In this case 0crlf will not be generated. The same
applies if you are connecting multiple nodes to one RS-422 interface.
After password protection is activated, the commands identified in the Password
protection line with Yes are not executed until after you have entered the password
with the SPW command. Otherwise you will receive ?crlf as response.
When Legal-For-Trade mode is activated (LFT command with P1 > 0), the com-
mands identified in the Disabled in Legal-For-Trade mode line with Yes are not
executed until after you have deactivated Legal-For-Trade mode. Otherwise you will
receive ?crlf as response.

4.4.5 Examples of serial communication

Setting the address for bus mode

If all the nodes involved are using the standard baud rate and are connected to the bus,
you can use the serial number to set the addresses.
Read the production number (7 digits) from the type plate.
Initialize the interface of the Leader to 9600 baud, 8 data bits, even parity and 1 stop
bit.
Clear the input buffer for safety sake and select all the nodes: send ;S98;.
Set the required addresses one after the other: send ADR21,"12345";.
In the example shown here, the required address for the device with serial number
12345 is 21.
Save the addresses in the non-volatile memory of the sensor electronics so they will
be retained through a power failure: send TDD1;.
The sensor electronics do not respond to the input commands after the S98 command. If
no communication is possible after the setting, the baud rate is not correct.

Determining the existing nodes on the bus

The principle of this query is simple: Query every possible address.
Send the following commands: ;S00;ADR?;
Wait 100 ms.

PanelX
4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES 83
 If no response comes, query the next address (S01, etc.). If you receive undefined or
incorrect characters, an address could be assigned multiple times or there could be
a bus fault.
If 00crlf or 01crlf, etc. is received as the response, a sensor electronics unit is
present at that address. Then send IDN?;, for example, to obtain the device type
and serial number.

Querying measured values in bus mode

In the following example we assume you are using three sensor electronics units on the
bus with addresses 21, 22 and 23.
Set the output format for all three sensor electronics units: send
;S98;TEX172;COF11;.
The measured values are separated by a semicolon and sent as a measured val-
ues with 8 places, text separator and status with 3 places. The end label remains
crlf.
Retrieve the first measured value: send S21;MSV?;.
The device with address 21 sends a measured value and the status separated by a
semicolon.
Retrieve the second measured value: send S22;MSV?;.
The device with address 22 sends a measured value and the status separated by a
semicolon.
Retrieve the third measured value: send S23;MSV?;.
The device with address 23 sends a measured value and the status separated by a
semicolon.

You can also use the following process (processing is faster):

Set the output format for all three sensor electronics units: send
;S98;TEX172;COF11;.
Have all three sensor electronics units measure, but not respond yet: send
S98;MSV?;.
Retrieve the first measured value: send S21;.
The device with address 21 sends a measured value and the status separated by a
semicolon.

PanelX
84 4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES
 Retrieve the second measured value: send S22;.
The device with address 22 sends a measured value and the status separated by a
semicolon.
Retrieve the third measured value: send S23;.
The device with address 23 sends a measured value and the status separated by a
semicolon.

4.5 Ethernet (WTX110/120)

See also Working with the PanelX program, Starting up WTX110/120
You can only use the Ethernet interface for WTX110 and WTX120. The connection via
port 443 is secured by HTTPS. Select this interface, run a scan, and connect to your
device (highlight device and click OK). The device will then be displayed in the Home
menu.

Cannot connect/Device not found

If you cannot connect to the device, check the following points:
Has the IP address been manually changed?
In this case, you also need to generate the SSL certificate again manually. The cer-
tificate is only generated automatically when you change the IP address via the
PanelX program.
Is the update rate less than 450?
Is access to the device allowed?
You can only make these settings on the device.

Generating a new SSL certificate

First make sure that the date and time of the WTX are current, or at least identical to the
values of your PC. Then generate the new certificate. When connecting, you must then
accept the certificate, otherwise the SSL connection cannot be established. Also connect
a sensor to the device, otherwise the certificate cannot be generated.
Use and (holding for less than 3 seconds) to enter Supervisor Mode. You can then
use to display the date and time, and change them using F2 and F3. The setting is
important because otherwise the certificate might not be valid until some time in the
future.

PanelX
4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES 85
Use and (holding for less than 3 seconds) to enter Setup Service Mode), enter the
password (324) and press . Press (Service: Interface) and wait for the display to
appear. Then press repeatedly until you reach the Service: Network menu item. Press
repeatedly until you reach the Update SSL cert menu item. Press F2 to change the dis-
play from No to Yes. Press to finish. Exit the mode with .

Setting the update rate

Use and (holding for less than 3 seconds) to enter Setup Service Mode), enter the
password (324) and press . Press (Service: Interface) and wait for the display to
appear. Then press repeatedly until you reach the Service: Calibration menu item.
Press until Select Group 1-9 appears. Then press until 5 Adaptation appears. Then
press until Update rate appears. If a value greater than 450 is shown here, delete it
and enter 200, for example. Exit the mode with , but confirm the Save parameters
prompt with Y, otherwise the setting will not be applied.

Allowing device access

Use and (holding for less than 3 seconds) to enter Setup Service Mode), enter the
password (324) and press . Press (Service: Interface) and wait for the display to
appear. Then press repeatedly until you reach the Service: Network menu item. Press
repeatedly to check the following menu items and change them as necessary: PanelX
access: On, Ext. access: Y and Access No > 0. If a password is set (Set PanelX passwd =
Y), you must enter it to connect in PanelX. The default password is wtx. Exit the mode
with .

4.6 Modbus/TCP (CiA309)

The interface entry in the Scan dialog has been included for future customizations, and is
currently not available.

PanelX
86 4 COMMUNICATION VIA ONE OF THE INTERFACES
5 Starting up

To obtain the values of a weighing in the desired unit, you must make the basic settings
and adjustments both for transducers with integrated electronics and for sensor elec-
tronics with one or more load cells connected.

Working standard calibration

All sensor electronics are calibrated by HBM in the factory after manufacturing (factory
calibration). This calibration is saved not only to (normal) non-volatile memory, but also
to a protected area. Therefore you can restore the working standard calibration at any
time with the TDD command and parameter P1 = 0. You should only change the working
standard calibration in exceptional cases as doing so requires high-precision calibration
machines. Resetting to the original working standard calibration is only possible if you
cancel any password protection you have set.

When the working standard calibration is reset, most other parameters are
also reset to the factory settings. Only the address (ADR), baud rate (BDR)
and legal-for-trade counter TCR) are not reset.

Without further adjustment, the working standard calibration yields a value of 1,000,000
digits in ASCII format at maximum capacity or with a nominal (rated) output signal.

Adjustment options
You have various possibilities for making the adjustment. However, not every one is
allowed in all fields of application. For example, the adjustment in mV/V must not be
used in legal-for-trade applications. You should therefore first define the field of applic-
ation. Otherwise it could happen that the adjustment becomes invalid after a change in
the field of application.

The Legal-For-Trade counter (TCR) is incremented by one every time the LFT
command is performed with a new parameter (switching to Legal-For-Trade
or to industrial mode). No adjustment is possible in Legal-For-Trade mode.
The adjustment must be performed in industrial mode. As the counter state
is noted on the scale for legal-for-trade applications, changes to the adjust-
ment or calibration can be discovered by comparing.
See also Legal-For-Trade mode.

PanelX
5 STARTING UP 87
 If you would like to set up several scales of the same type, you can first make
an adjustment in mV/V with the default values (2 mV/V), save the settings on
the PC and transfer them to other sensor electronics units. Then perform the
adjustment with direct load if you are planning to use a legal-for-trade applic-
ation.

Variants generally available for adjustment and calibration

1. Calibration and adjustment with a direct load (application calibration)
This variant must be used in legal-for-trade applications.
2. Adjustment in mV/V
This variant can only be used in non-Legal-For-Trade (industrial) mode.
3. Linearization
You can use this variant in addition to calibration and adjustment with a direct
load.

Differences between adjustment, calibration and legal verification

A calibration determines the correlation between what is displayed and the actual weight
value. Therefore you need a calibration weight. Then the display is adjusted or set to the
actual weight value. If you are entering the values from a data sheet or calibration pro-
tocol, it is simply an adjustment. The term calibration is only used if the correctness of
the display has been "verified" with a calibration weight or, when performed by a weights
and measures officer, by a legal verification.
See also Legal-For-Trade mode.

General definitions
Before you make an adjustment for scales, you must first make a few general definitions:
Should the scale have only one weighing range or should it work as a dual-range
scale?
What unit should be displayed?
Should a legal-for-trade scale be set up?

When is a second weighing range useful?

Two measuring ranges can be advantageous, especially for static scales in legal-for-
trade applications. The number of verification intervals determines the resolution in the
weighing range of the load cell. To achieve a better resolution in the partial load range, a
second weighing range can be used, provided an appropriate load cell is available.

PanelX
88 5 STARTING UP
This makes it possible, for example, to measure a load up to 100 kg with a resolution of
20 g or up to a nominal load of 200 kg with a resolution of 50 g.
In dual-range mode, depending on the gross weight, the weighing range switches from
range 1 (small load) to range 2 (full load). Switching back to weighing range 1 does not
occur until the zero point has definitively been reached again (exactly zero; standstill con-
dition required).

Using multiple sensor electronics units (synchronizing)

Synchronization is only possible with the AD105D, AD112D and PAD400xA
sensor electronics units, and only with firmware version 1.09 or higher. You
can configure the function as from PanelX version 2.1.4.

If you are using multiple sensor electronics units, we recommend synchronizing their car-
rier frequencies so as to prevent mutual interference caused by slightly differing carrier
frequencies.

Where transducer cables are laid in parallel, synchronization should be car-

ried out in any case.

Synchronization is also necessary if you want to time the measurement signals of mul-
tiple sensor electronics units synchronously for further processing or analysis.

For synchronization, configure one sensor electronics unit as the Sync Leader and the
others as Sync Followers; see Synchronization of multiple sensor electronics units.

5.1 General settings and definitions

Procedure in the PanelX program

If you would like to set up a second measuring range, click on the Scale menu item
and create the changeover point for the second measuring range (Range selection).
Click on Write to save the value in the sensor electronics.
Click on the Adjustment menu item.
Define the number of Decimal points (position of the decimal point).
Specify the unit (Measuring unit) of the measured values.
Specify the Resolution, which in turn determines the minimum load cell verification
interval.
For Nominal value specify the measuring range for the scale. The measuring range

PanelX
5 STARTING UP 89
 does not need to be the same as the maximum capacity.
Click on Write to save the values in the sensor electronics.

Procedure when using one of the interfaces

Cancel any password protection (SPW) you have set if you are performing the adjust-
ment via one of the serial interfaces or PROFIBUS. (Password protection does not
apply to communication with CANopen or DeviceNet.)
Set the sampling rate (HSM) and Filter to their lowest values so that the measured
values will fluctuate as little as possible, thereby ensuring a good adjustment.
Define whether you would like to set up a dual-range scale. Then specify the
changeover point between the two ranges (MRA).
Specify the nominal (rated) range of the scale (NOV).
Specify the resolution RSN, which in turn determines the minimum load cell veri-
fication interval.
Define the position of the decimal point (DPT) and thereby the number of places
after the decimal in the display.
Specify the unit of the measured value (ENU).

5.2 Calibration (and adjustment) with a direct load

This type of calibration is the only one allowed in applications subject to

weights and measures approval. The General settings must already be in
effect. The calibration weight you use must be at least 20% of the maximum
capacity.
See also Legal-For-Trade mode.

Procedure in the PanelX program

Click on the Adjustment menu item if it is not already displayed.
Enter the value for the Calibration weight you are using.
Click on Start calibration.
“Unload scale!” appears in the comment field.
Make certain the scale is unloaded (empty).

PanelX
90 5 STARTING UP
 Click on Measure dead load.
First the message “Measuring” appears in the comment field, then “Place cal-
ibration weight!”.
Place the specified calibration weight on the scale.
Click on Measure weight.

A measurement is performed. After a successful calibration, appears.

Click Reset to reset the sensor electronics to the factory settings.

Procedure when using interfaces

If you do not perform the calibration with the nominal load (partial range calibration),
enter the weight that is used as a percentage of the maximum capacity *10,000
(CWT).
Measure the output signal of the load cells (the initial load) with the scale unloaded
(LDW).
Load the scale with calibration weight.
Use this to measure the signal that is generated (LWT).
The new characteristic curve is not set and used until all parameters have been meas-
ured. Specifying the maximum capacity (NOV) assigns the digits to the weight value.

Measuring dead load (initial load)

Resolution

1,000,000d

700,000d
e
rv
cu
tic
ris
te
ac
ar
ch
al
iti
In
100,000d

0d
0 0.2 1.4 2.0 mV/V

Fig. 5.1 Effect of the measurement on the characteristic curve.

The current input signal of the unloaded scale (initial load) is assigned an output value of
0 digits.

PanelX
5 STARTING UP 91
Measuring full scale
Resolution
1,000,000d

rve
cu
is tic
c te r
ra
ha
lc
tia
Ini

0d
0.2 1.4 mV/V

Fig. 5.2 Effect of the measurement on the characteristic curve.

The current input signal of the scale loaded with maximum capacity is assigned an out-
put value of 1,000,000 digits. In a calibration with partial load, the measured value is
extrapolated to the nominal load and that value is assigned.

5.3 Adjustment in mV/V

This type of calibration is not permitted in applications subject to weights

and measures approval. The General settings must already be made.

Procedure in the PanelX program

Click on the Adjustment menu item if it is not already displayed.
Activate Calculate calibration and mV/V (optional).
Either activate Measure dead load or enter the value for the Scale dead load.
For independent sensor electronics, specify how many load cells are connected
(Load cell count).
Specify the characteristic value of the connected transducer(s): Characteristic value.
You can take the value from the calibration protocol or the transducer.
Click on Start calibration.
If you have activated Measure dead load, the comment field shows “Unload scale”
and Measure dead load appears on the button. Unload the scale and click the but-
ton.

After a successful calibration, appears.

PanelX
92 5 STARTING UP
If a calibration and adjustment has already been made, you can have other maximum
capacities converted by specifying only Calculate calibration. You can either measure the
scale dead load again or enter it.

5.4 Changing the working standard calibration

You should only change the factory characteristic curve if you have high-pre-
cision calibration machines. There is no way provided to make the change in
the PanelX program. Entering or measuring the factory characteristic curve
sets the user characteristic curve (LDW/LWT) to 0/1,000,000 and resets the
value for CWT to 1,000,000.
The TDD0; command restores the original working standard calibration.

Procedure when using interfaces

Measure the output signal of the load cell without a load or use a calibration unit
and set a misalignment of 0 mV/V (SZA).
Load the load cell with the maximum capacity or use a calibration unit and set a mis-
alignment of 2 mV/V.
Use this to measure the signal that is generated (SFA).
The new characteristic curve is not set and used until both parameters have been meas-
ured.

Measuring the factory characteristic curve zero point

Resolution
1,000,000d

v e
c ur
is tic
ter
ac
ar
ch
al
iti
In

0 2 mV/V

Fig. 5.3 Effect of the measurement on the characteristic curve.

PanelX
5 STARTING UP 93
The internal measured value corresponds to the input signal 0 mV/V of a calibration
standard or to the unloaded load cell. An output value of 0 digits is assigned to this
internal measured value.

Measuring the factory characteristic curve full scale

Resolution

1,000,000d

e
c urv
tic
ris
ra cte
ha
lc
tia
Ini

0 2 mV/V

Fig. 5.4 Effect of the measurement on the characteristic curve.

The internal measured value corresponds to the input signal 2 mV/V of a calibration
standard or to the maximum capacity of a loaded load cell. An output value of 1,000,000
digits is assigned to this internal measured value.

you can see the values of the working standard calibration in the Adjustment
menu item on the Extended tab.

5.5 Using linearization

You cannot perform linearization until the scale is adjusted (calibrated and
adjusted) because linearization affects the user characteristic curve
(LDW/LWT).
The function is not available for WTX110/120.

The settings for linearization can be found on the Extended tab in the Adjustment menu
item. The values of the working standard calibration are also displayed on this tab.
The user characteristic curve is defined by two points. With linearization you can use a
3rd order polynomial to compensate for a less than ideal linear characteristic curve.
Measured value = K0 + K1 * x + K2 * x2 + K3 * x3
where x = measured value of the A/D converter

PanelX
94 5 STARTING UP
Let PanelX calculate the coefficients based on measurements of the actual characteristic
curve. The coefficients are not calculated by the sensor electronics.
See also LIC.

Procedure in the PanelX program

Enter the measured values (Actual value) and the actual values (Target value)) under
User linearization for 4 measuring points.
Click on Calculate.
The coefficients are calculated and displayed in the coefficient fields.
Click on Write.
If you have already determined the coefficients, you can also enter them directly in the
corresponding fields LIC0 to LIC3 (K0 to K3 from the above formula).

5.6 Synchronization of multiple sensor electronics units

For transducers that are supplied not with DC voltage but with carrier frequency, we
recommend synchronization if you have to lay the transducer cables of multiple sensor
electronics units next to each other. Synchronization prevents minor differences in the
individual carrier frequencies causing mutual interference due to crosstalk.

Synchronization is only possible with the AD105D, AD112D and PAD400xA

sensor electronics units, and only with firmware version 1.09 or higher. You
can configure the function as from PanelX version 2.1.4.

With these sensor electronics unit you have a choice of two synchronization methods:

1. Synchronization via the digital inputs/outputs.

Use one digital output for the Sync Leader and one digital input on each Sync Fol-
lower, meaning the input or output concerned is no longer available for other pur-
poses.
2. Synchronization via a CANopen sync message.
This synchronization method only works in the "Operational" state, and the bus
load must not be too high.

5.6.1 Synchronization via the digital inputs/outputs

The sensor electronics unit defined as Sync Leader sends sync pulses via a digital output
which are used by the Sync Followers for synchronization. The Sync Followers then

PanelX
5 STARTING UP 95
operate synchronously with the Sync Leader (carrier frequency and data acquisition).

Cabling
Connect the selected digital output of the Sync Leader to the selected digital inputs
of the Sync Followers.

If you are using the AD105D sensor electronics as Sync Leader or Sync Fol-
lower, you must use a pull-up resistor at the output of the Sync Leader; see
data sheet.

Settings in PanelX
Connect to the sensor electronics unit you want to use as the Sync Leader.
Click on the IO menu item.
Activate the User-defined option.
For the output you used for the connection above, select Sync. Leader
(PAD/AD105D).
Select Leader - Digital IO for the Sync Mode.
Set the Sync Interval. The entry is made in periods (cycles) of the carrier frequency.
At a carrier frequency of 1200 Hz and the value 120, synchronization occurs every
100 ms.
Click Write to save the settings.
Connect to one of the sensor electronics units you want to use as a Sync Follower.
Click on the IO menu item.
Activate the User-defined option.
For the input you used for the connection above, select Sync. Follower
(PAD/AD105D).
Specify the Input signal level: either 0…1V / 4…12V or 0…6V / 10…24V. The setting
depends on what voltage your Sync Leader sensor electronics can supply, or on the
supply voltage of the sensor electronics unit.
Set the input signal threshold. We recommend using a value between the values spe-
cified for Input signal level, e.g. 8000 mV for the setting 0…6V / 10…24V.
Select Follower - Digital IO for Sync Mode.
Click Write to save the settings.
Repeat the last steps for all sensor electronics units that are to work as Sync Fol-
lowers.

PanelX
96 5 STARTING UP
5.6.2 Synchronization via a CANopen sync message
The sensor electronics defined as Sync Leader sends a sync message via the CAN bus
which is received and analyzed by the Sync Followers. The Sync Followers then syn-
chronize their carrier frequency to the Sync Leader.

Synchronization only works in the "Operational" state, and the bus load must
be below 50%. The critical range for a CANopen data rate of 1000 kbit/s is
color-highlighted in the table.
See also Sample rate of measured values.

Minimum required CANopen data rate (rounded) at 50% load in kbit/s

Sample rate Number of sensor electronics units

(measured val-
ues/s) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

1200 270 539 809 1078 1348 1617 1887 2156 2426 2695

600 135 270 404 539 674 809 943 1078 1213 1348

300 67 135 202 270 337 404 472 539 606 674

150 34 67 101 135 169 202 236 270 303 337

75 17 34 51 67 84 101 118 135 152 169

37.5 8.4 17 25 34 42 51 59 67 76 84

18.8 4.2 8.4 13 17 21 25 30 34 38 42

9.4 2.1 4.2 6.3 8.4 11 13 15 17 19 21

4.7 1.1 2.1 3.2 4.2 5.3 6.3 7.4 8.4 9.5 11

Use the next higher setting for the data rate to ensure the synchronization runs properly.

Example
With six sensor electronics units and a sample rate of 300 measured values per second,
you should use a data rate of 500 kbit/s. If only a data rate of 250 kbit/s is available, you
should reduce the sample rate to 150 measured values per second.

Cabling
Connect the sensor electronics via the CAN bus, if not already connected.

PanelX
5 STARTING UP 97
Settings in PanelX
Connect to the sensor electronics unit you want to use as the Sync Leader.
Click on the IO menu item.
Activate the User-defined option.
Select Leader - CANopen for the Sync Mode.
Set the Sync Interval. The entry is made in periods (cycles) of the carrier frequency.
At a carrier frequency of 1200 Hz and the value 120, synchronization occurs every
100 ms.
Click Write to save the settings.
Connect to one of the sensor electronics units you want to use as a Sync Follower.
Click on the IO menu item.
Activate the User-defined option.
Select Follower - CANopen for the Sync Mode.
Click Write to save the settings.
Repeat the last steps for all sensor electronics units that are to work as Sync Fol-
lowers.

5.7 Starting up WTX110/120

For connecting to a WTX110/120, see Ethernet (WTX110/120).
Make the settings in the PanelX menus as detailed in the Starting up section. However,
the only Applications available for WTX are Standard and Filler.
WTX has its own menu item, presenting various settings in a tree structure. Some of
them are not accessible from the other menus.

The view is saved in the background when you choose a different menu item.
But after making changes you must update with Read, as changed settings
are not automatically read in again.

The information displayed is read directly from the WTX, and corresponds to the ter-
minology also displayed on the WTX when entered manually. Not all settings can be
changed here.

Switching between gross and net is restricted with WTX: You can switch
back to gross after taring, but you will only see a new net value after taring
again.

PanelX
98 5 STARTING UP
Click on Write to permanently save changed settings.

Backup/restore
Backup and Restore allows you to back up and restore the settings of a WTX on your PC.
Settings displayed in gray, such as the network settings, are not saved. This means you
can transfer the settings to another WTX of the same type.

PanelX
5 STARTING UP 99
 PanelX
100 5 STARTING UP
6 Applications

Choose your application for the PanelX program in the menu ribbon with Application (

). An additional symbol then appears for the relevant application. Click on symbol
to be able to make additional settings.

Filler

Checkweigher

Sorting weigher

6.1 Filling and batching

Fig. 6.1 Principle of a filling process

The illustration above shows the typical sequence of a filling process (upward batching)
as it is also represented in PanelX:

PanelX
6 APPLICATIONS 101
1. Taring is performed after the check of start conditions.
2. Starts the filling process with coarse flow. (However, you can set a fine flow phase
first.)
3. Fine flow starts.
4. The time for residual flow begins, i.e. the amount of material that will still flow into
the container after fine flow is turned off.
5. The filling result is determined during the stabilization time, after standstill has been
detected (constant measured value), or in any case no later than after the sta-
bilization time.
6. The filling station is emptied or the container is removed.
When you click on the name of an area, the setting options for the relevant area appear
under the screen. Click again to hide the settings and show the (possible) course of the
digital outputs or signals for control.
The following sections explain which settings you need to make before adjusting the
sensor electronics (see the Starting up section) to ensure optimum settings for the vari-
ous segments of upward or downward dosing.
To complete the settings, return to the Main section above the graphic and
save the current dosing parameters in one of the 32 parameter sets. The
respective settings in the different sections are written to non-volatile
memory as soon as you click on Write.
The Home menu shows the current values and status of the filling process in
the Filler window. You can also start or stop the filling process manually in
this window.
See also Home in PanelX.

Relevant commands
Dosing mode (DMD), Fill weight (FWT), Valve control (VCT), Save dosing parameter
set (WDP)
Select the dosing parameter set (RDP)
Start batching (RUN or digital input) or redosing (RDS)
Start weight monitoring (SDF, MSW)
Taring (TMD, TAD)
First fine flow phase before the coarse flow (FFL)
Coarse flow control (CFD) with lockout time (LTC) and dosage monitoring (CBK,
CBT)

PanelX
102 6 APPLICATIONS
 Fine flow control (FFD) with lockout time (LTF) and dosage monitoring (FBK, FBT),
minimum fine flow amount (FFM)
Time interval (FPT) for fine flow prediction
Residual flow time (RFT)
Stabilization time (STT)
Dosing time monitoring (MDT)
Actual value determination (FRS) with tolerance checking (UTL, LTL)
Emptying (EPT)
Read dosing counter (NDS), Dosing status (SDO), Summation function (SUM), Stand-
ard deviation (SDS), Mean value (SDM), Dosing time (DST), Coarse flow time (CFT),
Fine flow time (FFT), Emptying time (EPT)
Optimization (OSN), affects CFD and FFD, systematic deviation (SYD)
Start batching process (RUN) or cancel it (BRK).

6.1.1 General settings

Generally speaking there are two types of filling:

1. The type already described, Upward dosing, in which a container is weighed during
filling and then removed.
2. Downward dosing, in which the removal of the weight of a storage container is
weighed while a (smaller) container is being filled.
Precision batching

Measurement time
Coarse batching

Residual flow

Emptying
Taring

Fig. 6.2 Upward dosing

PanelX
6 APPLICATIONS 103
 Precision batching

Measurement time
Coarse batching

Residual flow

Filling
Taring

Fig. 6.3 Downward dosing

Main section in the PanelX program

Specify the fill weight (FWT).
Define the maximum dosing time (MDT).
If the dosing time is exceeded, batching is aborted with an error and the outputs
for coarse and fine flow are set to inactive again.
Specify the dosing mode (DMD).
Specify whether you would like to have optimization of coarse and fine flow defined
by the sensor electronics (OSN) or would like to define the times yourself.
Click on Write to save the settings in the sensor electronics.
In the Dosing parameter set area you can Store the current settings in the settings para-
meter set or read out one of the saved parameter sets and Activate it.

Alarms section in the PanelX program

In this section you can determine that an alarm will be triggered under certain conditions:
Alarm on overflow or underflow of gross signal, net signal or analog-to-digital con-
verter value.
Output alarm when the maximum dosing time is exceeded (MDT).
Total weight monitoring at the start of dosing. If the measured value is greater than
the empty weight (EWT), the batching process will not be started. Filling to com-
pletion when the container is damaged (for example a burst sack) is pointless.
Configure the alarm states to be displayed with the SDF (Special Dosing Functions) com-
mand with bits 2, 3 and 0. The alarm is displayed in the measured value status (MSV)
and in the dosing status (SDO). You can send it to a digital output (OMD).

PanelX
104 6 APPLICATIONS
6.1.2 Start
The settings are divided into two sections: To complete your settings, click on Write to
save the settings in the sensor electronics.

Main section

Empty weight and minimum start weight

In the Main section, use these two values to define the range within which the measured
value must lie for taring to be performed. The currently measured value must then lie
above the minimum staring weight (MSW) and below the empty weight (EWT).
See also Tare limit (empty weight).

Alarm for empty weight (SDF)

If the empty weight is exceeded, you can have an alarm triggered. The alarm is displayed
in the status bits of the SDF command (Special Dosing Functions) in bit 0.

Redosing (RDS)
You can define here that redosing will be performed before taring if the current measured
value is above the fine flow cutoff point but still below the Lower tolerance limit. Then the
filling process will continue with the stabilization time.
See also Stabilization time.

Tare section

Tare mode (TMD)

Taring can be done in three ways:

1. Off: No taring is performed after the start (RUN command or digital input). There is
no wait for a set delay time for taring.
2. On: If the measured value is less than the fine flow cutoff point after the start (RUN
command or digital input), there is a wait for the delay time for taring. Then taring
occurs followed by coarse and fine flow.
3. Extended: If the measured value is less than the overflow weight (150% of NOV) after
the start (RUN command or digital input), there is a wait for the delay time for taring.
Then taring occurs followed by coarse and fine flow. Use this option if the weight of
the container (empty weight) is greater than the filling weight.

PanelX
6 APPLICATIONS 105
Tare delay (TAD)
You can use this time for example to blank out interference from putting up sacks or put-
ting on containers. Then taring will occur after the delay time elapses.
See also Taring after delay.

Activate Auto to have the delay time for taring optimized by the sensor electronics (ASD).
Then it is no longer possible to enter the values (directly). If this option is active, the lock-
out time (RFT) and zero value settling time (CD2) will also be optimized (the option is
also marked as active in the relevant sections of the PanelX program).

6.1.3 Coarse flow

The settings for coarse flow are divided into two sections: To complete your settings,
click on Write to save the settings in the sensor electronics.

Main section

Coarse flow cutoff (CFD)

After the filling weight is entered (General settings), the coarse flow cutoff point is auto-
matically set to 50% of the filling weight. If optimization is activated (General settings),
the coarse flow cutoff point is tracked automatically. Otherwise enter the required coarse
flow cutoff point. The coarse flow cutoff point must not be greater than the fine flow
cutoff point.

Valve control
The type of valve control depends on your system. There are four methods you can use
to select the type; see the graphics under the selection field and the explanation and
graphics for the VCT command. With upward dosing, the function also depends on the
setting of the fine flow phase before coarse flow. The first two methods differ only in
behavior during redosing or when starting from stop status In the first case fine and
coarse flow are always opened together, in the second case only fine flow. In the fourth
method the coarse flow remains active for the entire filling time and the filling time is
enabled as well.

Fine flow phase before coarse flow (FFL)

The fine flow signal is activated for the set time after the start or after taring and before
the coarse flow for the set duration. You can also use this additional fine flow time before

PanelX
106 6 APPLICATIONS
the coarse flow, for example to prevent the coarse flow causing excessive foaming in the
liquid being filled.

Control section

Coarse flow lockout time (LTC)

Once coarse flow is activated, comparison of the actual weight for reaching the coarse
flow cutoff point is disabled for the specified duration. The time does not delay the filling
process.
Especially when the fill material has pieces, it may happen that the first pieces that fall in
the container after coarse flow has started will generate peak loads that will already
cause the coarse flow cutoff point to be exceeded. You can prevent that with this setting.
Based on experience, the lockout time should be about 10 % of the coarse flow dosing
time. If you are using monitoring of the fill flow limit value, the time must be long enough
for material to reach the container within the lockout time.

Activate Auto to have the time optimized by the sensor electronics based on the material
flow (ATP). Then it is no longer possible to enter the values (directly). If this option is act-
ive the lockout time for fine and residual flow is also optimized (the option is also marked
as active in the relevant sections of the PanelX program).

Level monitoring, coarse flow (CBK)

This option is used for breakage monitoring during the coarse flow phase (sack break-
age). Enter the increase in the weight you expect per time interval (CBT) for a normal
filling process. After the lockout time for the coarse flow (LTC) elapses, the increase is
checked after every time interval (CBT). If the weight increase is not exceeded, this is
interpreted as breakage in the container that is being filled. Fill flow monitoring of the
coarse flow is deactivated after the coarse flow cutoff point (CFD) is reached.
See also Breakage monitoring during the fine flow phase.

Monitoring time (interval) for coarse flow (CBT)

Specify the time interval here for checking the increase in weight during fill flow mon-
itoring (container breakage). The time can only be set in increments of 10 ms. If you
enter 0, the increase will be checked every 100 ms.

Fill flow check alarm (SDF)

Configure the alarm states to be displayed with the SDF (Special Dosing Functions) com-
mand with bit 1. The alarm is displayed in the measured value status (MSV) and in the

PanelX
6 APPLICATIONS 107
dosing status (SDO). You can send it to a digital output (OMD).

6.1.4 Fine flow

The settings for fine flow are divided into two sections: To complete your settings, click
on Write to save the settings in the sensor electronics.

Main section

Fine flow cutoff point (FFD)

The fine flow cutoff point is automatically set to 95% of the filling weight. If optimization
is activated (General settings), the fine flow cutoff point is tracked automatically. Other-
wise enter the required fine flow cutoff point. You cannot set the fine flow cutoff point to
less than the coarse flow cutoff point. If you try to do this, the coarse flow cutoff point
will automatically be set to the value of the fine flow cutoff point – the Minimum fine flow
(FFM).

Valve control
The setting is the same as for coarse flow.

Minimum fine flow amount (FFM)

The minimum fine flow amount determines how close the coarse flow cutoff point can be
taken to the fine flow cutoff point. This means that when the fill material has pieces, you
can set the coarse flow to fine flow interval in such a way that fine flow will run in all
cases. When the fill material has pieces, set the minimum fine flow amount setting to
slightly more than the heaviest piece.
To obtain the most consistent dosing result possible, you should set the minimum fine
flow amount in such a way that the batching process always ends with fine flow.

Control section

Fine flow lockout time (LTF)

The time starts when the coarse flow cutoff point is reached. Comparison of the actual
weight for reaching the fine flow cutoff point is disabled for the specified duration. The
time does not delay the filling process.
When the coarse flow shuts off, settling processes may occur that will already cause the
coarse flow cutoff point to be exceeded. You can prevent that with this setting. Based on
experience, the lockout time should be about 10 % of the fine flow dosing time.

PanelX
108 6 APPLICATIONS
Activate Auto to have the time optimized by the sensor electronics based on the material
flow (ATP). Then it is no longer possible to enter the values (directly). If this option is act-
ive the lockout time for coarse and residual flow is also optimized (the option is also
marked as active in the relevant sections of the PanelX program).

Level monitoring for fine flow (FBK)

This option is used for breakage monitoring during the fine flow phase (sack breakage).
Enter the increase in the weight you expect per time interval (FBT) for a normal filling pro-
cess. After the lockout time for the fine flow (LTF) elapses, the increase is checked after
every time interval (FBT). If the weight increase is not exceeded, this is interpreted as
breakage in the container that is being filled. Fill flow monitoring of the fine flow is deac-
tivated after the fine flow cutoff point (FFD) is reached.
See also Breakage monitoring during the coarse flow phase.

Monitoring time (interval) for fine flow (FBT)

Specify the time interval here for checking the increase in weight during fill flow mon-
itoring (container breakage). The time can only be set in increments of 10 ms. If you
enter 0, the increase will be checked every 100 ms.

Fill flow check alarm (SDF)

Configure the alarm states to be displayed with the SDF (Special Dosing Functions) com-
mand with bit 1. The alarm is displayed in the measured value status (MSV) and in the
dosing status (SDO). You can send it to a digital output (OMD).

Prediction section

Time (interval) for fine flow prediction (FPT)

The fine flow prediction can change the fine flow cutoff point during the filling process
based on previous filler results. This function is useful if the material is not all supplied at
once, for example because there is more or less material in the storage container. The
sensor electronics check after every time interval whether the increase in weight during
the fine flow phase is behaving as it did in the most recent filling processes. If the
increase is stronger or weaker, the fine flow cutoff point is moved to a lower or higher
value so that not too much or too little material will be added in the residual flow phase.
When fine flow prediction is activated, automatic optimization (OSN) of the fine flow
cutoff point is deactivated.

PanelX
6 APPLICATIONS 109
6.1.5 Residual flow
The time for the residual flow (RFT, in-flight time) starts after the fine flow cutoff point is
reached. The amount of material that has still to flow into the container after fine flow is
deactivated is recorded during this time. The amount of material should be small and
should be the same for every batching process if possible. It is important to record the
residual flow for proper optimization and for an accurate actual weight value. The time to
be set depends on the proportioning device.

Activate Auto to have the time optimized by the sensor electronics based on the material
flow (ATP). Then it is no longer possible to enter the values (directly). If this option is act-
ive the lockout time for coarse and residual flow is also optimized (the option is also
marked as active in the relevant sections of the PanelX program).

DL1/DL2: This option is useful for example if material still remaining in the infeed is
stuck when the valves close and will still reach the container due to the blow-out and
shaking process. For DL1 specify how long to wait with the signal for blow-out and shak-
ing and for DL2 how long the signal should be generated.
See also IO see also in PanelX.

To complete your settings, click on Write to save the settings in the sensor electronics.

6.1.6 Stabilization
The settings for stabilization are divided into two sections: To complete your settings,
click on Write to save the settings in the sensor electronics.

Main section
Define here the maximum time to wait for the measured value to stabilize after the end of
residual flow: Stabilization time (STT).
If you activate motion detection (MTD) in addition, checkweighing (determining the
actual weight) will be performed after standstill is detected, but withing the stabilization
time. Otherwise checkweighing starts immediately. If no standstill occurs within the sta-
bilization time, the actual weight is measured in any case once the stabilization time
elapses.
The actual weight acquired after the stabilization time is the basis for optimization of the
filling process.

PanelX
110 6 APPLICATIONS
Results section

Redosing (RDS)
Define here whether redosing should be performed after checkweighing if the actual
weight is less than the Lower tolerance limit (LTL).

Upper tolerance limit, Tol+ (UTL)

If the dosing result exceeds the tolerance limit, status “Tolerance limit exceeded” (bit 5)
is set in the dosing status (SDO). The status is cleared with the next start. The upper tol-
erance limit is automatically set to 100.2% of the filling weight (not with WTX).

Lower tolerance limit, Tol- (LTL)

If the dosing result falls below the tolerance limit, status “Below tolerance limit” (bit 6) is
set in the dosing status (SDO). The status is cleared with the next start. The lower tol-
erance limit is automatically set to 99.8% of the filling weight (not with WTX).

Systematic difference (SYD)

Filling processes may be subject depending on the system to a specific amount of filling
material that is lost after every filling or additional material that is added. This loss or
addition does not occur until after checkweighing and therefore cannot be acquired by
optimization. You can use this function to take the loss or addition into consideration.
See also Systematic difference.

6.1.7 Emptying/filling

With upward dosing the storage tank is filled again in the emptying time. The
term emptying is nevertheless used below, although it actually only applies
to upward dosing.

There are two ways to monitor emptying (EMD) or refilling:

1. Timer-controlled emptying/filling
The emptying time parameter alone determines the period of activation for digital
output.
2. Weight-controlled emptying/filling
The empty weight is used as the emptying limit. The emptying time is also used as
the maximum duration.
See also Start (Main section).

PanelX
6 APPLICATIONS 111
Emptying takes place immediately after checkweighing, or depending on the settings not
until after the stabilization time has elapsed. Emptying is considered complete if the
gross value is below the emptying limit in weight-controlled emptying mode or (in both
modes) if the emptying time is exceeded. After emptying finishes, the ready signal is set
in the dosing status (SDO).

Depending on the design of your system, there are two variants in upward dosing:

1. The filled container is removed.

In this case set the emptying time to 0 and use weight controlled: After the con-
tainer has been removed, the filling process is complete.
2. The filled container is emptied so that the next amount of material can be added.
Use one of the methods depending on the fill material and also define the empty-
ing time as the maximum time for removal.

Select the method to be used and define the emptying time (EPT).
To complete your settings, click on Write to save the settings in the sensor elec-
tronics.

6.2 Checkweigher

1234567 1234567

Fig. 6.4 Principle of a checkweigher

The illustration above shows the typical layout of a checkweigher:

PanelX
112 6 APPLICATIONS
 On the left is the conveyor belt for supplying the product to be weighed
The actual scale is in the middle.
Weighed product is taken away on the right.
Weighing is part of the movement in which the product to be weighed passes through the
middle area. The three conveyor sections work at the same, constant speed.

The aim of these dynamic weighing is a high throughput rate (weighing operations per
minute) without loss of accuracy (low standard deviation). The fast sampling rate, fast
settling filters and the trigger functions make digital sensor electronics ideal for dynamic
weighing.
The throughput rate is dependent on the weight to be weighed, the scale dead load, the
length of the weighing platform (middle section in the illustration above), the speed of the
conveyor belt, the vibration behavior of the scale structure and the required accuracy.
The settling time depends on the total weight (product to be weighed plus scale dead
load) acting on the load cell and the rigidity of the load cell.
You can use the trigger functions available in the sensor electronics to optimize the
throughput rate and also to increase accuracy. Then it will also be necessary to transfer
all measured values (up to 1200 measured values per second) via an interface to an ana-
lysis unit during the weighing process. Sensor electronics take over all control functions
including reporting which weight was measured and whether it falls within the permitted
tolerances. Depending on the version, digital inputs and outputs are available or you can
use a control word (STW) or the status information (RIO) to have your control unit per-
form the appropriate actions.
See also Limit switches.

A precondition for a successful measurement is reproducibility of measurements under

the same or similar dynamic conditions:
An adequate settling time to account for the product to be weighed resting in dif-
ferent positions on the conveyor belt.
A sufficiently long measuring time (for multiple variable) with a low range of fluc-
tuation.
In case of doubt you will either have to reduce the transport speed or make concessions
in terms of the accuracy that will be achieved.
The following sections describe the general sequence under various trigger conditions
(charts in the PanelX program) and which settings you need to make after adjusting your
sensor electronics (see the Starting up section ) to adjust your checkweigher optimally.

PanelX
6 APPLICATIONS 113
Relevant commands
Output rate (ICR)
Trigger mode, Trigger level, Settling time, Measuring time, Tolerance (TRC)
Use filter settling time for the settling time (AST)
Zero balance delay (CDT)
Correction factor for the trigger result (TRF)
Post-trigger delay (PTD)
Trigger result and status (MAV)
Status of digital inputs and outputs(RIO)
Control word (STW)

6.2.1 Level pre-trigger

Fig. 6.5 Flowchart of a measurement (schematic).

The graphic shows the different times that occurred during the measurement in sim-
plified format for which you must find suitable values. Enter the settling time and meas-
uring time here as the number of measured values (MV). Then the values will be
independent of the sampling rate.
See also Pre-triggering via level.
Retriggering is also possible starting with firmware P77.9, for example with multi-head
combination weighers.
See also Retriggering.

PanelX
114 6 APPLICATIONS
Trigger level (TRC)
Starting at this level all times are taken into account, for example the settling time and
zeroing delay, and the measurement sequence begins.

Settling time (TRC)

The setting should be long enough so that the measured values are already as stable as
possible. In the Auto setting the filter settling time (AST) is applied as the settling time.

Measuring time (TRC)

Define how long the measurement should or can continue before the product to be
weighed leaves the belt.

Zeroing delay (CDT)

This time, calculated from the point at which the trigger level is exceeded, is followed by
the zeroing.
See also Zeroing after a time delay.

Correction factor (TRF)

You can use this function to make a correction between the static adjustment of the
scale and the dynamic result. Each valid trigger result (MAV) is multiplied by this cor-
rection factor.

PanelX
6 APPLICATIONS 115
6.2.2 External pre-trigger

Fig. 6.6 Flowchart of a measurement (schematic).

The graphic shows the different times that occurred during the measurement in sim-
plified format for which you must find suitable values. Enter the settling time and meas-
uring time here as the number of measured values (MV). Then the values will be
independent of the sampling rate.
See also External pre-triggering.
In the illustration, all times are taken into account starting with the falling edge of the trig-
ger signal (for example from a light barrier), including the settling time and zeroing delay,
and the measurement sequence begins. The falling or rising edge (AD103c) is used for
the trigger depending on the sensor electronics unit. If necessary invert the logic level
with the POL command.

Settling time (TRC)

The setting should be long enough so that the measured values are already as stable as
possible. In the Auto setting the filter settling time (AST) is applied as the settling time.

Measuring time (TRC)

Define how long the measurement should or can continue before the product to be
weighed leaves the belt.

PanelX
116 6 APPLICATIONS
Zeroing delay (CDT)
This time, calculated from the point at which the trigger level is exceeded, is followed by
the zeroing.
See also Zeroing after a time delay.

Correction factor (TRF)

You can use this function to make a correction between the static adjustment of the
scale and the dynamic result. Each valid trigger result (MAV) is multiplied by this cor-
rection factor.

6.2.3 Level post-trigger

Fig. 6.7 Flowchart of a measurement (schematic).

The chart shows a simplified view of the different times occurring during measurement.
See also Post-triggering via level.

Trigger level (TRC)

After the trigger level is exceeded, all measured values are first written to a ring buffer. As
soon as the level falls below the trigger level again, measured values present in the buffer
are analyzed.

PanelX
6 APPLICATIONS 117
Tolerance (TRC)
The tolerance is used to determine how many measured values from the ring buffer will
be used to calculate the measurement result. Only the measured values that lie within
the tolerance before the level falls below the trigger level will be taken into consideration.
Tolerance must be indicated in digits, and therefore relative to maximum capacity =
1,000,000 digits.

Zeroing delay (CDT)

The zeroing delay begins as soon as the trigger level is undershot. After this time, zeroing
takes place.
See also Zeroing after a time delay.

Correction factor (TRF)

You can use this function to make a correction between the static adjustment of the
scale and the dynamic result. Each valid trigger result (MAV) is multiplied by this cor-
rection factor.

6.2.4 External post-trigger

Fig. 6.8 Flowchart of a measurement (schematic).

The chart shows a simplified view of the different times occurring during measurement.
See also External post-triggering.

PanelX
118 6 APPLICATIONS
All measured values are first written to a ring buffer. The analysis does not begin until
after the post-trigger delay.

Tolerance (TRC)
The tolerance is used to determine how many measured values from the ring buffer will
be used to calculate the measurement result. Only the measured values that lie within
the tolerance before the end of the post-trigger delay will be taken into consideration. Tol-
erance must be indicated in digits, and therefore relative to maximum capacity =
1,000,000 digits.

Post-trigger delay (PTD)

You can use the post-trigger delay to prevent recording of measured values in the ring
buffer from being stopped too soon, for example because the object has already passed
the light barrier but has not left the belt yet. This allows you to make use of the longest
measuring time possible.

Zeroing delay (CDT)

This time, calculated from the end of the post-trigger delay, is followed by the zeroing.
See also Zeroing after a time delay.

Correction factor (TRF)

You can use this function to make a correction between the static adjustment of the
scale and the dynamic result. Each valid trigger result (MAV) is multiplied by this cor-
rection factor.

6.3 Sorting weigher

The sorting weigher belongs to a group of continuously operating, self-activated scales.
It works similarly to a checkweigher. In addition, the product to be weighed is checked
and evaluated for (exceeding / falling below) the assigned limits as the basis for con-
trolling one output (good/bad) or multiple outputs (classifying).
Two factors are critical in determining the highest possible quality for sorting:

1. Sorting uncertainty due to low separation efficiency

You can minimize this uncertainty with the appropriate filters and by optimizing
the speed at which the weighing material is loaded.

PanelX
6 APPLICATIONS 119
2. Sorting uncertainty due to zero drift of the measured value
You can minimize this uncertainty with a combination of various zero setting func-
tions (CDT, DZT, ZTR).
Four limit switches and timing (delay time and activation time) of the outputs are avail-
able for the sorting application (Limit switches menu item). After the (trigger) meas-
urement, the mean value and standard deviation are calculated using the trigger results
from the sensor electronics. You can also have the minimum and maximum values of the
trigger results determined using the Peak values (Home menu item).

Measured Save
Measuring time results
value

LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1

Time

OUT1

OUT2 DT1 AT1

OUT3 DT2 AT2

OUT4 DT3 AT3

DT4 AT4

Fig. 6.9 Typical sorting example

The limit switches monitor the trigger result (MAV). Depending on which limit value mode
is selected, the applicable condition relative to the measured value must be met for the
corresponding limit value switch to be activated. The Delayed: Inside band function is
used for all four limit switches in this screen, resulting in four (weight) classes for the
analysis. By setting different delay times for the four outputs you can control the sorting
unit so that as the product to be weighed arrives it is ejected into the appropriate con-
tainer.

Requirement:
The Checkweigher application must be set up.

PanelX
120 6 APPLICATIONS
Activation
Set the limit switches (LIV1 to LIV4) to the appropriate values (in the example above
P1 = 3, P2 = 2).
Set the delay times for outputs (DT1 to DT4).
Set the active time indicating how long the relevant digital output will be active (AT1
to AT4).

PanelX
6 APPLICATIONS 121
 PanelX
122 6 APPLICATIONS
7 Functions

This section describes functions that are needed for various applications such as weigh-
ing, filling and dosing systems. Not all functions are available for every sensor elec-
tronics unit. Some functions are only available in newer hardware or firmware versions.

Refer to the Applications section to find out which settings you need to make
for applications such as dosing/filling, checkweighers or weight grading
machines.
The following sections set out all the functions available in the sensor elec-
tronics units. The order of explanations is not based on any specific applic-
ation, however, and depending on the application only some of the functions
are necessary or useful.

7.1 General signal flow diagram

The following diagrams show the signal flow of the electronics units as from P80
onward. Other software versions may be missing some of the functions shown here. The
commands for some of the functions are given as abbreviations.

Notch filter

Simulation HSM
Zero
Temp.- IIR
after Mn Notch Notch
M comp. Notch
delay1)
ADC

NFA MAC NTF0 NTF1

Analysis
Storage MIF/MIL ...
FFT
1024
1)
Trigger mode (IMD1) only

Fig. 7.1 Signal conditioning at input

PanelX
7 FUNCTIONS 123
 Filter mode FMD

FIR IIR
FMD0

FIR M FIR
FMD1

IIR
FMD2

IIR
Shadow Fifo
FIL

FMD3
IIR

FIR
FMD4

FIR
FMD5

ASF0 … 9

Fig. 7.2 Variants of filter mode (FMD)

Power-on Gravit. SZA Sensor Creep LDW Scale Motion Auto-

correct. correct. SFA linearis. comp. LWT linearis. detec. zero

Sensor Scale
characteristic characteristic

Fig. 7.3 Further processing — Part 1

PanelX
124 7 FUNCTIONS
 Values
Min/Max
value Dosing

Trigger

Multi-
Zero NOV 10x Deci- Cyclic, PDO /
range Tare
tracking scaling resolut. mator DeviceNet polled conn.
scale
Acyclic, SDO /
DeviceNet explicit conn.
HRN ICR
Limit MSV, COM
switch
Diagnosis

Fig. 7.4 Further processing — Part 2

7.2 Motion detection (standstill recognition)

The measured values of a scale are not reliable until the standstill condition has been
met. An entry of ±1 d/s means that the measured value can vary by a maximum of 1 digit
within one second. Standstill is indicated in PanelX by displaying the unit of measure, for
example kg.
In Legal-For-Trade applications (LFT command with parameter P1 > 0), mon-
itoring must always be performed at standstill.

Information about whether the measured values within one second fall within the selec-
ted standstill range is transferred in the measurement status information (see command
MSV) in bit 3. If you turn off motion detection there is no check and the status is always
“Standstill”.

Requirement for standstill

The gross value and net value must be within the nominal (rated) value (NOV).

Activation
Activate motion detection in the Scale menu item or with the MTD command, specifying
the range in which standstill must be detected. Motion detection is performed at 1 d/s if
you turn off user-defined scaling (NOV with parameter P1 = 0) or set scaling to over
100,000.

PanelX
7 FUNCTIONS 125
Influence due to other settings
The following settings also affect motion detection: nominal (rated) value (NOV), res-
olution (RSN) and changeover between weighing ranges if the scale is operating as a
dual-range scale (MRA).
See also Stabilization time STT.

7.3 Zeroing
Zeroing is performed with an unloaded scale to compensate for initial loads inherent in

the installation. After zeroing, identified in the PanelX program by , the gross meas-
ured value is zero. The value measured during zeroing is written to zero memory and
then subtracted from all following measured values. In addition to performing a com-
mand or clicking for zeroing, there are also various functions you can use for automatic
zeroing under certain conditions.

Requirements
The scale must be unloaded.
The gross value must be within ±2% (legal-for-trade applications) to ±20% of the
nominal (NOV). Define the range via ZSE.
In legal-for-trade applications (LFT command with parameter P1 > 0) the standstill
condition must additionally be met.
As from firmware version P81, you can use ZMD to extend the zeroing range beyond
that defined by ZSE (not for legal-for-trade applications).

Activation

To activate (one-time) zeroing, click on the button with the symbol or use the CDL
command.

Reading zero memory

You can read the saved zero value with the CDL? command.

Clearing zero memory

Zero memory is overwritten by a subsequent zeroing operation. It is cleared when a new
characteristic curve is entered, after the supply voltage is turned on again or with the RES
command.

PanelX
126 7 FUNCTIONS
7.3.1 Zeroing on start-up
This function is helpful if your scale is subject to continuous soiling or the scale operates
at widely differing temperatures, for example in truck scales: Zeroing is performed within
the selected range if at least 2.5 seconds have passed since the device was turned on or
the RES command and standstill has been detected. The zero value that is determined is
written to zero memory.

A change to the area does not take effect until after switching on (again) or sending the
RES command.

Measured
value
Limit of range of zero balance: ±x% of nominal range (NOV)

Switch on Zero balance

2..5 Time in s

Fig. 7.5 Flowchart (schematic).

Requirements
The scale must be unloaded.
The gross value and net value must be within the nominal (rated) value (NOV).
The standstill condition must be met.

Activation
Activate zeroing when switching on in the Scale menu or with the ZSE command, spe-
cifying the range of the nominal (rated) value in which the zero value can be readjusted.

7.3.2 Zero tracking

To hold the zero point stable for a longer time, you can use zero tracking. For example, an
entry of 1 d/s means that the measured value can vary by a maximum of 1 digit within
one second.

There are two variants:

PanelX
7 FUNCTIONS 127
1. Static zero tracking (ZTR)
This variant is suitable for static scale applications.
Static zero tracking corrected the zero value as long as the set zero tracking speed
is not exceeded.
2. Dynamic zero tracking (DZT)
Static zero tracking cannot be used in dynamic processes. The measured values
must be analyzed dynamically. You can activate dynamic zero tracking in addition
to static zero tracking.
Dynamic zero tracking acquires all measured values that occur within a definable
time (P1 of DZT) and within a specific percentage rate of the nominal (rated) value
(P2 of DZT) relative to the zero value. This serves as the basis for calculating the
mean value, which is added to the value for static zero tracking.
Since the operating principle of both processes is controlled by the standstill condition,
there is always just one correction after one of the two processes (but with the two pro-
cesses one after the other if necessary). The two processes are not applied sim-
ultaneously. Therefore if standstill is detected during dynamic zero tracking, the time is
restarted and the measured values recorded so far during this interval are cleared. Zero
memory does not change.

Measured
value Limit of range of zero balance: ±2% on nominal range (NOV)

zero balance

1d
Time in s
1

Fig. 7.6 Static zero tracking.

PanelX
128 7 FUNCTIONS
Measured
value
Limit of range of zero balance: ±2% of nominal value

Zero balance

x Time

Fig. 7.7 Dynamic zero tracking.

Requirements for static zero tracking

The scale must be unloaded.
The gross value and net value must be within ±2% of the nominal (rated) value
(NOV).
The standstill condition must be met.

Requirements for dynamic zero tracking

The scale must be unloaded.
The gross value and net value must be within specified percentage rate of the nom-
inal (rated) value (NOV).
The standstill condition must not be met. Otherwise the time for mean value cal-
culation will be started again.
There must be more than nine measured values within the band for zero tracking
(DZT, P2).

Activation
Activate static zero tracking in the Scale menu item or with the ZTR command, specifying
how rapidly the measured value may change and still be readjusted.
Activate dynamic zero tracking (only possible in non-Legal-For-Trade mode) with the
DZT command, specifying the time and range within which measured values will be
determined.

Influence due to other settings

The following settings also affect motion detection: nominal (rated) value (NOV), res-
olution (RSN) and changeover between weighing ranges if the scale is operating as a

PanelX
7 FUNCTIONS 129
dual-range scale (MRA).

Memory for zero tracking is cleared by the following actions

If the scale is adjusted (commands SZA, SFA, LDW, LWT)
During taring (TAR and TAV) commands
If the scale is reset (RES command)
After turning on the scale

7.3.3 Zero balance after delay

This function is intended for checkweighers when the unloaded scale has to be reset to
zero between checkweighings. The zero value that is determined is written to zero
memory.

The version differs depending on the settings for the trigger:

1. Triggering to a level or an external trigger

The delay time starts at the moment of triggering: This also applies if you have
specified a trigger delay time (TVT). That does not change when the delay time
starts.
2. External post-trigger delay is activated
The delay time does not start until the delay time defined for the post-trigger
(PTD) has elapsed.

Trigger
Measured Zero balance
time Delay time (CDT)
value

Time

Fig. 7.8 Zero balance with pre-triggering.

PanelX
130 7 FUNCTIONS
 Trigger Zero
Measured time balance
value
CDT

Time

Fig. 7.9 Zero balance with post-triggering.

Requirements
The trigger function must be active.
The scale must be unloaded.
In legal-for-trade applications (LFT command with parameter P1 > 0), the gross
value must fall within ±2% of the nominal (rated) value (NOV). In non-Legal-For-
Trade mode the gross value must fall within ±20% of the nominal (rated) value.

Activation
Activate zero balance after a delay with the CDT command, specifying the delay time to
be used.

7.3.4 Automatic zeroing

Automatic zeroing is zero balancing for dynamic processes such as a checkweigher. It
allows you to zero a scale without having to wait for the measurement signal to stop. In
addition, measured values before and after signal peaks can be eliminated to obtain a
better zero value.

PanelX
7 FUNCTIONS 131
Fig. 7.10 Weighing process with plotted DZB and DZH ranges

Zeroing band for automatic zeroing (DZB, Automatic Zeroing Band)

The zeroing band defines a range (plus and minus) around the current zero signal. All
weight values within this band (2 x DZB) are averaged during the calculation, producing
the new zero value. Measured values outside the band are ignored in the calculation.

Hold-off time for automatic zeroing (DZH, Automatic Zeroing Hold-off Time)
The hold-off time defines intervals in which the measured values are not used to cal-
culate the zero value, even if they are within DZB. The intervals are applied before the sig-
nal leaves the zeroing band and after it re-enters the zeroing band. Use the setting to
also eliminate the signal edges that exceed the zeroing band.
Note that the setting of the digital filters has a great influence on the correct values for
this hold-off time. So check the hold-off time after changing filters.

Mode for automatic zeroing (DZM, Automatic Zeroing Mode)

The mode for automatic zeroing determines the end condition for calculating the zero
value. You can specify either the number of measured values to be included (P1 = 1) or
the time period during which measurements are taken (P1 = 2). If P1 = 1 (count), only the
values that are not filtered out by DZB or DZH are counted. If P1 = 2 (time), zeroing is per-
formed at fixed intervals; DZB or DZH are not additionally taken into account.

Number of measured values to include (DZC, Automatic Zeroing Count)

Defines the number of measured values used for automatic zeroing if you have selected
P1 = 1 for DZM. Values excluded by the DZH and DZB settings are also ignored here.

PanelX
132 7 FUNCTIONS
Time for automatic zeroing (DZT, Automatic Zeroing Time)
Defines the averaging time period used for automatic zeroing if you have selected P1 = 2
for DZM. The time runs as soon as the measured values enter the band defined by DZB.
There is no further excluding of values by DZH or DZB settings here.

7.3.5 Zero balance options for filling

Zero balance is an essential element in ensuring filling accuracy, as this function is used
to correct zero drift (over time and temperature). The available zero balance functions
such as zero balance and (static) zero tracking have the disadvantage that the standstill
condition must be met. This is difficult if the filters required for the process have long set-
tling times and/or zero balance will be initiated by a command. Especially in batching
applications, the zero balance must be performed in the time domain when there is no
container on the scale or filling head. Most times required are under a second.

Therefore a special process is available for this case:

1. After the filling weight is determined, status bit 6 (READY) is set (see MSV) and the
filter that is normally used is temporarily deactivated to allow for fast settling on the
zero value. Only the notch or mean value filters (if any) present for interference sup-
pression remain activated due to their short settling time.
2. As soon as the measured value falls below 50% of the filling weight (FWT), the
unloading wait time (CD1) begins.
3. After that the original filter is reactivated, followed by a wait for settling, the zero
value settling time (CD2).
4. After this time elapses a check determines whether you have specified a zero bal-
ance tolerance (CTO) and if so whether the measured value is within the tolerance
limits. If the condition is met, zero balance is performed and the value is written to
zero memory.

The READY status (after using the IMD command with parameter P1 = 2) is
only generated if the CSM command (changing measured value status) is not
used or was sent with parameter P1 = 0 (default setting).

If necessary read this value from the tare buffer with the TAV? command.

PanelX
7 FUNCTIONS 133
Measured Save fill results
value

CD1 CD2

50% Filling weight (FWT)

Normal trace of
measurement
signal (with filter)

Time

Fig. 7.11 Schematic diagram of a sequence.

Requirement
Dosing must be active as the working mode (IMD command with parameter P1 = 2).

Activation
Activate zero balance with the CD1 command, specifying the unloading wait time to be
used.

7.4 Taring
Taring is performed to be able to distinguish the weight of the container from the weight
of the contents. The gross value is equivalent to the total weight. The net weight is the

weight of the contents. After taring, identified in the PanelX program by , the net
measured value is displayed (zero after taring). The value measured during taring is writ-
ten to the tare buffer and then subtracted from all following gross values. In addition to
performing a command or clicking to tare, there are also various functions you can use to
optimize taring.

Requirements
The tare value must fall within a specific range of the nominal (rated) value (NOV). In
legal-for-trade applications the tare value must be between 0 and NOV, in other
words the weighing range. Otherwise the tare value must be <±150% of NOV.
In legal-for-trade applications (LFT command with parameter P1 > 0) the standstill
condition must be met.
Taring must be permitted in dosing mode (DMD with parameter P1 = 1) (TMD com-
mand with parameter P1 > 0).

PanelX
134 7 FUNCTIONS
Activation

To activate (one-time) taring, click on the button with the symbol or use the TAR
command. If there is a digital input available, you can also trigger the taring process with
a digital signal for some devices.
Use the TAS command to change between display of the net or gross signal.

You can also write a tare value to the tare buffer with the TAV command
(manual tare). In this case the display does not change to the net value as it
usually does, however.

Reading out the tare buffer

You can read the saved tare value with the TAV? command.

Deleting the tare buffer

The tare buffer is cleared by subsequent taring, turning on the device or with the RES
command.

7.4.1 Taring after delay

This process is available especially for the batching application to hide interference such
as setting the container in place or placing the sack on the scale. Set the tare delay so
that the interference associated with these events has died down after the beginning of
the filling process before taring is performed.
The tare delay begins after the start of the filling process with the RUN command or via a
digital input. Taring is performed after this time has elapsed.
See also Tare limit (empty weight).

If necessary read this value from the tare buffer with the TAV? command.

Requirements
Dosing must be active as the working mode (IMD command with parameter P1 = 2).
For upward dosing (DMD command with parameter P1 = 0), the empty weight or the
coarse flow cutoff point must not be exceeded at the start.
Taring must be activated (TMD command with parameter P1 > 0).

Activation
Activate taring after a delay with the TAD command, specifying the delay time to be used.

PanelX
7 FUNCTIONS 135
7.4.2 Tare limit (empty weight)
For dynamic processes such as batching you should limit the possible tare value to pre-
vent overfilling. This could happen if there is already material in the container after the
start. If you do not set this tare limit, the coarse flow cutoff point (CFD) will be used as a
limit.
The start of the filling process with the RUN command or via a digital input is followed by
a wait (if one is set) for the tare delay (TAD). Then a check determines whether the
weight is below the value specified for the empty weight. If so, taring is performed. Other-
wise no new taring is performed (the old tare value is retained).

If necessary read this value from the tare buffer with the TAV? command.

Requirements
Dosing must be active as the working mode (IMD command with parameter P1 = 2).
Taring must be activated (TMD command with parameter P1 = 1).
It makes no difference whether tare delay is activated.

Activation
Activate the tare limit with the EWT command, specifying the maximum permitted value
for the empty weight.

7.5 Filter
Measured values must be filtered for almost all applications to obtain usable results.
What type of filter is most suitable depends on the type and size of the transducer as well
as the application itself. The sensor electronics described in this documentation provide
different filter types and functions, not all of which are available in every version.
The choice of filter and filter cut-off frequency does not affect the internal
data rate, i.e. the speed at which measured values are monitored (limit val-
ues, peak values, triggers and dosing control). Only filter mode 1 (FMD com-
mand with parameter P1 = 1) affects the internal data rate. You can use the
ICR command to reduce the output rate of measured values.

Ultimately you will have to find the optimum setting by trial and error. The PanelX pro-
gram offers you the option of recording measured values with Scope.

PanelX
136 7 FUNCTIONS
Static applications
For static applications the product to be weighed is placed on the scale (manually) and
remains there until the measurement is performed. Then it is removed. You can therefore
select relatively strong filtering to obtain a smooth display of measured value (standstill).
It works to your advantage that no interference vibrations are usually generated by the
application itself in static applications. Only neighboring equipment could transfer mech-
anical vibrations to the scale, for example due to floor vibrations. These would have to be
taken into consideration.

Dynamic applications
In dynamic applications the product to be weighed is automatically placed on the scale
for a specific amount of time and then removed. You must therefore select the filter so
that the measured value has settled to within sufficient accuracy within that time window
and there is still enough time to acquire the measurement.
If filtering is too strong, it will take too long until full scale is reached, i.e. the number of
weighings is too low or the measurement is performed before full scale is reached and is
therefore incorrect. If filtering is too weak, the spread of values from the weighings will be
too wide and measurement uncertainty will increase.

7.5.1 Filters in PanelX

The Filter menu item leads to the settings for the measuring rate and the filter available
in the sensor electronics. As long as the menu item is selected, signal analysis is per-
formed in the background and the result is displayed every 10 seconds.

Sampling and output rate

Choose the Output rate (ICR) to be used. The output rate is the rate at which measured
values as generated with the MSV? command. The output rate does not depend on the fil-
ter settings.
See also Output rate of measured values, Filter mode, Filter cut-off frequency.

You can use High speed mode (HSM) to double the sampling rate of the A/D converter.
This affects the filter settings (settling times, cut-off frequency), the internal speed at
which the trigger, limit values and peak values are analyzed, and the output rate.
See Increase analog-to-digital converter sampling rate.

PanelX
7 FUNCTIONS 137
Low-pass filters
The filter mode (FMD) determines which filter type will be used.
See also Filter mode.

You can select different cut-off frequencies (ASF) depending on the filter type. You can
use Background signal analysis in the window at the maximum filter frequency to see
which interference frequencies occur so you can select a suitable filter.
See also Filter cut-off frequency.

Notch filters
You can activate notch filters in addition to selectively suppress individual interference
frequencies and their harmonics. You can define the maximum number of notch filters to
be used here (ADF). The number may also be reduced by specifying the maximum set-
tling time (TMA) to ensure that the signal runtime is not too long. Enter 0 if you do not
want to have any restrictions.
The optimum filter frequencies are automatically calculated by the program and the val-
ues determined in this way are shown.
See also Notch filters.

7.5.2 Filter mode

The filter mode (FMD) command (together with the filter cut-off frequency) determines
the essential characteristics of filtering. Different filter types are used depending on the
filter mode to meet requirements in the best way possible.

Filter mode 0
A 2nd order IIR low-pass filter is used in this mode. Notch filters and mean value cal-
culation are also available for you for selective interference suppression.

Filter mode 1
A fast-settling, 3-stage FIR low-pass filter is used in this mode. The filter changes the
internal data rate. Notch filters and mean value calculation are also available for you for
selective interference suppression.
This filter mode is suitable for dynamic measurements.

Filter mode 2
An 8th order IIR low-pass filter is used in this mode. Notch filters and mean value cal-
culation are also available for you for selective interference suppression.

PanelX
138 7 FUNCTIONS
This filter mode is especially suitable for static measurements.

Filter mode 3
A 4th order IIR low-pass filter is used in this mode. Another possibility for adjusting the
filter is the FTL command. Notch filters and mean value calculation are also available for
you for selective interference suppression.
This filter mode is suitable for dynamic measurements, especially batching and filling pro-
cesses.

Filter mode 4
A FIR low-pass filter with a settling time of less than 100 ms is used in this mode. Notch
filters are also available for selective interference suppression, as is mean value cal-
culation as from P80.
This filter mode is suitable for dynamic measurements.

Filter mode 5 (as from P77.9)

A FIR low-pass filter with a settling time of less than 250 ms is used in this mode. Notch
filters and mean value calculation are also available for you for selective interference sup-
pression.
This filter mode is suitable for dynamic measurements.

7.5.2.1 Notch filter

With all filter modes (FMD) you can also activate two notch filters that are independent of
each other with the NTF command to selectively suppress individual interference fre-
quencies and their odd harmonics. The first suppressed frequency (main frequency) is
also called the notch frequency. The notch filters are deactivated in the default setting.
See also Increased analog-to-digital converter sampling rate.

PanelX
7 FUNCTIONS 139
 Filter trace without mean value filter
Amplitude Filter trace with mean value filter

1st, 2nd and 3rd harmonic

Frequency
Notch frequency fnotch Limit frequency fg

Fig. 7.12 Frequency response of a notch filter (schematic)

Calculation of parameter P with known interference frequency fnotch

Use the same equation to calculate the NTF parameter P with known interference fre-
quency and standard analog-to-digital converter sample rate (HSM with parameter P1 =
0):
P = 1+ 610 / (2 * fnotch)

For the increased analog-to-digital converter sampling rate (HSM with parameter P1 = 1)
use:
P = 1+ 1220 / (2 * fnotch)

Please note: For electronics with P7x, put 613 instead of 610 and 1226 instead of 1220.

For electronics with P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview) and AD105D dif-
ferently:
P = 1+ 400 / (2 * fnotch)

Settling time calculation

Each filter increases the settling time. If you activate multiple filters, the resulting times
must be added. The settling time in milliseconds depending on parameter P at the stand-
ard analog-to-digital converter sampling rate (HSM with parameter P1 = 0) is:
Tdelay = P * 1000 / 610

For the increased analog-to-digital converter sampling rate (HSM with parameter P1 = 1)
use:
Tdelay = P * 1000 / 1220

Please note: For electronics with P7x, put 613 instead of 610 and 1226 instead of 1220.

PanelX
140 7 FUNCTIONS
For electronics with P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview) and AD105D dif-
ferently:
Tdelay = P * 1000 / 400

Calculation of the notch frequency with parameter P known

For parameter P set with the NTF command, the notch frequency of the notch filter at the
standard analog-to-digital converter sample rate (HSM with parameter P1 = 0) is:
fnotch = 610 / (2 * (P-1))

For the increased analog-to-digital converter sampling rate (HSM with parameter P1 = 1)
use:
fnotch = 1220 / (2 * (P-1))

Please note: For electronics with P7x, put 613 instead of 610 and 1226 instead of 1220.

For electronics with P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview) and AD105D dif-
ferently:
fnotch = 400 / (2 * (P-1))

7.5.2.2 Mean value filter

The mean value filter (MAC command) works similarly to a notch filter. It selectively sup-
presses individual interference frequencies and their even and odd harmonics. The first
suppressed frequency (main frequency) is also called the notch frequency.
See also Increased analog-to-digital converter sampling rate.
Filter trace without mean value filter
Amplitude Filter trace with mean value filter

1st, 2nd and 3rd harmonic

Frequency
Notch frequency fnotch Limit frequency fg

Fig. 7.13 Frequency response of a mean value filter (schematic)

PanelX
7 FUNCTIONS 141
Calculation of parameter P with known interference frequency fnotch
Use the same equation to calculate the NTF parameter P with known interference fre-
quency and standard analog-to-digital converter sample rate (HSM with parameter P1 =
0):
P = 1+ 610 / (2 * fnotch)

For the increased analog-to-digital converter sampling rate (HSM with parameter P1 = 1)
use:
P = 1+ 1220 / (2 * fnotch)

Please note: For electronics with P7x, put 613 instead of 610 and 1226 instead of 1220.

Settling time calculation

Each filter increases the settling time. If you activate multiple filters, the resulting times
must be added. The settling time in milliseconds depending on parameter P at the stand-
ard analog-to-digital converter sampling rate (HSM with parameter P1 = 0) is:
Tdelay = P * 1000 / 610

For the increased analog-to-digital converter sampling rate (HSM with parameter P1 = 1)
use:
Tdelay = P * 1000 / 1220

Please note: For electronics with P7x, put 613 instead of 610 and 1226 instead of 1220.

7.5.3 Filter cut-off frequency

Adjust the filter cut-off frequency with the ASF command. The filters are deactivated for
ASF with parameter P1 = 0.

The resulting filter characteristics are determined not only by this command,
but also by the selected Filter mode (FMD) and analog-to-digital converter
sample rate (HSM). Only certain filters are available in each mode.
At the increased analog-to-digital converter sample rate (HSM with para-
meter P1 = 1) the frequencies specified in the tables are doubled and the set-
tling times are halved.

Notch filters and Mean value calculation are also available for you in all filter modes for
selective interference suppression.

The notation FMDx and HSMx is used in the paragraphs below for the FMD and HSM
commands respectively with parameter P1 = x.

PanelX
142 7 FUNCTIONS
Filter characteristics for FMD0 and HSM0
A 2nd order IIR filter is used. The specified settling time is the time that elapses until set-
tling on a value with less than 0.1% deviation from f.s.

Settling time in –3 dB cut-off frequency in Max. attenuation in dB at

ASF
ms Hz 300 Hz

0 84 120 —

1 67 40 -20

2 93 18 -34

3 147 8 -48

4 258 4 -60

5 488 3 -72

6 960 1 -82

7 1934 0.5 -90

8 3943 0.25 -96

9 8082 0.125 -100

For electronics with P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview) and AD105D
applies differently:

ASF Settling time in ms –3 dB cut-off frequency in Hz

1 60 8

2 120 3.5

3 240 1.5

4 480 0.7

5 1000 0.3

6 2000 0.2

7 4000 0.1

8 8000 0.05

PanelX
7 FUNCTIONS 143
 ASF Settling time in ms –3 dB cut-off frequency in Hz

9 16,000 0.025

10 32,000 0.0125

Filter characteristics for FMD1 and HSM0/HSM1

A 3-stage FIR filter is used. The specified settling time is the time that elapses until set-
tling on a value with less than 0.01% deviation from f.s. The filters affect the maximum
possible sample rate (ICR). With FMD1 and HSM1, the specified frequencies are doubled
and the settling times halved.

–3 dB cut- –20 dB –40 dB Damping

Settling Stop Max.
off fre- with fre- with fre- in dB in
ASF time in band output
quency in quency in quency in the stop
ms in Hz rate
Hz Hz Hz band

0 42 120 — — — — 600

1 54 18 47 63 >90 >90 600

2 91 11 32 45 >90 >70 300

3 127 9 24 31 >90 >60 200

4 165 7 18 24 >90 >60 150

5 203 5 12 17 >90 >40 120

6 240 4 10.5 13 >90 >34 100

7 278 3.5 8 10 >90 >34 85

8 316 3 7 9 >90 >30 75

9 353 2.5 6.2 8 >90 >30 66

For electronics with P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview) and AD105D
applies differently:

ASF Settling time in ms –3 dB cut-off frequency in Hz

1 120 8

2 140 6

3 160 5.5

PanelX
144 7 FUNCTIONS
 ASF Settling time in ms –3 dB cut-off frequency in Hz

4 160 5

5 180 4.5

6 200 4

7 220 3.5

8 240 3

9 280 2.5

10 320 2

Filter characteristics for FMD2 and HSM0

An 8th order IIR filter is used. The specified settling time is the time that elapses until set-
tling on a value with less than 0.01% deviation from f.s.

Settling time in –3 dB cut-off frequency in –100 dB with frequency in

ASF
ms Hz Hz

0 — 120 —

1 185 26 61

2 239 22 51

3 309 17 41

4 401 15 36

5 519 13 31

6 673 11 26

7 871 8 21

8 1127 6 16

9 1459 4 10

PanelX
7 FUNCTIONS 145
For electronics with P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview) and AD105D
applies differently:

ASF Settling time in ms –3 dB cut-off frequency in Hz

0 — (Filter OFF)

1 540 17

2 680 15

3 750 11

4 980 10

5 1130 9

6 1350 7

7 1500 6

8 2100 4

9 2900 3

10 3600 2

Filter characteristics for FMD3 and HSM0

A 4th order IIR filter is used. The specified settling time is the time that elapses until set-
tling on a value with less than 0.01% deviation from f.s.

Settling time in ms, Settling time in ms, –3 dB cut-off

Max. atten-
ASF fast-track filter option fast-track filter option frequency in
uation in dB
not active active Hz

0 42 — 120 -

1 34 150 30 38

2 70 190 12 67

3 145 260 6 94

4 301 260 3 120

5 620 260 1.5 >120

6 1276 260 0.8 >120

PanelX
146 7 FUNCTIONS
 Settling time in ms, Settling time in ms, –3 dB cut-off
Max. atten-
ASF fast-track filter option fast-track filter option frequency in
uation in dB
not active active Hz

7 2623 260 0.4 >120

8 5390 260 0.2 >120

9 11,075 260 0.1 >120

For electronics with P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview) and AD105D
applies differently:

Settling time in ms, fast-track Settling time in ms, fast- –3 dB cut-off fre-
ASF
filter option not active track filter option active quency in Hz

0 — — (Filter OFF)

1 90 900 20

2 180 1140 9

3 365 1560 4

4 730 1560 2

5 1450 1560 1

6 2900 1560 0.5

7 5800 1560 0.25

8 11,600 1560 0.12

9 32,200 1560 0.06

10 46,400 1560 0.03

Filter characteristics for FMD4/FMD5 and HSM0

A fast-settling FIR low-pass filter is used. The specified settling time is the time that
elapses until settling on a value with less than 0.01% deviation from f.s.
The filter characteristics for FMD5 are identical to those for FMD4. However, with FMD5
you can activate (an additional) mean value calculation with the MAC command,
although this does lengthen the settling time. This mean value calculation is independent
of the one set with the output rate (ICR).

PanelX
7 FUNCTIONS 147
 –3 dB cut-off frequency in –80 dB with frequency in
ASF Settling time in ms
Hz Hz

0 — 120 —

1 104 21 73

2 104 18 67

3 104 16 60

4 104 15 60

5 104 14 60

6 104 13 60

7 104 9 60

8 104 8 60

9 104 7 60

For electronics with P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview) and AD105D
applies differently:

ASF Settling time in ms –3 dB cut-off frequency in Hz

0 — (Filter OFF)

1 140 14

2 140 12

3 135 11

4 150 10

5 150 9

6 140 8

7 160 8

8 160 5

9 160 4

10 160 3

PanelX
148 7 FUNCTIONS
7.5.4 Output rate of measured values (mean value calculation)
You can use the ICR to calculate a mean value for the measured values. The output rate
has no effect on the internal data transfer rate, i.e. the speed of monitoring for triggers,
limit values and peak values.
The output rate is also determined by the following settings:
The analog-to-digital converter sample rate (HSM command),
Filter mode 1 (FMD command with parameter P1 = 11)),
With filter mode 1, also filter cut-off frequency (ASF1) command).
1) Except for AD105D and electronics with P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware over-

view)
Please note the data transmission rate of your application: Otherwise data
may be lost if the output rate is too high if it cannot be transferred quickly
enough. The speed required for transmission (bit rate) also depends on
which transfer format (COF) is set.

Always use the maximum output rate (ICR with parameter P1 = 0) for
dynamic measurements so you will have short response times.

The notation FMDx and HSMx is used in the paragraphs below for the FMD and HSM
commands respectively with parameter P1 = x. The following two tables do not apply to
electronics with P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview) and AD105D, for
which the output rate is independent of FMD, and depends only on ICR and HSM - see
third table.

Output rates (measured values per second) for filter modes FMD0, FMD2, FMD3,
FMD4 and FMD5 depending on parameter P1 of ICR

P1 Output rate for HSM0 Output rate for HSM1

0 610 1221

1 305 610

2 153 305

3 76 153

4 38 76

5 19 38

PanelX
7 FUNCTIONS 149
 P1 Output rate for HSM0 Output rate for HSM1

6 10 19

7 5 10

Output rates for filter mode FMD1 depending on the filter limit frequency ASF
Always use ICR with parameter P1 = 0 with this filter mode, as the filter is intended for
dynamic measurements. Depending on the set filter limit frequency (command ASF)
there will still be different output rates:

ASF Output rate for HSM0 Output rate for HSM1

0 610 1221

1 610 1221

2 305 610

3 204 407

4 153 305

5 122 244

6 102 203

7 87 174

8 77 153

9 68 136

10 61 122

For AD105D and electronics with P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)
the following applies for all FMDx filter modes:

P1 Output rate for HSM0 Output rate for HSM1

0 100 200

1 50 100

2 25 50

3 12 25

PanelX
150 7 FUNCTIONS
 P1 Output rate for HSM0 Output rate for HSM1

4 6 12

5 3 6

6 2 3

7 1 2

7.5.5 Increased analog-to-digital converter sampling rate

The sensor electronics units described in this documentation work at a standard
sampling rate. For highly dynamic applications it may be necessary to increase this
sampling rate.
You can use the HSM command with parameter P1 = 1:
to reduce settling times of filters (by half)
to increase the speed at which triggers, limit values and peak values are analyzed
(double).

Increasing the sampling rate with the HSM command with parameter P1 = 1 also has the
following additional effects:
The frequencies of the low-pass filters are doubled
The data rate output rates are doubled

Please note the data transmission rate of your application: Otherwise data
may be lost if the output rate is too high if it cannot be transferred quickly
enough. The speed required for transmission (baud rate) also depends on
which transfer format (COF) is set.

The HSM command with parameter P1 = 0 resets the output rate to the standard
sampling rate.

7.6 Triggers
The trigger function is useful for the following applications:
Checkweighers
Sorting weighers
Multi-head combination weighers (MHCs)

PanelX
7 FUNCTIONS 151
The advantage of the trigger function (TRC) is that you can determine just one weight
value as the result of a dynamic measurement and can save it in output memory (MAV).
That means you do not have to query the measured values continuously (cyclically) at a
high sampling rate.

The requirements for the trigger function are different depending on your application. The
sensor electronics support different functions, which you can select with parameter P2 of
the TRC command:
Pre-triggering via an adjustable level (firmware P77.9 and higher), also re-trig-
gerable for multi-head combination weighers.
External pre-triggering via a digital input (trigger input).
Post-triggering via an adjustable level.
External post-triggering via a digital input (trigger input).
Other than pre-triggering via level, no trigger functions are re-triggerable. Once a trigger
function has started, it has to be completed before the trigger start is enabled again.

Requirements
Trigger mode must be active (IMD content with parameter P1 = 1).
The setting also changes the content of the measured value status, which you can
read out with each measured value.
You should select the fastest output rate (ICR command with parameter P1 = 0), see
Output rate of measured values.
Choose appropriately fast filters, see Filter.

Additional functions
Additional functions are available for the individual trigger functions depending on the
application:
Automatic zero balance (CDT)
Limit switches (LIV1 to LIV4) for monitoring the trigger result (MAV) for sorting func-
tions with delayed switching function (AT1 to AT4, DT1 to DT4),
Monitoring of trigger results for Min/Max (CPV),
Correction of systematic differences (TRF) in the trigger results.
See also Checkweigher, Sorting weigher.

PanelX
152 7 FUNCTIONS
Measurement output and evaluation
After weighing is performed, the weighing result is evaluated statistically for further pro-
cessing. The following information is available for you after the trigger result:
Number of trigger results (TRN)
Mean value (TRM) of the trigger results
Standard deviation (TRS) of the trigger results
You can also monitor the trigger results for Min/Max (CPV).
The CTR command deletes all trigger results.

7.6.1 Pre-triggering via level

Measured Save
value Settling time Measuring time results

Level

Time
Trigger

Fig. 7.14 Schematic diagram of a measurement sequence.

When weighing without an external sensor, use the measurement signal itself to detect
when a new product to be weighed has arrived on the weighing cell or weighing platform.
As soon as the trigger level is exceeded, the settling time starts in this mode. Then the
weight is determined in the measuring time and the weight value is saved in output
memory (MAV). As soon as this value is saved, bit 2 is set to 1 in the extended measured
value status (CSM with parameter P1 = 2).
This type of triggering is only suitable for processes in which the scale is unloaded
between weighings.

Requirements
The first time the scale starts it must be unloaded so that the level will be exceeded.
The current measured value must fall below the trigger level after every meas-
urement. Otherwise a new trigger process cannot be started.

PanelX
7 FUNCTIONS 153
Activation
Parameter P1 = 1 of the TRC command activates triggering and parameter P2 = 0 activ-
ate this function. Use the other parameters to define the trigger level, settling time and
measuring time.

Additional functions
You can use the RTB command in this mode for retiggering. This is useful for
example in applications for multi-head combination weighers.
The DZT and CDT commands are available for you with additional zero balance func-
tions to improve the accuracy of measured values in this dynamic process.

7.6.2 External pre-triggering

Measured Save
value Settling time Measuring time results

Time
Trigger

Fig. 7.15 Schematic diagram of a measurement sequence.

Use this function if you would like to use a sensor to determine when a new product to be
weighed will arrive on the load cell or weighing platform. The trigger edge starts the set-
tling time. Then the weight is determined in the measuring time and the weight value is
saved in output memory (MAV). As soon as this value is saved, bit 2 is set to 1 in the
extended measured value status (CSM with parameter P1 = 2).
During the measurement (settling time plus measuring time), an additional trigger signal
has no effect (no retriggering). Then a new product to be weighed can be measured. It is
not necessary to unload the scale.

PanelX
154 7 FUNCTIONS
Requirements
Trigger mode must be active (IMD with parameter P1 = 1).
The sensor, for example a light barrier, must be connected via a digital input (IN1 in
sensor electronics up to and including 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C,
AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics sensor electronics; in 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics you can select the
input).
The quiescent level of the trigger input is HIGH (1) and the trigger is initiated by a fall-
ing edge. You can take an inverted level into consideration with the POL command.

Activation
Parameter P1 = 1 of the TRC command activates triggering and parameter P2 = 1 activ-
ate this function. Use the other parameters to define the settling time and measuring
time.

Additional function
The DZT and CDT commands are available for you with additional zero balance func-
tions to improve the accuracy of measured values in this dynamic process.
See (Dynamic) Zero tracking, Zero balance options for filling.

7.6.3 Post-triggering via level

Measured Save
Measured values in ring buffer results
value
Valid measured values

Tolerance
band

Level

Start trigger Stop trigger Time

Fig. 7.16 Schematic diagram of a measurement sequence.

When weighing without an external sensor, use the measurement signal itself to detect
when a new product to be weighed has arrived on the weighing cell or weighing platform.
As soon as the trigger level is exceeded, the measured values are saved to a ring buffer.

PanelX
7 FUNCTIONS 155
Up to 199 measured values are saved in 4th generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA
sensor electronics, in older sensor electronics up to 99. As soon as the stop trigger
occurs below trigger level, the ring buffer is checked: A check is performed starting with
the last measured value for valid measured values, meaning values withing the tolerance
band. The mean value is calculated from the result. This weight value is then saved in
output memory (MAV). As soon as this value is saved, bit 2 is set to 1 in the extended
measured value status (CSM with parameter P1 = 2). The number of valid measured val-
ues is saved in parameter P5 of the TRC command.
This type of triggering is only suitable for processes in which the scale is unloaded
between weighings.

Requirements
The first time the scale starts it must be unloaded so that the level will be exceeded.
The current measured value must fall below the trigger level after every meas-
urement. Otherwise a new trigger process cannot be started.

Activation
Parameter P1 = 1 of the TRC command activates triggering and parameter P2 = 2 activ-
ate this function. Use the other parameters to define the trigger level and size of the tol-
erance band.

Additional function
The DZT and CDT commands are available for you with additional zero balance func-
tions to improve the accuracy of measured values in this dynamic process.
See (Dynamic) Zero tracking, Zero balance options for filling.

PanelX
156 7 FUNCTIONS
7.6.4 External post-triggering
Save
Measured Measured values in ring buffer results
value
Valid measured values

Tolerance
Setpoint
band

Trigger Time

Fig. 7.17 Schematic diagram of a measurement sequence.

Use this function if you would like to use a sensor to determine when the product to be
weighed will leave the load cell or weighing platform. The measured values are con-
tinuously saved to a ring buffer. Up to 199 measured values are saved in 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics, in older sensor elec-
tronics up to 99. If the stop trigger occurs shortly before leaving the weighing range, the
ring buffer is checked: A check is performed starting with the last measured value for
valid measured values, meaning values withing the tolerance band. The mean value is
calculated from the result. This weight value is then saved in output memory (MAV). As
soon as this value is saved, bit 2 is set to 1 in the extended measured value status (CSM
with parameter P1 = 2). The number of valid measured values is saved in parameter P5
of the TRC command.
Then a new product to be weighed can be measured. It is not necessary to unload the
scale.

Requirements
Trigger mode must be active (IMD with parameter P1 = 1).
The sensor, for example a light barrier, must be connected via a digital input (IN1 in
sensor electronics up to and including 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C,
AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics sensor electronics; in 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics you can select the
input).
The quiescent level of the trigger input is HIGH (1) and the trigger is initiated by a fall-
ing edge. You can take an inverted level into consideration with the POL command.

PanelX
7 FUNCTIONS 157
Activation
Parameter P1 = 1 of the TRC command activates triggering and parameter P2 = 3 activ-
ate this function. Use the other parameters to define the setpoint and tolerance band.

Additional functions
The DZT and CDT commands are available for you with additional zero balance func-
tions to improve the accuracy of measured values in this dynamic process.
See (Dynamic) Zero tracking, Zero balance options for filling.
You can use the post-trigger delay time function (PTD) to compensate for delay
times of active digital filters and to make optimum use of the available measuring
time (the product to be weighed has not quite left the weighing platform yet or leav-
ing the platform has not affected the measured value yet with filter delay times).
See Zero balance:after delay.
You can reduce a constant difference between the static adjustment and the
dynamic result with the correction factor for trigger results (TRF).

7.6.5 Trigger delay time

Measured Settling time Save

value TVT Measuring time results

Level

Time
Trigger

Fig. 7.18 Schematic diagram of a measurement sequence.

Use the trigger delay time with irregular or extended settling or if measured values over
the trigger level may occur briefly between weighings (can only be used in combination
with level pre-triggering). When the trigger level is exceeded, first the trigger delay time
(TVT) starts. If the trigger level is not exceeded in this time, the settling time (TRC, para-
meter P4) starts as it normally does. However, if the trigger level is undershot again dur-
ing the trigger delay time, there is no wait until the trigger level is exceeded again. The

PanelX
158 7 FUNCTIONS
measurement is not continued. The trigger delay time starts again when the trigger level
is exceeded again.

Requirements
Trigger mode must be active (IMD command with parameter P1 = 1).
The Level pre-triggering mode must be active (TRC command with parameter P1 = 1
and P2 = 0).
The first time the scale starts it must be unloaded so that the level will be exceeded.
The current measured value must fall below the trigger level after every meas-
urement. Otherwise a new trigger process cannot be started.

Activation
Activate the function with the TVT command, specifying the number of measured values
to wait or to be checked for being below the trigger level.

7.6.6 Retriggering
This function is especially useful for applications with multi-head combination weighers
(MHCs): When the fill material has pieces and a part falls on the scale belatedly, the
measurement begins again. This means the current weight is measured and no mean
value of the old and new measured value is calculated.
The function divides the measurement into several sections (MVC command). The mean
value is calculated for each section and a check determines whether it is within the tol-
erance band assigned by the RTB command. If it is not, the measurement time starts
again with this section. That means the old sections are discarded and the counting
starts again. The tolerance band is also applied to the new mean value.
The abbreviated notation TRC P3 is used in the graphics to mean the TRC command,
parameter P3.
See also Pre-triggering via level, Trigger stop (TSL, TST), TVT, MAV.

PanelX
7 FUNCTIONS 159
 Trigger
Weight delay time (TVT)
Trigger result (MAV)
Total measuring time (TRC P5) Available without retrigger

Tolerance band (±RTB)

Trigger
Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4
Start level
(TRC P3)
MVC: Number of sections in the
measuring time Trigger
stop level
(TSL)

Trigger
Settling stop time (TST)
time (TRC P4)

Output Stop material transport

Fig. 7.19 Normal sequence of the trigger measurement, MVC with parameter P1 = 4
Automatic Trigger result (MAV)
retrigger Total measuring time (TRC P5) Available without retrigger
Trigger
Weight delay time (TVT)
Tolerance band (±RTB)

Tolerance band (±RTB)

Trigger
Section 1 Section 2 Section 3 Section 4
Start level
(TRC P3)
MVC: Number of sections in the Trigger
measuring time stop level
(TSL)

Trigger
Settling stop time (TST)
time (TRC P4)

Output Stop material transport

Fig. 7.20 Trigger measurement with re-trigger, MVC with parameter P1 = 4

Requirement
Level triggering must be active (TRC command with parameter P2 = 0).

PanelX
160 7 FUNCTIONS
Activation
The RTB command with parameter P1 > 0 sets the tolerance band and activates pre-trig-
gering. For the TRC command also specify parameter P5 (total measuring time) and with
the MVC command specify the number of sections to be formed.

7.6.7 Trigger stop (level, time)

Measured Save
value Settling time Measuring time results

Level
Trigger
stop level

Time
Trigger Trigger
stop time

Fig. 7.21 Schematic diagram of a measurement sequence.

The trigger stop level function (TSL) and trigger stop time function (TST) are especially
useful in applications for multi-head combination weighers (can only be used in com-
bination with level post-triggering). After the measuring time has elapsed, and the weight
value (MAV) is determined, the product to be weighed remains in the weighing container
until the container is enabled for filling by the control unit. If the trigger stop level is
undershot during emptying, the trigger stop time starts. A new start trigger (level trigger)
is not possible until after this time elapses.

Requirements
Trigger mode must be active (IMD command with parameter P1 = 1).
The Level pre-triggering mode must be active (TRC command with parameter P1 = 1
and P2 = 0).
The first time the scale starts it must be unloaded so that the level will be exceeded.

Activation
Activate the function with the TSL command and specify the wait time with the TST com-
mand.

PanelX
7 FUNCTIONS 161
Additional function
You can reduce a constant difference between the static adjustment and the
dynamic result with the correction factor for trigger results (TRF).

7.7 Limit switches

The digital outputs are used for control in dosing mode (IMD command with
parameter P1 = 2) and no limit value functions are available. Limit values are
only available if parameter P1 = 0 (standard) or 1 (trigger mode).

Most of the sensor electronics units described in this documentation have four limit
value functions. You can adjust the limit values with the Limit switches menu item or
commands LIV1 to LIV4. The following input signals are possible:
Gross signal
Net signal
Trigger result (MAV)
Peak values (Min/Max)
Limit value modes Delayed: Outside/Inside band and Delayed: Above/Below level are
only available for the Trigger result input signal.
See also the Sorting weigher section for how these functions are applied.

Monitoring of limit values is always active, even without communication via one of the
interfaces. The monitoring speed depends on the filter setting (FMD, ASF) and the set
sampling rate (HSM).
You can read out the status of limit values with the MSV or RIO command.
Sensor electronics without digital outputs require an external control unit so
that the digital I/Os can be made available. The information for controlling
digital outputs is transferred in the measured value status (MSV), trigger
status (MAV) or dosing status (SDO), etc.. Then the control input must simply
monitor the relevant bits and forward the digital outputs.

7.8 Peak values

The sensor electronics units described in this documentation have one memory for the
minimum (Min) and one for the maximum (Max) measured value. Activate acquisition

PanelX
162 7 FUNCTIONS
with the Home menu item and the Device State area or with the PVS command. The fol-
lowing input signals are possible:
Gross signal
Net signal
Trigger result (MAV)
Monitoring of peak values is always active, even without communication via one of the
interfaces. The monitoring speed depends on the filter setting (FMD, ASF) and the set
sampling rate (HSM).

Relevant commands
Delete Min/Max memory (two peak values are always deleted simultaneously): CPV
or Clear in the Home menu item in the Device State area.
To read out peak values: PVA.

7.9 IO settings in PanelX

The IO menu item leads to the settings for digital inputs and outputs. It is also used for
output of measured values via the serial interfaces after the program has closed, i.e. for
output to other nodes. The settings are divided into two sections. To complete your set-
tings, click on Write to save the settings in the sensor electronics.

IO section
With 4th generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics, if possible use
the User-defined setting (IOM) so you will be able to assign inputs and outputs freely. For
all other sensor electronics up to 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C, AD116C,
PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics no free assignment is possible and the
option cannot be activated.
PW15iA and PAD400x use shared connections for input and output. There-
fore you should only activate the output function if the connection is also
being used as an output and is connected accordingly.

In the User-defined setting and after selecting the Manually function, you can turn indi-
vidual outputs on and off in the State column, in other words set HIGH or LOW level. For
the DL1/DL2 setting see also Residual flow.

PanelX
7 FUNCTIONS 163
Output mode: With some sensor electronics units the assignment of outputs can be
changed between different variants. In those cases you can chose the configuration you
would like here.
Input signal level: With some sensor electronics units it is also possible to select the
switching threshold on the inputs (SPL). Then you can define whether to switch from
LOW to HIGH and back between 1 and 4 V or between 6 and 10 V. The first variant is suit-
able for TTL and CMOS signals, etc., the second for controlling PLC signals, etc.

Measurement output section

Output format: Sets the format used for output via the serial interfaces as it is written for
the COF command.
You can use Status to select in formats where more than the measured value is trans-
ferred whether the normal status, the extended status or the checksum (CSM) instead of
the status should be generated.
Text separator: Enter the text separator (TEX) here for ASCII output of measured values
and for output of values to the log records.
Termination resistor: The bus termination resistors (STR) ensure the quiescent level on
the interface lines when no node is sending. The bus termination may only be active for
two nodes per bus system and must be located on the ends on the lines.
For some sensor electronics the bus termination resistors can or must be
activated via a DIP switch. In this case the command will have no effect.
Therefore check the behavior or read the relevant operating manual.

Sensor electronics without digital outputs require an external control unit so

that the digital I/Os can be made available. The information for controlling
digital outputs is transferred in the measured value status (MSV), trigger
status (MAV) or dosing status (SDO), etc.. Then the control input must simply
monitor the relevant bits and forward the digital outputs.

7.10 Systematic difference

Filling processes may be subject depending on the system to a specific amount of filling
material that is lost after every filling or additional material that is added. This loss or
addition does not occur until after checkweighing and therefore cannot be acquired by
optimization. You can take this loss into consideration, however, with the “Systematic dif-
ference” function.

PanelX
164 7 FUNCTIONS
Example
To fill sacks with a filling weight of 50 kg, each bar is ejected after the checkweighing.
During the process, the sack clamp takes about 200 g of material from the filled sack, so
that the released sack only weighs 49.8 kg instead of 50 kg.
In this case you can enter the SYD20 as a correction, which will result in overfilling by
200 g (10 * P1 of SYD). Then the sack will initially be filled wit 50.2 kg. After it is ejected it
will have the target weight of 50 kg.

Requirement:
Dosing must be active as the working mode (IMD command with parameter P1 = 2).

Activation
Activate the function with the SYD command, specifying the overfilling (positive value) or
underfilling (negative value). Maximum ±5% of the nominal (rated) value (NOV) is per-
mitted as the value.

7.11 Legal-For-Trade mode

The Legal-For-Trade counter (TCR) is incremented by one every time the LFT
command is performed with a new parameter (switching to Legal-For-Trade
or to industrial mode). No adjustment is possible in Legal-For-Trade mode.
The adjustment must be performed in industrial mode. As the counter state
is noted on the scale for legal-for-trade applications, changes to the adjust-
ment or calibration can be discovered by comparing.

The following commands are disabled for write access after changing to Legal-For-
Trade mode in the Scale menu item or by using the LFT command with parameter P1 > 0:
CRC, CWT, DPT, ENU, IDN, LDW, LIC, LWT, MRA, MTD, NOV, RSN, SFA, SZA, TDD
with parameter P1 = 0, TRF, ZSE, ZTR
If you send one of these commands with write functionality, the response will be ?crlf.

As from P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware overview), the integrity
of the flash memory is also monitored in legal-for-trade mode. A background
process checks the program code each time the system starts, and every 15
minutes during operation. If the test is failed, no more measured values are
outputted (“-----” or “Overflow”).
See also ESR, ERR.

PanelX
7 FUNCTIONS 165
 Switching by hardware switch is also possible for some sensor electronics
units. In these cases the command LFT has no effect if the switch is set to
Legal-For-Trade.

Special features
LFT with parameter P1 > 0: The tare range is limited to 0 … NOV. If the value falls out-
side this range, the measurement status is designated “Measured value outside the
measuring range” (for CSM = 2, see MSV command, measurement status descrip-
tion.
LFT with parameter P1 = 0: The gross value is checked for the range ±150 % of NOV.
LFT with parameter P1 = 1 (OIML): The gross value is checked for the display
range –20 d … NOV + 9 d.
LFT with parameter P1 = 2 (NTEP): The gross value is checked for the display
range –2% ... NOV + 5%.

PanelX
166 7 FUNCTIONS
8 Scope in PanelX

The Scope allows you to display the current signal and also to analyze the signal in real
time or make trigger-controlled recordings.

Select operating mode

You can select from three different operating modes with Mode:

1. Standard
Shows you currently measured values over time. Depending on the transmission
speed of the interface, it may not be possible to display all values here.
2. Real time
Shows you measured values over time and also an analysis of the frequencies
that occur during the measurement. You can use Trigger (on the right side of the
Chart tab) to set various conditions so you only receive specific measured values,
for example beginning with the start of coarse flow or at a certain level.
3. Analysis
Turns off all filters and mean value calculation so that you receive essentially “raw
values” from the A/D converter so you can identify the time and magnitude of inter-
ference.
In the last two modes you can limit the measurement to a single time window (Single
shot) or record continuously.

Set time window

In Standard mode you can select a period of time to be displayed in the graphic. In the
other modes you can choose between different fixed time windows: Generally values are
recorded here via a trigger in the sensor electronics before being transfered to the PanelX
program. That makes measurement in these modes independent of the interface trans-
mission speed. The possible time windows depend on the sensor electronics units and
the memory they have available (see also the DGN command).

Cursor
Activate Cursor in the Chart tab on the right side to show two cursors in the graphic. If
one or both of the cursors are not visible, click on Find to place the cursor in the dis-
played range.
The red cursor shows the current position in a small field. The blue cursor also shows
the mean value and standard deviation between the two cursor positions. If the two

PanelX
8 SCOPE IN PANELX 167
display fields are covering relevant parts of the graphic, you can move them to another
position: Click in the field and drag while holding the mouse button.

Trigger
The trigger is only available in Real time and Analysis modes. Choose here whether a
recording will take place in the sensor electronics and if so when the recording will begin
or end.
In the Off setting the measured values are sent directly to the program. This means that
depending on the transmission speed of the interface, it may not be possible to display
all values.
If a trigger is active, the measured values are first stored in the device. The maximum
memory for the devices is 4th generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA 8192 meas-
ured values. This is equivalent to about 13 seconds at a sampling rate of 600 Hz. Older
devices or devices with a firmware version lower than P80 can store a maximum 512
measured values internally.
Possible starting times are: Immediately with start (click on the Start button), when the
trigger event occurs (Trigger event), at the beginning of Batching, Coarse flow, Fine flow
Residual flow and Emptying and with Above level or Below level.
Possible stopping times are: When the trigger event (Trigger event) occurs and with
Above level or Below level.

Signal
You can show the different status signals with the Signals tab on the right side: Click on
the box in the right column of the table. Change the color in the curve that is displayed by
clicking on the color field.

PanelX
168 8 SCOPE IN PANELX
9 Service and diagnostic functions

Service functions in the PanelX program

The Service menu opens the service area. You can read all logs in the service area if you
have activated the function in Log on/off. Define the time in seconds between two log
entries for the window with the output of temperature values (86,400 is equivalent to one
entry per day).
The following protocol files are available:
Calibration protocol: Log file with calibration data
Data protocol: Log file with measurement results
Environmental protocol: Log file with temperature values
Error protocol: Log file with errors
You can also read out the analog-to-digital converter and sensor overflow counters as
well as the current (relative) temperature values. As the temperature sensor is not cal-
ibrated, only temperature changes can be determined with the temperature values, not
the absolute temperatures.
You can use a calibration signal (0 mV/V oder 2 mV/V) as the signal for the sensor elec-
tronics for test purposes with Input signal.

General diagnostic functions

Various diagnostic functions are available in the sensor electronics for monitoring
dynamic measuring processes. A memory for up to 8192 measured values (starting with
P80) plus the corresponding status information is used for this purpose. Measured val-
ues can be saved in real time. Different recording modes are available so you can analyze
the processes without interrupting the measurement. Since measured values are not
read until after the measurement, an analysis is also possible at low interface trans-
mission rates.
Activate the diagnostic function with the DGA command and parameter P1 = 1 or use the
PanelX program. Diagnostics can be performed in two ways for some sensor electronics:

1. Using the (normal) interface

This is possible with AED, PW20i, PW15AHi, PW15iA and PAD400x.
2. Using the diagnostic interface
This is possible beginning with AED9101C, AED9201B, AED9301B, AED9401A,
AED9501A in combination with amplifier board AD103C as well as FIT/0e to

PanelX
9 SERVICE AND DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS 169
 FIT7Ae (e: optional extended version). Communication in this case is via the 2-
wire RS-485 interface.
As soon as you have activated the diagnostic function for an interface, it is disabled for
anyone else.

Diagnostic interface
The address of this interface is identical with the main interface, as the transmission
parameters are permanently set to 38,400 baud, 1 start bit, 8 data bits, even parity and 1
stop bit. You can change the address with the ADR command. The S command (for
selecting the node) is always required.
The diagnostic interface also allows you to read all parameters of individual measured
values and results from batching or triggering.

Relevant commands for diagnostics

Activate diagnostic function: DGA.
Define number of measured values to save: DGN.
Read a measured value with status from diagnostic memory: DGR.
Start diagnostics and query status: DGS.
Define trigger level for diagnostics: DGL.

Notes
The data rate (speed) of signal processing depends on the sample rate that is set
(HSM, FMD, ASF, ICR).
External bus termination resistors are not needed for the diagnostics bus.
Note the ground (GND) to which the interface level of the relevant sensor electronics
units are related.
Use shielded lines only for the bus cable. Place the shielding on the housing on both
ends with ample coverage.

PanelX
170 9 SERVICE AND DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS
10 Command reference

The command reference contains all available commands for the various sensor elec-
tronics systems. Not all commands are supported by every sensor electronics system.
Some commands are only available beginning with a certain firmware version or are only
available for a specific version. If you are not certain you should therefore check what
type of sensor electronics you are using and whether your sensor electronics have the
current firmware. Almost all commands are available for the serial interfaces. The explan-
atory notes indicate if a command is not available for one of the interfaces.
The general format and procedure for using the commands are described in sections
Serial interfaces, CANopen, DeviceNet and PROFIBUS.

Notes
Parameters identified by Disabled in Legal-For-Trade mode: Yes can no longer be
changed after you have switched to one of the Legal-For-Trade modes (LFT com-
mand with parameter P1 greater than zero).
Parameters that cannot be specified as a number or fixed text contain a description
of the parameter value in angle brackets (<>).
The specified range “0 … 160% of NOV” for a parameter means that the maximum
value of the parameter is 1.6 times the value specified for parameter P1 for NOV. For
example, if P1 of NOV has a value of 50,000, the maximum value of the parameter in
question is 80,000.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 171
10.1 Overview: Which commands are in which firmware version?
See also Overview: Commands for P8x grouped by application category, Sensor elec-
tronics units covered by this documentation.

The P50 firmware is available in the following electronics units:

AD104C, AD105C, C16i.

Commands in firmware P50

The following commands are available in this firmware:
ADR (Device Address)
AOV (ADC Overflow Counter)
ASF (Amplifier Signal Filter)
BDR (Baud Rate)
BSY (Busy State)
CDT (Zeroing Delay)
COF (Configure Output Format)
CPV (Clear Peak Values)
CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check)
CSM (Checksum)
CTR (Clear Trigger Results)
CWT (Calibration Weight)
DPT (Decimal Point)
DPW (Define Password)
DZT (Dynamic Zero Tracking/Automatic Zeroing Time)
ENU (Engineering Unit)
ESR (Error Status)
FMD (Filter Mode)
FTL (Fast Track Level (FMD3))
GRU (Group Address)
HRN (High Resolution)
HSM (High Speed Mode ADC)

PanelX
172 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 ICR (Internal Conversion Rate)
IDN (Identification)
LDW (Load Cell Dead Weight)
LFT (Legal-For-Trade)
LIC (Linearization Coefficient)
LIV1 (Limit Value 1 Monitoring)
LIV2 (Limit Value 2 Monitoring)
LWT (Load Cell Weight)
MAV (Measured Alternative Data)
MRA (Multirange Switch Point)
MSV (Measured Signal Value)
MTD (Motion Detection)
NOV (Nominal Value)
NTF (Notch Filter)
POR (Port Set And Read)
PVA (Read Peak Value)
PVS (Peak Value Select)
RES (Reset)
RIO (Read Status Digital I/O)
RSN (Resolution)
S (Select)
SFA (Sensor Fullscale Adjust)
SOV (Sensor Overflow Counter)
SPW (Set Password)
STP (Stop)
STR (Set Termination Resistor)
SZA (Sensor Zero Adjust)
TAR (Tare)
TAS (Gross Signal)
TAV (Tare Value)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 173
 TCR (Trade Counter)
TDD (Store Parameters)
TEX (Text Separator)
TMP (Temperature)
TRC (Trigger Command)
TRF (Trigger Correction Factor)
TRM (Trigger Mean Value)
TRN (Trigger Number)
TRS (Trigger Standard Deviation)
TYP (Amplifier Type)
ZSE (Zero Setting)
ZTR (Zero Tracking)

The P6x firmware is available in the following electronics units:

PW15AHi.

Commands in firmware P6x

The following commands are available in this firmware:
ADR (Device Address)
AOV (ADC Overflow Counter)
APD (Alternative Poll Data)
ASF (Amplifier Signal Filter)
AT1 (Active Time Output 1)1)
AT2 (Active Time Output 2)1)
AT3 (Active Time Output 3)1)
AT4 (Active Time Output 4)1)
BDR (Baud Rate)
BOF (Bus-off Behavior)
BRK (Abort Dosing)
BSY (Busy State)
CBK (Coarse Flow Monitoring)

PanelX
174 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 CBT (Coarse Flow Monitoring Time)
CDT (Zeroing Delay)
CFD (Coarse Flow Disconnect)
CFT (Coarse Flow Time)
COF (Configure Output Format)
CPV (Clear Peak Values)
CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check)
CSM (Checksum)
CSN (Clear Dosing Results)
CTR (Clear Trigger Results)
CWT (Calibration Weight)
DGA (Diagnostic Activation)
DGL (Diagnostic Trigger Level)
DGS (Diagnostic Start And Status)
DL1 (Delay Time 1)2)
DL2 (Delay Time 2)2)
DMD (Dosing Mode)
DPT (Decimal Point)
DPW (Define Password)
DST (Dosing Time)
DT1 (Delay Time Output 1)1)
DT2 (Delay Time Output 2)1)
DT3 (Delay Time Output 3)1)
DT4 (Delay Time Output 4)1)
DZT (Dynamic Zero Tracking/Automatic Zeroing Time)
EMA (Event Mask A)
EMB (Event Mask B)
EMD (Emptying Mode)
ENU (Engineering Unit)
EPT (Emptying Time)
ESR (Error Status)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 175
 EWT (Empty Weight)
FBK (Fine Flow Monitoring)
FBT (Fine Break Time)
FFD (Fine Flow Disconnect)
FFL (First Fine Flow Time)
FFM (Fine Feed Minimum)
FFT (Fine Flow Time)
FMD (Filter Mode)
FNB (Dosing Parameter Set)
FRS (Filling Result)
FTL (Fast Track Level (FMD3))
FWT (Filling Weight)
GRU (Group Address)
HRN (High Resolution)
HSM (High Speed Mode ADC)
ICR (Internal Conversion Rate)
IDN (Identification)
IMD (Input Mode)
LDW (Load Cell Dead Weight)
LFT (Legal-For-Trade)
LIC (Linearization Coefficient)
LIV1 (Limit Value 1 Monitoring)
LIV2 (Limit Value 2 Monitoring)
LIV3 (Limit Value 3 Monitoring)
LIV4 (Limit Value 4 Monitoring)
LTC (Lockout Time Coarse Flow)
LTF (Lockout Time Fine)
LTL (Lower Tolerance Limit)
LWT (Load Cell Weight)
MAC (Moving Average Filter for FMD5)1)

PanelX
176 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 MAV (Measured Alternative Data)
MDT (Maximum Dosing Time)
MRA (Multirange Switch Point)
MSV (Measured Signal Value)
MSW (Minimum Start Weight)
MTD (Motion Detection)
MUX (Control of Digital Outputs OUT5 And OUT6)
MVC (Retrigger Mean Value Count)1)
NDS (Number of Dosings)
NOV (Nominal Value)
NTF (Notch Filter)
OMD (Output Mode)2)
OSN (Optimization)
POR (Port Set And Read)
PTD (Post-Trigger Delay)1)
PVA (Read Peak Value)
PVS (Peak Value Select)
RDP (Select Dosing Parameter Set)
RDS (Redosing)
RES (Reset)
RFT (Residual Flow Time)
RIO (Read Status Digital I/O)
RSN (Resolution)
RTB (Re-Trigger Tolerance Band)1)
RUN (Start Filling)
S (Select)
SDF (Special Dosing Functions)
SDM (Mean Value Dosing Results)
SDO (State of Dosing)
SDS (Standard Deviation Dosing Results)
SFA (Sensor Fullscale Adjust)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 177
 SOV (Sensor Overflow Counter)
SPW (Set Password)
STP (Stop)
STR (Set Termination Resistor)
STT (Stabilization Time)
STW (Control Word)
SUM (Cumulative Weight)
SYD (Systematic Difference)
SZA (Sensor Zero Adjust)
TAD (Tare Delay)
TAR (Tare)
TAS (Gross Signal)
TAV (Tare Value)
TCR (Trade Counter)
TDD (Store Parameters)
TEX (Text Separator)
TMD (Tare Mode)
TMP (Temperature)
TRC (Trigger Command)
TRF (Trigger Correction Factor)
TRM (Trigger Mean Value)
TRN (Trigger Number)
TRS (Trigger Standard Deviation)
TSL (Trigger Stop Level)1)
TST (Trigger Stop Time)1)
TVT (Trigger Delay Time)1)
TYP (Amplifier Type)
UTL (Upper Tolerance Limit)
VCT (Valve Control)
WDP (Write Dosing Parameter Set)
ZSE (Zero Setting)

PanelX
178 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 ZTR (Zero Tracking)
1) From P64.4.
2) From P64.3.

The P7x firmware is available in the following electronics units:

AD103C, FIT/0, FIT/1, FIT/5, following AEDs with AD103C: AED9101B/C/D, AED9101C-
Z2/22, AED9201B, AED9301B, AED9401A, AED9501A.

Commands in firmware P7x

The following commands are available in this firmware:
ADR (Device Address)
AOV (ADC Overflow Counter)
APD (Alternative Poll Data)
ASF (Amplifier Signal Filter)
AT1 (Active Time Output 1)1)
AT2 (Active Time Output 2)1)
AT3 (Active Time Output 3)1)
AT4 (Active Time Output 4)1)
BDR (Baud Rate)
BOF (Bus-off Behavior)
BRK (Abort Dosing)
BSY (Busy State)
CBK (Coarse Flow Monitoring)
CBT (Coarse Flow Monitoring Time)
CDT (Zeroing Delay)
CFD (Coarse Flow Disconnect)
CFT (Coarse Flow Time)
COF (Configure Output Format)
CPV (Clear Peak Values)
CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check)
CSM (Checksum)
CSN (Clear Dosing Results)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 179
 CTR (Clear Trigger Results)
CWT (Calibration Weight)
DGA (Diagnostic Activation)
DGL (Diagnostic Trigger Level)
DGS (Diagnostic Start And Status)
DL1 (Delay Time 1)2)
DL2 (Delay Time 2)2)
DMD (Dosing Mode)
DPT (Decimal Point)
DPW (Define Password)
DST (Dosing Time)
DT1 (Delay Time Output 1)1)
DT2 (Delay Time Output 2)1)
DT3 (Delay Time Output 3)1)
DT4 (Delay Time Output 4)1)
DZT (Dynamic Zero Tracking/Automatic Zeroing Time)
EMA (Event Mask A)
EMB (Event Mask B)
EMD (Emptying Mode)
ENU (Engineering Unit)
EPT (Emptying Time)
ESR (Error Status)
EWT (Empty Weight)
FBK (Fine Flow Monitoring)
FBT (Fine Break Time)
FFD (Fine Flow Disconnect)
FFL (First Fine Flow Time)
FFM (Fine Feed Minimum)
FFT (Fine Flow Time)
FMD (Filter Mode)
FNB (Dosing Parameter Set)
FPT (Time Base Fine Flow Prediction)3)

PanelX
180 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 FRS (Filling Result)
FTL (Fast Track Level (FMD3))
FWT (Filling Weight)
GRU (Group Address)
HRN (High Resolution)
HSM (High Speed Mode ADC)
ICR (Internal Conversion Rate)
IDN (Identification)
IMD (Input Mode)
LDW (Load Cell Dead Weight)
LFT (Legal-For-Trade)
LIC (Linearization Coefficient)
LIV1 (Limit Value 1 Monitoring)
LIV2 (Limit Value 2 Monitoring)
LIV3 (Limit Value 3 Monitoring)
LIV4 (Limit Value 4 Monitoring)
LTC (Lockout Time Coarse Flow)
LTF (Lockout Time Fine)
LTL (Lower Tolerance Limit)
LWT (Load Cell Weight)
MAC (Moving Average Filter for FMD5)1)
MAV (Measured Alternative Data)
MDT (Maximum Dosing Time)
MFO (Material Flow Last Dosing Cycle)3)
MRA (Multirange Switch Point)
MSV (Measured Signal Value)
MSW (Minimum Start Weight)
MTD (Motion Detection)
MVC (Retrigger Mean Value Count)1)
NDS (Number of Dosings)
NOV (Nominal Value)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 181
 NTF (Notch Filter)
OMD (Output Mode)
OSN (Optimization)
POR (Port Set And Read)
PTD (Post-Trigger Delay)1)
PVA (Read Peak Value)
PVS (Peak Value Select)
RDP (Select Dosing Parameter Set)
RDS (Redosing)
RES (Reset)
RFO (Residual Flow Last Dosing Cycle)3)
RFT (Residual Flow Time)
RIO (Read Status Digital I/O)
RSN (Resolution)
RTB (Re-Trigger Tolerance Band)1)
RUN (Start Filling)
S (Select)
SDF (Special Dosing Functions)
SDM (Mean Value Dosing Results)
SDO (State of Dosing)
SDS (Standard Deviation Dosing Results)
SFA (Sensor Fullscale Adjust)
SOV (Sensor Overflow Counter)
SPW (Set Password)
STP (Stop)
STR (Set Termination Resistor)
STT (Stabilization Time)
STW (Control Word)
SUM (Cumulative Weight)
SYD (Systematic Difference)
SZA (Sensor Zero Adjust)

PanelX
182 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 TAD (Tare Delay)
TAR (Tare)
TAS (Gross Signal)
TAV (Tare Value)
TCR (Trade Counter)
TDD (Store Parameters)
TEX (Text Separator)
TMD (Tare Mode)
TMP (Temperature)
TRC (Trigger Command)
TRF (Trigger Correction Factor)
TRM (Trigger Mean Value)
TRN (Trigger Number)
TRS (Trigger Standard Deviation)
TSL (Trigger Stop Level)1)
TST (Trigger Stop Time)1)
TVT (Trigger Delay Time)1)
TYP (Amplifier Type)
UTL (Upper Tolerance Limit)
VCT (Valve Control)
WDP (Write Dosing Parameter Set)
ZSE (Zero Setting)
ZTR (Zero Tracking)
1) From P77.9.
2) From P77.8.
3) From P78.3.

The P8x firmware is available in the following electronics units:

AD105D, AD112D, FIT5A, FIT7A, PW15iA, PAD400xA.

Commands in firmware P8x

The following commands are available in this firmware:

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 183
 ADF (Adaptive Noise Suppression)
ADR (Device Address)
ALS (Alarm Status)
AOV (ADC Overflow Counter)
APD (Alternative Poll Data)
APP (Alternative Control Word)
ASD (Adaptive Dosing Times)
ASF (Amplifier Signal Filter)
AST (Adaptive Trigger Settling)
AT1 (Active Time Output 1)
AT2 (Active Time Output 2)
AT3 (Active Time Output 3)
AT4 (Active Time Output 4)
ATP (Adaptive Lockout Times)
BDR (Baud Rate)
BOF (Bus-off Behavior)
BRK (Abort Dosing)
BSY (Busy State)
CBK (Coarse Flow Monitoring)
CBT (Coarse Flow Monitoring Time)
CD1 (Zeroing Delay 1)
CD2 (Zeroing Delay 2)
CDL (Zeroing)
CDT (Zeroing Delay)
CFD (Coarse Flow Disconnect)
CFT (Coarse Flow Time)
COF (Configure Output Format)
CPV (Clear Peak Values)
CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check)
CSM (Checksum)

PanelX
184 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 CSN (Clear Dosing Results)
CTO (Zeroing Tolerance)
CTR (Clear Trigger Results)
CWT (Calibration Weight)
DGA (Diagnostic Activation)
DGL (Diagnostic Trigger Level)
DGN (Diagnostic Number)
DGR (Diagnostic Read)
DGS (Diagnostic Start And Status)
DL1 (Delay Time 1)
DL2 (Delay Time 2)
DMD (Dosing Mode)
DPT (Decimal Point)
DPW (Define Password)
DST (Dosing Time)
DT1 (Delay Time Output 1)
DT2 (Delay Time Output 2)
DT3 (Delay Time Output 3)
DT4 (Delay Time Output 4)
DZB (Automatic Zeroing Band)1)
DZC (Automatic Zeroing Count)1)
DZH (Automatic Zeroing Hold-off)1)
DZM (Automatic Zeroing Mode)1)
DZT (Dynamic Zero Tracking/Automatic Zeroing Time)
EMA (Event Mask A)
EMB (Event Mask B)
EMD (Emptying Mode)
ENU (Engineering Unit)
EPT (Emptying Time)
ERR (Extended Error Status)
ESR (Error Status)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 185
 EWT (Empty Weight)
FBK (Fine Flow Monitoring)
FBT (Fine Break Time)
FFD (Fine Flow Disconnect)
FFL (First Fine Flow Time)
FFM (Fine Feed Minimum)
FFT (Fine Flow Time)
FLO (Flow Rate)
FMD (Filter Mode)
FNB (Dosing Parameter Set)
FPT (Time Base Fine Flow Prediction)
FRS (Filling Result)
FRT (Flow Rate Measurement Time)
FST (Filter Settling Time)
FTL (Fast Track Level (FMD3))
FWT (Filling Weight)
GRU (Group Address)
HRN (High Resolution)
HSM (High Speed Mode ADC)
HWV (Hardware Version)
ICR (Internal Conversion Rate)
IDN (Identification)
IM1 (Input Mode Input 1)
IM2 (Input Mode Input 2)
IMD (Input Mode)
IOM (IO Mode)
IS1 (Digital Input State Input 1)
IS2 (Digital Input State Input 2)
LDW (Load Cell Dead Weight)
LFT (Legal-For-Trade)

PanelX
186 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 LIC (Linearization Coefficient)
LIV1 (Limit Value 1 Monitoring)
LIV2 (Limit Value 2 Monitoring)
LIV3 (Limit Value 3 Monitoring)
LIV4 (Limit Value 4 Monitoring)
LTC (Lockout Time Coarse Flow)
LTF (Lockout Time Fine)
LTL (Lower Tolerance Limit)
LWT (Load Cell Weight)
MAC (Moving Average Filter for FMD5)
MAV (Measured Alternative Data)
MDT (Maximum Dosing Time)
MFO (Material Flow Last Dosing Cycle)
MRA (Multirange Switch Point)
MRM (Multi-Range Mode)1)
MSV (Measured Signal Value)
MSW (Minimum Start Weight)
MTD (Motion Detection)
MUX (Control of Digital Outputs OUT5 And OUT6)
MVC (Retrigger Mean Value Count)
NAM (Manufacturer)
NDS (Number of Dosings)
NOV (Nominal Value)
NTF (Notch Filter)
OM1 (Output Mode Output 1)
OM2 (Output Mode Output 2)
OM3 (Output Mode Output 3)
OM4 (Output Mode Output 4)
OM5 (Output Mode Output 5)
OM6 (Output Mode Output 6)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 187
 OMD (Output Mode)
OS1 (Digital Output 1)
OS2 (Digital Output 2)
OS3 (Digital Output 3)
OS4 (Digital Output 4)
OS5 (Digital Output 5)
OS6 (Digital Output 6)
OSN (Optimization)
PDT (Firmware Date)
POL (Light Sensor Polarity)
POR (Port Set And Read)
PTD (Post-Trigger Delay)
PVA (Read Peak Value)
PVS (Peak Value Select)
PZN (Check Number)
RDP (Select Dosing Parameter Set)
RDS (Redosing)
RES (Reset)
RFO (Residual Flow Last Dosing Cycle)
RFT (Residual Flow Time)
RIO (Read Status Digital I/O)
RSN (Resolution)
RTB (Re-Trigger Tolerance Band)
RUN (Start Filling)
S (Select)
SCR (Set Current Range)1)
SDF (Special Dosing Functions)
SDM (Mean Value Dosing Results)
SDO (State of Dosing)
SDS (Standard Deviation Dosing Results)

PanelX
188 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 SFA (Sensor Fullscale Adjust)
SNR (Serial Number)2)
SOV (Sensor Overflow Counter)
SPL (Input Level)
SPW (Set Password)
SRV (Software Sub-Version)
STB (Control Byte)
STP (Stop)
STR (Set Termination Resistor)
STT (Stabilization Time)
STW (Control Word)
SUM (Cumulative Weight)
SWI (Software Identification)
SWV (Software Version)
SYD (Systematic Difference)
SZA (Sensor Zero Adjust)
TAD (Tare Delay)
TAR (Tare)
TAS (Gross Signal)
TAV (Tare Value)
TCR (Trade Counter)
TDD (Store Parameters)
TEX (Text Separator)
TIM (Date/Time)
TMA (Maximum Filter Settling Time)
TMD (Tare Mode)
TMO (Temperature Alarm Sensor)
TMP (Temperature)
TRC (Trigger Command)
TRF (Trigger Correction Factor)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 189
 TRM (Trigger Mean Value)
TRN (Trigger Number)
TRS (Trigger Standard Deviation)
TSL (Trigger Stop Level)
TST (Trigger Stop Time)
TSW (Software Trigger)
TVT (Trigger Delay Time)
TYP (Amplifier Type)
UDC (Supply Voltage)
UIT (Input Threshold)
UTL (Upper Tolerance Limit)
VCT (Valve Control)
WDP (Write Dosing Parameter Set)
ZSE (Zero Setting)
ZTR (Zero Tracking)
1) From P81.
2) From P80.1.7.

10.2 Overview: Commands for P8x grouped by application category

See also Sensor electronics units covered by this documentation, Overview: Which com-
mands are in which firmware version?.

Adjustment
CWT (Calibration Weight)
DPT (Decimal Point)
ENU (Engineering Unit)
LDW (Load Cell Dead Weight)
LIC (Linearization Coefficient)
LWT (Load Cell Weight)
NOV (Nominal Value)
RSN (Resolution)

PanelX
190 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 SFA (Sensor Fullscale Adjust)
SZA (Sensor Zero Adjust)

Diagnosis
DGA (Diagnostic Activation)
DGL (Diagnostic Trigger Level)
DGN (Diagnostic Number)
DGR (Diagnostic Read)
DGS (Diagnostic Start And Status)
UDC (Supply Voltage)
UIT (Input Threshold)

Dosing
ASD (Adaptive Dosing Times)
ATP (Adaptive Lockout Times)
BRK (Abort Dosing)
CBK (Coarse Flow Monitoring)
CBT (Coarse Flow Monitoring Time)
CD1 (Zeroing Delay 1)
CD2 (Zeroing Delay 2)
CFD (Coarse Flow Disconnect)
CFT (Coarse Flow Time)
CSN (Clear Dosing Results)
CTO (Zeroing Tolerance)
DL1 (Delay Time 1)
DL2 (Delay Time 2)
DMD (Dosing Mode)
DST (Dosing Time)
EMD (Emptying Mode)
EPT (Emptying Time)
EWT (Empty Weight)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 191
 FBK (Fine Flow Monitoring)
FBT (Fine Break Time)
FFD (Fine Flow Disconnect)
FFL (First Fine Flow Time)
FFM (Fine Feed Minimum)
FFT (Fine Flow Time)
FNB (Dosing Parameter Set)
FPT (Time Base Fine Flow Prediction)
FRS (Filling Result)
FWT (Filling Weight)
LTC (Lockout Time Coarse Flow)
LTF (Lockout Time Fine)
LTL (Lower Tolerance Limit)
MDT (Maximum Dosing Time)
MFO (Material Flow Last Dosing Cycle)
MSW (Minimum Start Weight)
NDS (Number of Dosings)
OMD (Output Mode)
OSN (Optimization)
RDP (Select Dosing Parameter Set)
RDS (Redosing)
RFO (Residual Flow Last Dosing Cycle)
RFT (Residual Flow Time)
RUN (Start Filling)
SDF (Special Dosing Functions)
SDM (Mean Value Dosing Results)
SDO (State of Dosing)
SDS (Standard Deviation Dosing Results)
STT (Stabilization Time)
SUM (Cumulative Weight)

PanelX
192 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 SYD (Systematic Difference)
TAD (Tare Delay)
TMD (Tare Mode)
UTL (Upper Tolerance Limit)
VCT (Valve Control)
WDP (Write Dosing Parameter Set)

Filter
ADF (Adaptive Noise Suppression)
ASF (Amplifier Signal Filter)
FMD (Filter Mode)
FST (Filter Settling Time)
FTL (Fast Track Level (FMD3))
HSM (High Speed Mode ADC)
ICR (Internal Conversion Rate)
MAC (Moving Average Filter for FMD5)
NTF (Notch Filter)
TMA (Maximum Filter Settling Time)

Device ID
HWV (Hardware Version)
IDN (Identification)
NAM (Manufacturer)
PDT (Firmware Date)
PZN (Check Number)
SNR (Serial Number)
SRV (Software Sub-Version)
SWI (Software Identification)
SWV (Software Version)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 193
IO
IM1 (Input Mode Input 1)
IM2 (Input Mode Input 2)
IOM (IO Mode)
IS1 (Digital Input State Input 1)
IS2 (Digital Input State Input 2)
MUX (Control of Digital Outputs OUT5 And OUT6)
OM1 (Output Mode Output 1)
OM2 (Output Mode Output 2)
OM3 (Output Mode Output 3)
OM4 (Output Mode Output 4)
OM5 (Output Mode Output 5)
OM6 (Output Mode Output 6)
OS1 (Digital Output 1)
OS2 (Digital Output 2)
OS3 (Digital Output 3)
OS4 (Digital Output 4)
OS5 (Digital Output 5)
OS6 (Digital Output 6)
POR (Port Set And Read)
RIO (Read Status Digital I/O)
SPL (Input Level)

Measuring
ALS (Alarm Status)
AOV (ADC Overflow Counter)
APD (Alternative Poll Data)
APP (Alternative Control Word)
AT1 (Active Time Output 1)
AT2 (Active Time Output 2)
AT3 (Active Time Output 3)

PanelX
194 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 AT4 (Active Time Output 4)
CDL (Zeroing)
CPV (Clear Peak Values)
DT1 (Delay Time Output 1)
DT2 (Delay Time Output 2)
DT3 (Delay Time Output 3)
DT4 (Delay Time Output 4)
ERR (Extended Error Status)
ESR (Error Status)
FLO (Flow Rate)
FRT (Flow Rate Measurement Time)
IMD (Input Mode)
LIV1 (Limit Value 1 Monitoring)
LIV2 (Limit Value 2 Monitoring)
LIV3 (Limit Value 3 Monitoring)
LIV4 (Limit Value 4 Monitoring)
MSV (Measured Signal Value)
PVA (Read Peak Value)
PVS (Peak Value Select)
SOV (Sensor Overflow Counter)
STB (Control Byte)
STP (Stop)
STW (Control Word)
TAR (Tare)
TAS (Gross Signal)
TAV (Tare Value)

Interface
ADR (Device Address)
BDR (Baud Rate)
BOF (Bus-off Behavior)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 195
 BSY (Busy State)
COF (Configure Output Format)
CSM (Checksum)
DPW (Define Password)
EMA (Event Mask A)
EMB (Event Mask B)
GRU (Group Address)
S (Select)
SPW (Set Password)
STR (Set Termination Resistor)
TEX (Text Separator)

Service
RES (Reset)
TDD (Store Parameters)
TIM (Date/Time)
TMO (Temperature Alarm Sensor)
TMP (Temperature)

Trigger functions and parameters

AST (Adaptive Trigger Settling)
CDT (Zeroing Delay)
CTR (Clear Trigger Results)
MAV (Measured Alternative Data)
MVC (Retrigger Mean Value Count)
POL (Light Sensor Polarity)
PTD (Post-Trigger Delay)
RTB (Re-Trigger Tolerance Band)
TRC (Trigger Command)
TRF (Trigger Correction Factor)
TRM (Trigger Mean Value)

PanelX
196 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 TRN (Trigger Number)
TRS (Trigger Standard Deviation)
TSL (Trigger Stop Level)
TST (Trigger Stop Time)
TSW (Software Trigger)
TVT (Trigger Delay Time)

Scale functions and parameters

CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check)
DZB (Automatic Zeroing Band)1)
DZC (Automatic Zeroing Count)1)
DZH (Automatic Zeroing Hold-off)1)
DZM (Automatic Zeroing Mode)1)
DZT (Dynamic Zero Tracking/Automatic Zeroing Time)
HRN (High Resolution)
LFT (Legal-For-Trade)
MRA (Multirange Switch Point)
MRM (Multi-Range Mode)1)
MTD (Motion Detection)
SCR (Set Current Range)1)
TCR (Trade Counter)
ZSE (Zero Setting)
ZTR (Zero Tracking)
1)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 197
10.3 ADF (Adaptive Noise Suppression)
Sets or reads the maximum number of adaptive filters that will be used.
When the notch filters are active the sensor electronics automatically search for inter-
ference frequencies during the measurement and suppress them with up to 3 filters.

The settling time of the entire filter chain changes depending on the number
of filters and the interference frequency. You can therefore limit the max-
imum filter settling time with the TMA command.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

PanelX
198 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P1

Meaning Number of adaptive filters used

0: Adaptive notch filters deactivated

1: Filtering via moving average (MAC)
2: Filtering via moving average (MAC) plus 1 comb filters
Range/data
(NTF)
3: Filtering via moving average (MAC) plus 2 comb filters
(NTF)

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2050hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 01hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 6

Attribute 1

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 199
10.4 ADR (Device Address)

This command only concerns serial interfaces.

Sets or reads the network address of the device for RS-485 interfaces. With the optional
second parameter, if you are operating on bus-capable interfaces, you can access
devices with the same address individually to be able to save the address. Newer elec-
tronics (available beginning with P80) also use 10-digit serial numbers. In this case 10
digits are used as soon as 9,999,999 is exceeded, otherwise 7.
See also SNR, IDN, S.

Use this command to prepare for bus operation to ensure that each con-
nected device has a unique address.

No. of parameters 2

Factory setting 31

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1
Network address for the serial interface, also with dia-
Meaning
gnostics bus

Range/data 0 … 89

Number of ASCII characters with 2

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

PanelX
200 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2600hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 01hex (hexadecimal)

Class 130

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 1

PROFIBUS Not available

Parameter P2 (optional)

Meaning Serial number

Text (ASCII), 7 or 10 char-

Range/data
acters; see also SNR.

Data type STRING

Access R (Read only)

CANopen Not available

DeviceNet Not available

PROFIBUS Not available

Example

Command S98; Broadcast, selects all bus nodes.

Command ADR25,"007"; Changes the address of the device with serial number 007 to
25.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 201
10.5 ALS (Alarm Status)
Reads the alarm status.
The alarm status is a 32-bit value, see the table below for the meaning of the individual
bits.

No. of parameters –

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Information about the command

Meaning Alarm status

Range/data 0 … 4,294,967,296

Number of ASCII characters with 10

serial interface

Data type UINT32 (Unsigned Integer 32 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2000hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Dhex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
202 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 13

PROFIBUS Not available

Meaning of the status bits

Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

31 ESR error

30 Residual flow active

29 Bridge excitation voltage error

28 Short circuit digital outputs OUT1 … 4

27 Lower tolerance limit exceeded during batching (LTL)

26 Upper tolerance limit exceeded during batching (UTL)

25 Indicating range exceeded, see also LFT

24 Dosing time exceeded (MDT)

23 A peak value is available (PVA). The bit will be deleted after a query.

22 Dosing error (ALARM)

21 A peak result is available (FRS). The bit will be deleted after a query.

20 Broken bag/damaged container

19 A measured value is available (MSV). The bit will be deleted after a query.

18 Zero balance was performed. The bit will be deleted after a query.

17 Overflow/underflow analog-to-digital converter, see also ESR

16 Overflow/underflow gross, see also ESR

15 Overflow/underflow net, see also ESR

14 Control input 2 active

13 Batching ready signal (FRS can be read out)

12 Emptying active, see also EWT

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 203
 Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

11 Fine flow active

10 A trigger result is available (MAV). The bit will be deleted after a query.

9 Coarse flow active

8 Redosing active, see also RDS

7 Trigger function active (TRC)

6 Weighing range 2 active (MRA). Otherwise (bit = 0) weighing range 1 is active.

5 Limit value 2 active (LIV2)

4 Limit value 1 active (LIV1)

3 Standstill, see also MTD

2 Control input 1 active

1 True zero (0 ± 0.25 d)

0 The gross weight is transmitted. Otherwise (bit = 0) the net signal is transmitted. See
also TAS.

PanelX
204 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.6 AOV (ADC Overflow Counter)
Reads the counter for the A/D converter overflow (ADU Overflow).
AED9101C-Z2/22, AED9101D, AED9201B, AED9301B, AED9401A, AED9501A: If the A/D
converter is overloaded, this counter is incremented by one every 10 seconds. The max-
imum extent of the count is 8,388,607.
FIT/0, FIT/1, FIT/4, FIT/5, FIT5A, FIT/7, PW15AHi, PW15iA, PW20i, C16i: If the load cell is
overloaded at more than 160% of maximum capacity, this counter is incremented by one
every 10 seconds. The maximum extent of the count is 8,388,607.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 205
Parameter P1

Meaning Counter for A/D converter overflow

Range/data 0 … 8,388,607

Number of ASCII characters with 7

serial interface

Data type UINT32 (Unsigned Integer 32 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2500hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 01hex (hexadecimal)

Class 120

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 1

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 115

PanelX
206 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.7 APD (Alternative Poll Data)
Reads or sets the content of a DeviceNet poll request and displays the trigger results
included in the content.
This function is useful if your PLC has problems with the content of the poll request.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 2

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Alternative poll data

Range/data 0 … 47

Number of ASCII characters with 2

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2600hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Fhex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 207
 Class 130

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 15

PROFIBUS Not available

Meaning of values for P1

See also Example 3: Cyclic data traffic after the poll connection is opened with DeviceNet
for additional parameter values.

Poll data Poll data Poll data Poll data Poll data Trigger result
P1
byte 1 byte 2 byte 3 byte 4 byte 5 mode

0 IMD MSV MSV status MAV/FRS MAV/FRS Standard

status

1 MSV value MSV status MAV/FRS MAV/FRS IMD value Standard

value status

2 IMD value MSV value MSV status MAV/FRS MAV/FRS Advanced

value status

3 MSV value MSV status MAV/FRS MAV/FRS IMD value Advanced

value status

Trigger result mode:

1. Standard
The status bit is set with each new trigger event. After the trigger result in the poll
request is transferred, the trigger result is set to the assigned value (-8.388.607)
and the “Trigger available” status bit is deleted.
2. Advanced
After the trigger result in the poll request is transferred, the trigger result and the
“Trigger available” status bit are continuously transferred. The trigger result and
status bit are only reset by reading out the trigger result via the explicit connection

PanelX
208 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.8 APP (Alternative Control Word)
Sets or reads use of the alternative control word for poll data with DeviceNet.
Changing the size of the control word (STW) to 8 bits (control byte STB) shortens the poll
sequence.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Control word or control byte

0: Use control word (16 bits)

Range/data
1: Use control byte (8 bits)

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2600hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 1Bhex (hexadecimal)

Class 130

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 27

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 209
10.9 ARP (Adaptive Residual Flow Time)
Sets or reads activation of the adaptive setting for the residual flow time RFT.
When this function is active, the residual flow time is set automatically based on the
material flow (optimized). Then it is no longer possible to enter the value (directly).
See also ATP.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in Legal-For-Trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P80

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Adaptive residual flow time active/not active

0: Deactivate setting
Range/data
1: Activate adaptive setting

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2200hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 11hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 17

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
210 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.10 ASD (Adaptive Dosing Times)
Sets or reads the activation of the adaptive setting for the delay time for taring (TAD), the
residual flow time (RFT), and the zero value settling time (CD2).
When this function is active, the times are set automatically based on the filter that is
used (optimized). Then it is no longer possible to enter the values (directly).

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1
Adaptive setting for delay time during taring, residual
Meaning
flow time and zero value settling time active/inactive

0: Deactivate adaptive setting

Range/data
1: Activate adaptive setting

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2200hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 13hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 211
 Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 19

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
212 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.11 ASF (Amplifier Signal Filter)
Sets or reads the filter limit frequency. The filter effect is also influenced by the FMD,
HSM and ICR commands.
See also Filter mode, Filter frequency.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 5

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Filter selection

0: Deactivated
Range/data
1 … 9; see Filter limit frequency

Number of ASCII characters with 2

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2010hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 01hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 1

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 213
 Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 43

10.12 ASS (Amplifier Signal Selection)

Sets or reads the amplifier input signal. This command is only present for compatibility
reasons and is used by HBM for tests.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 2

<10 ms for queries

Response time
<220 ms for setting

Password protection1) No

Disabled in Legal-For-Trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Amplifier input signal

0: Internal zero signal (0 mV/V)

1: Internal calibration signal (2 mV/V)
Range/data 2: Measurement signal (transducer)
3: Internal calibration signal (for compatibility with
AD101)

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2010hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 02hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
214 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 2

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 103

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 215
10.13 AST (Adaptive Trigger Settling)
Sets or reads activation of the adaptive setting for the settling time (TRC).
When this function is active, the times are set automatically based on the filter that is
used (optimized). Then it is no longer possible to enter the values (directly).

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Adaptive setting of trigger settling time active/not active

0: Deactivate adaptive setting

Range/data
1: Activate adaptive setting

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2200hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 14hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 19

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
216 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.14 AT1 (Active Time Output 1)

The description below referring to the functions of digital outputs applies

only to sensor electronics up to 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C,
AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics and for 4th gen-
eration FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics in compatibility
mode (IOM command with parameter P1 = 0). For sensor electronics in 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA you can define the function of the
digital outputs yourself with commands OM1 to OM6 (IOM command with
parameter P1 = 1).

Amount of time digital output OUT1 is active when the trigger function is used.
The functionality is activated with the LIV1 command with parameter 1 > 2 and para-
meter 2 = 2. The calculation of the trigger result (MAV) starts delay time DT1. When the
delay time has elapsed, time AT1 starts (parameter P1 * 10 ms). Output OUT1 is active
during this time. Set parameter P1 = 0 to turn off the function.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for- No
trade mode

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with P64.4 (electronics units with P64.4 see Firmware overview), P77.9
firmware version (electronics units with P77.9 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Activation time 1

Range/data 0 … 32,767; the activation time is parameter P1 * 10 ms

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 217
 Number of ASCII characters with 5
serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 11hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 17

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 172

PanelX
218 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.15 AT2 (Active Time Output 2)

The description below referring to the functions of digital outputs applies

only to sensor electronics up to 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C,
AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics and for 4th gen-
eration FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics in compatibility
mode (IOM command with parameter P1 = 0). For sensor electronics in 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA you can define the function of the
digital outputs yourself with commands OM1 to OM6 (IOM command with
parameter P1 = 1).

Amount of time digital output OUT2 is active when the trigger function is used.
The functionality is activated with the LIV2 command with parameter 2 > 2 and para-
meter 3 = 2. The calculation of the trigger result (MAV) starts delay time DT2. When the
delay time has elapsed, time AT2 starts (parameter P1 * 10 ms). Output OUT2 is active
during this time. Set parameter P1 = 0 to turn off the function.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for- No
trade mode

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with P64.4 (electronics units with P64.4 see Firmware overview), P77.9
firmware version (electronics units with P77.9 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Activation time 2

Range/data 0 … 32,767; the activation time is parameter P1 * 10 ms

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 219
 Number of ASCII characters with 5
serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 12hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 18

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 173

PanelX
220 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.16 AT3 (Active Time Output 3)

The description below referring to the functions of digital outputs applies

only to sensor electronics up to 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C,
AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics and for 4th gen-
eration FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics in compatibility
mode (IOM command with parameter P1 = 0). For sensor electronics in 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA you can define the function of the
digital outputs yourself with commands OM1 to OM6 (IOM command with
parameter P1 = 1).

Amount of time digital output OUT3 is active when the trigger function is used.
The functionality is activated with the LIV3 command with parameter 2 > 2 and para-
meter 3 = 2. The calculation of the trigger result (MAV) starts delay time DT3. When the
delay time has elapsed, time AT3 starts (parameter P1 * 10 ms). Output OUT3 is active
during this time. Set parameter P1 = 0 to turn off the function.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for- No
trade mode

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with P64.4 (electronics units with P64.4 see Firmware overview), P77.9
firmware version (electronics units with P77.9 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Activation time 3

Range/data 0 … 32,767; the activation time is parameter P1 * 10 ms

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 221
 Number of ASCII characters with 5
serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 13hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 19

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 174

PanelX
222 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.17 AT4 (Active Time Output 4)

The description below referring to the functions of digital outputs applies

only to sensor electronics up to 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C,
AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics and for 4th gen-
eration FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics in compatibility
mode (IOM command with parameter P1 = 0). For sensor electronics in 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA you can define the function of the
digital outputs yourself with commands OM1 to OM6 (IOM command with
parameter P1 = 1).

Amount of time digital output OUT4 is active when the trigger function is used.
The functionality is activated with the LIV4 command with parameter 2 > 2 and para-
meter 3 = 2. The calculation of the trigger result (MAV) starts delay time DT4. When the
delay time has elapsed, time AT4 starts (parameter P1 * 10 ms). Output OUT4 is active
during this time. Set parameter P1 = 0 to turn off the function.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for- No
trade mode

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with P64.4 (electronics units with P64.4 see Firmware overview), P77.9
firmware version (electronics units with P77.9 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Activation time 4

Range/data 0 … 32,767; the activation time is parameter P1 * 10 ms

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 223
 Number of ASCII characters with 5
serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 14hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 20

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 175

PanelX
224 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.18 ATP (Adaptive Lockout Times)
Sets or reads activation of the adaptive setting for the lockout times with for coarse/fine
flow (LTC/LTF).
When this function is active, times are set automatically based on the material flow
(optimized). Then it is no longer possible to enter the values (directly).

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1
Adaptive setting of lockout times with coarse and fine
Meaning
flow active/not active

0: Deactivate adaptive setting

Range/data
1: Activate adaptive setting

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2200hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex Fhex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 225
 Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 15

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
226 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.19 BDR (Baud Rate)
Sets or reads the baud rate and setting of the parity bit of the serial interface.

The response indicates the new setting (baud rate, parity). Because of this,
communication is no longer possible initially after a change. First change the
PC to the new setting (baud rate).

Use the TDD command with parameter P1 = 1 to save the new setting. Otherwise the
parameter that was valid previously will be used after a reset (RES) command or the next
time after the supply voltage is turned on.

No. of parameters 2

Factory setting 9600

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 227
Parameter P1

Meaning Baud rate

Range/data 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19,200, 38,400, 57,600, 115,200

Number of ASCII characters with 6

serial interface

Data type UINT32 (Unsigned Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2600hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 03hex (hexadecimal)

Class 130

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 3

PROFIBUS Not available

Parameter P2

Meaning Parity bit

0: No parity
Range/data
1: Even parity

Number of ASCII characters with 1

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2600hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 04hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
228 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Class 130

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 4

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 229
BOF (Bus-off Behavior)
Sets or reads the bus-off behavior for CANopen and DeviceNet.
You can use this command to define whether and how long the sensor electronics will
wait to restart after a bus-off (hardware reset).

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Bus-off behavior

0: The sensor electronics remain in bus-off status

1 … 255: The sensor electronics wait for parameter P1 *
Range/data
100 ms after the bus-off status has occurred and then
restart (hardware reset)

Number of ASCII characters with 3

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2600hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Ehex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
230 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Class 130

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 14

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 231
10.20 BRK (Abort Dosing)
Aborts the automatic batching process if the sensor electronics are in dosing mode (IMD
with parameter P1 = 2). Otherwise the response to the command is ?.
All outputs are deactivated and the dosing status is cleared. The command has the same
effect as a signal on input IN1 for all sensor electronics systems up to 3rd
generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C, AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i elec-
tronics and for 4th generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics in com-
patibility mode (IOM command with parameter P1 = 0). For sensor electronics in 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA you can define the function of the digital
inputs yourself with commands IM1 to IM2 (IOM command with parameter P1 = 1).
See also Filler.

Use 0x7FFFFFFF as the parameter to send a command that does not use
parameters via CANopen or DeviceNet.

Notes
If emptying is interrupted, it will not be continued the next time batching starts.
Instead a batching start will be performed.
If emptying is interrupted, it will be continued the next time batching starts.

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
232 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Information about the command

Meaning Batching break

Range/data ‒

Data type ‒

Access W (Write only)

Index 2240hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 01hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 5

Attribute 1

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 28

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 233
10.21 BSY (Busy State)
Reads the busy status.
The bit (bit 0) is set while commands LDW, LFT, LWT, SFA, SZA and TDD are being per-
formed, as these commands last longer. This makes it possible for you to check whether
these commands have reached the end of processing. If an error occurs while one of the
commands is being performed, bit 7 is set in addition.

No. of parameters –

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Information about the command

Meaning Busy status

Bit 0 = 1: Busy
Range/data
Bit 7 = 1: Error

Number of ASCII characters with 3

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2000hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Chex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
234 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 12

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 235
10.22 CBK (Coarse Flow Monitoring)
Sets or reads the value for increase in weight during the coarse flow phase.
This command is used for breakage monitoring during the coarse flow phase (sack break-
age). Enter the increase in the weight you expect per time interval (CBT) for a normal
filling process . After the lockout time for the coarse flow (LTC) elapses, the increase is
checked after every time interval. If the increase in weight is not exceeded, this is inter-
preted as breakage in the container that is being filled and batching is canceled no later
than 1.6 ms after the check. Fill flow monitoring of the coarse flow is deactivated after
the coarse flow cut-off point (CFD) is reached.
For NOV (maximum capacity) with parameter P1 greater than zero, the value is indicated
as a percentage rate. This means that with a maximum capacity of 50,000 and an inter-
val (differential weight) of 6%, the value is 3000.
See also Filler, FBK.
When the filling weight (FWT) is entered, monitoring is automatically deactivated (para-
meter P1 = 0).

The description below referring to the functions of digital outputs applies

only to sensor electronics up to 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C,
AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics and for 4th gen-
eration FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics in compatibility
mode (IOM command with parameter P1 = 0). For sensor electronics in 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA you can define the function of the
digital outputs yourself with commands OM1 to OM6 (IOM command with
parameter P1 = 1).

When a break is detected:

Coarse flow and fine flow are deactivated.
In dosing status (SDO) bit 7 (Alarm) is set to 1.
If bit 1 is set for special monitoring functions (SDF), an alarm is generated.
Output OUT6 is activated for OMD with parameter P1 = 0.
Dosing control goes to stop status.
Then you can use Start to continue the batching process (this leaves out the optim-
ization calculation) or end batching with Break.

Reasons for breakage during coarse flow:

PanelX
236 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 The actual buildup of material is less than the given limit value.
No material is received because the filling stud is clogged.
The lockout time for the coarse flow assessment setting (LTC) is too short and there-
fore material does not arrive until fill flow monitoring is already active
The container is no good or not available.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1
Value for the increase in weight during the coarse flow
Meaning
phase

0: Deactivated
Range/data 1 … 1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise
0 … 160% of NOV

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2210hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 01hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 237
 Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 1

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 75

PanelX
238 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.23 CBT (Coarse Flow Monitoring Time)
Sets or reads the time interval for the increase in weight during coarse flow monitoring.
If you set parameter P1 = 0, a time interval of 100 ms is used. Monitoring starts after the
lockout time for coarse flow (LTC). It is deactivated after the coarse flow cut-off point
(CFD) is reached. The differential weight (CBK) must be greater than zero, otherwise
there will be no check.
See also Filler, Coarse flow.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 239
Parameter P1

Meaning Time interval for coarse flow monitoring

0: The time interval is 100 ms (independently of HSM)

Range/data
1 … 32,767: The time interval is parameter P1 * 10 ms

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2220hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 01hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 1

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 92

PanelX
240 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.24 CD1 (Zeroing Delay 1)
Sets or reads the relief wait time for zero balance during filling.
A digital filter with a fast settling time is used during this time to allow for a faster zero
balance.
See also Zero balance options for filling.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Relief wait time

Range/data 0 … 32,767; the time interval is in ms (milliseconds)

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2220hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Ehex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 241
 Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 14

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
242 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.25 CD2 (Zeroing Delay 2)
Sets or reads the zero value settling time for zero balance during filling.
The original filter is reactivated followed by a wait for settling. This is followed by the
zero balance.
See also Zero balance options for filling.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Zero value settling time

Range/data 0 … 32,767; the time interval is in ms (milliseconds)

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2220hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Fhex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 243
 Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 15

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
244 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.26 CDL (Zeroing)
Transfers the current gross measured value to zero memory if the gross value lies within
the permitted zeroing range. Standstill must be reached in addition in legal-for-trade
mode. The value of zero memory is then subtracted from every measured value. By
default, the setting range is limited to ±2%. With ZSE you can increase the range to ±20%;
from firmware P81 with ZMD to ±100%. As from firmware P80, read out the stored zero
value with CDL?; (also includes the zero value resulting from Zero tracking).
See also Zeroing, ZSE, ZMD.
When a new characteristic curve is entered, zero memory is deleted after the supply
voltage is turned on or with the RES command.

Use 0x7FFFFFFF as the parameter to send a command that does not use
parameters via CANopen or DeviceNet.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Depends on the filter mode (FMD), filter (ASF) and index (P1) of the
output rate (ICR)
Response time FMD0/2/3/4/5: <2ICR * 1.6 ms + 1.6 ms
FMD1 and ASF0: <2ICR * 1.6 ms + 1.6 ms
FMD1: <2ICR * ASF parameter * 1.6 ms + 1.6 ms

Password protection No

Disabled in legal-for- No
trade mode

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)/P80 (electronics
firmware version units with P80 see Firmware overview)

Parameter P1 (optional)

Meaning Zeroing

Range/data -20,000 … +20,000

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 245
 Number of ASCII characters with 9 (8 digits with sign)
serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

From P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview):

Access W (Write only)
From P80: R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2010hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 03hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 3

PROFIBUS Not available

Examples

Command S05; Select the device with address 5.

Command CDL; Zero.

Response 0crlf Zeroing successful.

Starting with firmware version P80 you can also read out the zero value.

Command S05; Select the device with address 5.

Command CDL?; Read out zero value.

Response 127crlf The zero value is 127, taking into consideration the number of places
after the decimal and the unit. With two places after the decimal and
kg as the unit, the resulting zero value is 1.27 kg.

PanelX
246 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.27 CDT (Zeroing Delay)
Sets or reads the delay time for the zero balance if the trigger function is active (IMD with
parameter P1 = 1 and TRC with parameter P1 = 1).
This function is suitable for weighing processes when the scale is unloaded between
weighing operations. Note that the zero setting range is restricted in legal-for-trade
mode.
See also Zero balance after a time delay.

Make certain the scaleis unloaded after the delay time elapses.

Working method:
After initiating a trigger result (level or external triggering) the preset delay time
begins.
Once this delay time has expired, zero balance is performed if the gross measured
value lies within the range of zero setting. There is no wait for a standstill!

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Zero balance after a time delay

0: Off
Range/data
1 … 32,767: The delay time is parameter P1 * 10 ms

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 247
 Number of ASCII characters with 5
serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2010hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Bhex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 11

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 170

PanelX
248 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.28 CFD (Coarse Flow Disconnect)
Sets or reads the coarse flow cut-off point. The coarse flow cut-off point must not be
higher than the fine flow cut-off point (FFD).
See also Filler.
When the filling weight is entered (FWT), the coarse flow cut-off point is automatically
set to 50% of the filling weight. If optimization is activated (OSN command with para-
meter P1 > 0), the coarse flow cut-off point is tracked automatically.
Coarse flow cut-off pointmax. = Fine flow cut-off point – Minimum fine flow
(FFM)

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 249
Parameter P1

Meaning Coarse flow cut-off point

Range/data 0 … 1,200,000

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2210hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 02hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 2

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 71

PanelX
250 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.29 CFT (Coarse Flow Time)
Reads out the coarse flow duration.
The duration of the coarse flow is recorded for each batching process (query with
CFT?;). Recording of time starts when coarse flow is turned on and ends when it is
turned off. Therefore it also includes the lockout time for the coarse flow (LTC). With
each new ready signal the current duration is set as the duration for the next process.
See also Filler.

Notes
The coarse flow duration is not updated if batching has been interrupted with a
break (BRK) or an error.
Commands CSN (clear dosing result) and RES (reset) clear the coarse flow duration.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 251
Parameter P1

Meaning Coarse flow duration

0 … 32,767: The coarse flow duration is parameter P1 *

Range/data
10 ms

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2230hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 01hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 1

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 58

PanelX
252 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.30 COF (Configure Output Format)
Sets or reads the output format for measurement output for commands MSV?, MAV? and
FRS?.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 9

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Output format

Range/data 0 … 143, see tables for formats

Number of ASCII characters with 3

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2600hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 07hex (hexadecimal)

Class 130

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 7

PROFIBUS Not available

Different groups of formats are available for you for output:

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 253
 COF0 … 15: Standard formats
COF16 … 31: Formats for bus mode
COF32 … 47: Formats without crlf end detection
COF64 … 79: Formats for 2-wire bus mode
COF128 … 143: Formats for continuous output
The same identifiers apply in every group. To distinguish the group you will need add 16,
32, 64 or 128 respectively to the standard formats.

Output speed of measured values

The maximum output rate of the sensor electronics is 1200 measured values per second.
The data transfer rate (BDR), depends on the baud rate (BDR), the measurement data out-
put format (COF), the set output rate (HSM, ICR) and the filter mode (FMD, ASF).
You can use the tables below to estimate the achievable speed at a given baud rate for
different formats.

Table for FMD with parameter P1 = 0, HSM with parameter P1 = 0 and for command
MSV?0 (continuous output):

ICR
Measured val- COF0, COF2, COF9,
With COF1 COF3 COF15
ues/s COF4 COF6 COF13
P1 =

600 0 38400 19200 — 115000 — —

300 1 19200 9600 115000 38400 115000 —

150 2 9600 4800 38400 19200 38400 115000

75 3 4800 2400 19200 9600 19200 38400

37 4 2400 1200 9600 4800 9600 19200

18 5 1200 1200 4800 2400 4800 9600

9 6 1200 1200 2400 1200 2400 4800

4 7 1200 1200 1200 1200 1200 2400

COF0/COF4: 4 characters, binary format

COF2/COF6: 2 characters, binary format
COF1: 13 characters, ASCII format, measured value + address
COF3: 10 characters, ASCII format, measured value

PanelX
254 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
COF9: 17 characters, ASCII format, measured value + address + status
COF13: 29/30 characters, ASCII format, measured value with additional information
COF15: 40/41 characters, ASCII format, measured value with additional information

Table for FMD with parameter P1 = 0, HSM with parameter P1 = 0 and for command
MSV?1 (output individual measured values):

ICR
Measured values/s COF0, COF4
With P1 =

600 0 115000

300 1 38400

150 2 19200

75 3 9600

37 4 4800

18 5 2400

9 6 1200

4 7 1200

COF0/COF4: 6 characters, binary format

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 255
10.30.1 Standard formats COF0 … COF15
Standard formats are divided into three groups.

1. Binary formats

Length of the out-

P1 Sequence Output
put

000 4 bytes MSB … LSB Measured value, no status (LSB = 0)

002 2 bytes MSB … LSB Measured value

004 4 bytes LSB … MSB Measured value, no status (LSB = 0)

006 2 bytes LSB … MSB Measured value

008 4 bytes MSB … LSB Measured value and status/checksum (CSM) in

LSB

012 4 bytes LSB … MSB Measured value and status/checksum in LSB

MSB = most significant bit, LSB = least significant bit

With measurement output in binary format, the binary codes for cr and lf may
occur within the bytes for the measured value. Therefore you should not test
the content for these characters to find the end of the transmission. Be
guided exclusively by the number of characters received.
The end identifier crlf is only appended to the measured value in binary out-
put if you retrieve a single measured value with MSV?;. For MSV? with para-
meter P1 > 1, the end identifier is only appended to the last measured value.
MSV?0; (continuous output) never has an end identifier.

2. ASCII formats
In ASCII output, a separator is placed between the individual items of information. You
can define the separator yourself with the TEX command. Depending on parameter P1 in
TEX, the last item of information is followed by either crlf (2 characters) or the selected
separator (1 character).
In single measured value output with MSV?, crlf is always the end identifier. In multiple
output, e.g. with MSV?10, crlf is also appended as the end identifier after the last meas-

PanelX
256 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
ured value, and either crlf or the separator specified with TEX is outputted between the
values.

Length of the out-

P1 Output sequence1)
put

001 12/13 characters Measured value (8), separator (1), address (2), end identifier (1/2)

003 9/10 characters Measured value (8), end identifier (1/2)

005 12/13 characters Measured value (8), separator (1), address (2), end identifier (1/2)

007 9/10 characters Measured value (8), end identifier (1/2)

009 16/17 characters Measured value (8) separator (1) address (2) separator (1) status
(3) (1/2)

011 13/14 characters Measured value (8), separator (1), status (3), end identifier (1/2)

1) The numbers in brackets represent the number of characters transferred.

3. Special formats
These formats are suitable for legal-for-trade applications.

Output of the trigger result (MAV?) or dosing result (FRS?) is always in the
unit (ENU) .

P1 = 13 (COF13)

Character Output Explanation

1 G/N/E G = gross (TAS1), N = net (TAS0), E = error status

2 _/1/2 Space character for single-range balance (MRA0); 1 = range 1,

2 = range 2 for dual-range balance (MRA with parameter P1 >
0)

3 _/o Space character or true zero for gross or net

4 Separator Separator as set with the TEX command

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 257
 Character Output Explanation

5 … 13 xxxx.xxxx/ Measured value in 9 characters including the decimal point

_________/ (DPT),
--------- 9 x _ in case of underflow (gross or net value too small),
9 x - in case of overflow (gross or net value too large),

14 Separator Separator as set with the TEX command

15 … 18 yyyy No standstill: 4 spaces

At standstill: 4 characters with the unit defined by the ENU com-
mand

19 T Separator as set with the TEX command

20 … 28 zzzz.zzzz Tara value (TAV) in 9 characters including decimal point (DPT)

29, 30 Separator/crlf Separator or crlf

P1 = 15 (COF15)

Character Output Explanation

1 G/N/E G = gross (TAS1), N = net (TAS0), E = error status

2 _/1/2 Space character for single-range balance (MRA0); 1 = range 1,

2 = range 2 for dual-range balance (MRA with parameter P1 >
0)

3 _/o Space character or true zero for gross or net

4 Separator Separator as set with the TEX command

5 … 13 xxxx.xxxx/ Measured value in 9 characters including the decimal point

_________/ (DPT),
--------- 9 x _ in case of underflow (gross or net value too small),
9 x - in case of overflow (gross or net value too large),

14 Separator Separator as set with the TEX command

15 … 18 yyyy No standstill: 4 spaces

At standstill: 4 characters with the unit defined by the ENU com-
mand

19 T Separator as set with the TEX command

PanelX
258 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Character Output Explanation

20 … 28 zzzz.zzzz Tara value (TAV) in 9 characters including decimal point (DPT)

29 Separator Separator as set with the TEX command

30 … 36 bbbbbbb Serial number of the sensor electronics (see also IDN, SNR), 7
characters

37 Separator Separator as set with the TEX command

38 … 39 aa Address of the sensor electronics (ADR) in 2 characters

40, 41 Separator/crlf Separator or crlf

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 259
10.30.2 Formats COF16 … COF31 for bus mode
Add 16 to the standard formats to obtain the relevant parameter for bus mode.
Then the sensor electronics switch to bus output mode: Each measured value is initially
saved only in the output buffer. Output does not occur until you select the relevant
sensor electronics with the S command.

Example

Command S98; Broadcast, selects all bus nodes.

Command COF18; Output as 2-byte binary value.

Command ICR0; Set highest sampling rate.

Command MSV?0; Start continuous measurement.

Command S01; Start output of the sensor electronics value with address
1.

Response 2-byte measured Load value (no crlf is set with MSV?0).
value

Command S02; Start output of the sensor electronics value with address
2.

Response 2-byte measured Load value.

value

… … …

Command STP; Terminate output.

PanelX
260 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.30.3 Formats COF32 … COF47 without end label crlf
Add 32 to the standard formats to obtain the relevant parameter for output without end
label crlf.

The end label crlf is omitted in the binary output formats.

The sensor electronics switch to bus output mode with these parameters: Each meas-
ured value is initially saved only in the output buffer. Output does not occur until you
select the relevant sensor electronics with the S command.
See also Formats COF16 … COF31 for bus mode.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 261
10.30.4 Formats COF64 … COF79 for 2-wire bus mode
Add 32 to the standard formats to obtain the relevant parameter for output in 2-wire bus
mode.
Do not use the MSV?0 (continuous measurement) in this mode, otherwise it
will no longer be possible to stop the measurement.

In this mode the sensor electronics do not respond to commands with 0 crlf or ?
crlf. A response with the corresponding, for example ASF03 crlf, is given only for
queries, such as ASF?.

PanelX
262 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.30.5 Formats COF128 … COF143 for continuous output
Add 128 to the standard formats to obtain the relevant parameter for continuous output
after a reset (RES command) or turning on the supply voltage again.
In this mode the sensor electronics send their measured values without requiring the
MSV? command. Terminate sending with the STP command.
If a trigger is active (TRC command with parameter P1 = 1) the trigger result
is sent after triggering.

Example

Command FMD2;ICR7; Sets the sensor electronics to an IIR low-pass filter and 4 meas-
ured values per second.

Command COF130; Sets the sensor electronics to output of 2-byte binary values and
continuous output.

Command TDD1; Save settings.

Command RES; Reset sensor electronics. Output starts after reset. The meas-
ured values are spaced in time about every 250 ms.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 263
10.31 CPV (Clear Peak Values)
Clears the peak value memories (minimum and maximum).
See also Peak values, PVS, PVA.

Use 0x7FFFFF as the parameter to send a command that does not use a para-
meter via CANopen or DeviceNet.
After the supply voltage is turned on again, peak values can also be cleared
with the RES command.

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Information about the command

Meaning Clear peak value memory

Range/data ‒

Data type ‒

Access W (Write only)

CANopen Not available

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 1

PanelX
264 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 52

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 265
10.32 CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check)
Sets or reads a value, for example a checksum for all parameters. This makes it possible
for you to have the controller or PLC calculate a checksum for the relevant parameters
and save them with CRC. Then you can detect any change in these parameters. To pre-
vent changes by third parties, define both the method of calculation as well as the para-
meters involved so they cannot be guessed.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) Yes

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode Yes

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Save/read checksum

Range/data -8,388,607 … 8,388,607

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2300hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 01hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
266 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Class 103

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 1

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 122

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 267
10.33 CSM (Checksum)
Activates or deactivates generating of a checksum in the measured value status for the
MSV command. The measured value status is only sent if you use the COF command
with parameter P1 = 8, 9, 11 or 12 or these values plus 16, 32, 64 or 128. You can use the
checksum to detect transmission errors with 4-byte output.

The command has no effect on the type of measured value status (sim-
ple/extended) when using CANopen. The output is always16-bit.
See also Measured value status, MAV, FRS.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
268 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P1

Meaning Activates/deactivates checksum for measured value

Range/data 0…2

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2600hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 08hex (hexadecimal)

Class 130

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 8

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 15

Meaning of values for P1

P1 Explanation

0 Checksum calculation is turned off and the measured value status is sent as is (sensor
electronics up to and including 2nd generation PW18i, AD101B, AD103B, AD104, AD105,
some FIT electronics and C16i).

1 A checksum is calculated for each measured value and is sent instead of the measured
value status.

2 Checksum calculation is turned off and the extended measured value status is sent (3rd
generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C, AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i
electronics and newer sensor electronics). This setting also affects the ESR command.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 269
10.34 CSN (Clear Dosing Results)
Clears dosing results. This sets the dosing counter NDS, cumulative weight memory
SUM, mean value (SDM) and standard deviation (SDS) of the dosing results as well as
the measured times (DST, CFT and FFT) to 0.
See also Filler.

Use 0x7FFFFFFF as the parameter to send a command that does not use
parameters via CANopen or DeviceNet.

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Information about the command

Meaning Clear dosing results

Range/data ‒

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access W (Write only)

Index 2230hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 02hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
270 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 2

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 21

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 271
10.35 CTO (Zeroing Tolerance)
Sets or reads the limit for automatic zero balance during filling (zero balance tolerance).
Zero balance is only performed if the current measured value is below this limit or if you
set parameter P1 = 0.
See also Zero balance options for filling.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

PanelX
272 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P1

Meaning Limit for automatic zero balance

0: Always zero
1: 10 digits in the unit of the selected weight
2: 20 digits in the unit of the selected weight
Range/data
3: 50 digits in the unit of the selected weight
4: 100 digits in the unit of the selected weight
5: 250 digits in the unit of the selected weight

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2210hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Chex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 12

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 273
10.36 CTR (Clear Trigger Results)
Clears the trigger results. This causes the counter for the number of trigger results (TRN),
the trigger value (MAV) and memory for the mean value (TRM) and the standard devi-
ation (TRS) of the trigger results to 0.
See also Trigger.

Use 0x7FFFFFFF as the parameter to send a command that does not use
parameters via CANopen or DeviceNet.

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Information about the command

Meaning Clearing trigger results

Range/data ‒

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access W (Write only)

Index 2020hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 02hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
274 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 2

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 119

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 275
10.37 CWT (Calibration Weight)
Sets or reads the calibration weight for a partial range calibration. The value is given as a
percentage of the nominal load (maximum capacity), where 100% corresponds to the
value 1,000,000. So for a nominal load of 50 kg and a calibration weight of 30 kg (60%)
enter 600,000. Set the nominal load with NOV.
See also Partial range calibration when calibrating with direct load, COF, DPT, LDW.

No. of parameters 2

Factory setting 1,000,000

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) Yes

Disabled in Legal-For-Trade mode Yes

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Calibration weight for calibration in a partial load range

Range/data Percentage of partial load * 10,000

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2110hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 01hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
276 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Class 101

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 1

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 34

Parameter P2
Calibration weight of the partial range calibration most
Meaning
recently performed

Range/data Percentage of partial load * 10,000

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2110hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 02hex (hexadecimal)

Class 101

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 2

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 277
10.38 DGA (Diagnostic Activation)
Sets or reads activation of the diagnostic function. All entries for diagnostic functions are
disabled as long as you have not activated diagnostics with this command.
See also DGL, DGN, DGR, DGS.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in Legal-For-Trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Diagnostic function activated/deactivated

0: Diagnostic function deactivated

Range/data
1: Diagnostic function activated

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2700hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 01hex (hexadecimal)

Class 140

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 1

PanelX
278 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 130

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 279
10.39 DGL (Diagnostic Trigger Level)
Sets or reads the trigger level for diagnostics. You must use the parameter P1 with val-
ues between 9 and 12 for the DGS command for the function to be active. The trigger
level will not be considered for any other values.
See also DGA.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Diagnostic Trigger Level

Range/data -8,388,607 … 8,388,607

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2700hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 04hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
280 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Class 140

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 4

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 132

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 281
10.40 DGN (Diagnostic Number)
Sets or reads the number of (filtered) measured values to be stored in diagnostic
memory.
The currently gross or net measured value and the status (8 bits) in COF format with para-
meter P1 = 8 are recorded (measured value and status/checksum (CSM) in LSB).
See also DGA.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for- No
trade mode

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)/P80 (electronics
firmware version units with P80 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
282 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P1

Meaning Number of measured values in diagnostic memory

0: 64 values
1: 128 values
2: 256 values
3: 512 values
Range/data From firmware P80:
4: 1024 values
5: 2048 values
6: 4096 values
7: 8192 values

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2700hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 02hex (hexadecimal)

Class 140

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 2

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 131

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 283
10.41 DGP (Diagnostic Buffer Pointer)
Sets or reads the pointer (index) to the data in the diagnostic memory. A subsequent
command DGR reads the values as from this index; the command DWR writes starting
from it.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in Legal-For-Trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Pointer/index to data in diagnostic memory

Range/data 0 … 8191

Number of ASCII characters with 4

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2700hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 06hex (hexadecimal)

Class 140
DeviceNet
Instance 1

PanelX
284 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Attribute 6

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 285
10.42 DGR (Diagnostic Read)
Reads the specified value from diagnostic memory. The diagnostic status must be zero
(query with DGS?), otherwise you will not be able to read any values.
The measured value and the status are sent in binary format as for COF8 (MSB … LSB).
Including the end identifier (crlf), a total of 6 bytes are therefore sent for each measured
value. The status contains the same information as for the MSV? command.

Default values are written to diagnostic memory before the start (-8,388,608
= 800000hex (hexadecimal)). You should therefore check the values when
reading them in and discard measured values with this value. This can occur
for example with a post-trigger if a trigger event has already ended imme-
diately after the start of the save process before the selected number of
measured values has been read.

Recording begins with address 0 and ends (except in the case of a post-trigger) with the
address for the number of values - 1 (see DGN). The time interval at which the measured
values are spaced depends on the settings for HSM, ICR and ASF.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Position of the diagnostic value to be read out

Range/data 0 … 8191

PanelX
286 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Number of ASCII characters with 4 (format COF8)
serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2700hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 07hex (hexadecimal)

Class 140

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 7

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 134

Intervals for measured values in ms in relation to ASF and HSM

ASF HSM with P1 = 0 HSM with P1 = 1

0, 1 1000 * 2 * ICR / 600 1000 * ICR / 600

2 2000 * 2 * ICR / 600 2000 * ICR / 600

3 3000 * 2 * ICR / 600 3000 * ICR / 600

4 4000 * 2 * ICR / 600 4000 * ICR / 600

5 5000 * 2 * ICR / 600 5000 * ICR / 600

6 6000 * 2 * ICR / 600 6000 * ICR / 600

7 7000 * 2 * ICR / 600 7000 * ICR / 600

8 8000 * 2 * ICR / 600 8000 * ICR / 600

9 9000 * 2 * ICR / 600 9000 * ICR / 600

Use the set output rate as the number for this calculation in this command instead of
ICR.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 287
10.43 DGS (Diagnostic Start And Status)
This command sets conditions for the start of recording to diagnostic memory. Depend-
ing on the parameter, recording is also started. When you read the parameter, the status
of recording or the selected recording condition is returned.

First turn on the diagnostic function (DGA) and specify the parameter for
recording before the start: DGL, DGN.
The data rate depends on the selected filter setting and output rate, see HSM,
FMD, ASF, ICR.

Read out the acquired values with DGR.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1
Set the start of recording or recording parameters or
Meaning
read the status or recording parameters

Range/data 0 … 13

Number of ASCII characters with 2

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

PanelX
288 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Index 2700hex (hexadecimal)
CANopen
Subindex 03hex (hexadecimal)

Class 140

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 3

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 133

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 289
Meaning of values for P1

Working
P1 Function Explanation
method

0 None ‒ Function deactivated

1 Pre-trigger Start recording Starting with the next measured value, all the values
immediately will be stored in the diagnostic memory until the selec-
ted number (DGN) has been reached

2 Pre-trigger Start recording If you have activated the trigger function (TRC), then
at the next trig- starting with the next trigger event, all the measured
ger function trig- values will be stored in the diagnostic memory until the
ger event selected number (DGN) has been reached.

3 Post-trig- Start imme- If you have activated the trigger function (TRC), then
ger diately and stop starting with the next measured value, all the values
at the next trig- will be stored in the diagnostic memory until a trigger
ger event in the event stops the recording.
trigger function

4 Pre-trigger Start recording After you have activated this batching function (IMD
from the start of with parameter P1 = 2), starting with the next batch, all
batching (RUN) values will be saved to diagnostic memory until the
or on activation selected number (DGN) has been reached.
via IN2

5 Pre-trigger Start recording After you have activated this batching function (IMD
from the begin- with parameter P1 = 2), starting with the next trigger
ning of coarse event, all measured values will be saved to diagnostic
flow (batching) memory until the selected number (DGN) has been
reached.

6 Pre-trigger Start recording After you have activated this batching function (IMD
from the end of with parameter P1 = 2), starting with the next trigger
coarse flow = event, all measured values will be saved to diagnostic
fine flow (= start memory until the selected number (DGN) has been
fine flow (batch- reached.
ing))

PanelX
290 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Working
P1 Function Explanation
method

7 Pre-trigger Start recording After you have activated this batching function (IMD
from the end of with parameter P1 = 2), starting with the next trigger
fine flow = resid- event, all measured values will be saved to diagnostic
ual flow (= start memory until the selected number (DGN) has been
residual flow reached.
(batching))

8 Pre-trigger Start recording After you have activated this batching function (IMD
from the begin- with parameter P1 = 2), starting with the next trigger
ning of emptying event, all measured values will be saved to diagnostic
(batching) memory until the selected number (DGN) has been
reached.

9 Pre-trigger Start recording If you have activated the trigger function (TRC), then
when trigger starting with the next trigger event, all the measured
level DGL has values will be stored in the diagnostic memory until the
been exceeded selected number (DGN) has been reached.

10 Pre-trigger Start recording If you have activated the trigger function (TRC), then
when the level starting with the next trigger event, all the measured
has fallen below values will be stored in the diagnostic memory until the
trigger level DGL selected number (DGN) has been reached.

11 Post-trig- Start recording If you have activated the trigger function (TRC), then
ger immediately and starting with the next measured value, all the values
stop when trig- will be stored in the diagnostic memory until the trig-
ger level DGL ger event occurs.
has been
exceeded

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 291
 Working
P1 Function Explanation
method

12 Post-trig- Start recording If you have activated the trigger function (TRC), then
ger immediately and starting with the next measured value, all the values
stop when the will be stored in the diagnostic memory until the trig-
level has fallen ger event occurs.
below trigger
level DGL

13 FastFilter Start recording Only possible in filter mode 3 (FMD with parameter P1
trigger when the filter is = 3): Two different filters are actually used in this
switched mode, an “exact” filter and a “fast” one. As soon as the
difference between two measured values exceeds a
certain threshold, the fast filter is applied and record-
ing starts.

PanelX
292 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.44 DL1 (Delay Time 1)
Sets or reads delay time 1 for dosing when using OMD3. It is started after the fine flow
(FFD) is turned off. After DL1 elapses, DL2 starts.
See also Filler.
In the output modes of OMD with parameter P1 <> 3, times DL1 and DL2 are simply wait
times.

The residual flow status bit is already set during delay time 1, see also RFT.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for- No
trade mode

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with P64.3 (electronics units with P64.3 see Firmware overview), P77.8
firmware version (electronics units with P77.8 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 293
Parameter P1

Meaning Delay time 1 for dosing

0: Delay time 1 is deactivated

Range/data
1 … 32,767: Delay time 1 is parameter P1 * 10 ms

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2220hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Bhex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 11

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 127

PanelX
294 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.45 DL2 (Delay Time 2)
Sets or reads delay time 2 for dosing when using OMD3. It is started after DL1 expires. At
the end of delay time 2 the residual flow time (RFT) starts.
See also Filler.
In the output modes of OMD with parameter P1 <> 3, times DL1 and DL2 are simply wait
times.

The description below referring to the functions of digital outputs applies

only to sensor electronics up to 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C,
AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics and for 4th gen-
eration FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics in compatibility
mode (IOM command with parameter P1 = 0). For sensor electronics in 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA you can define the function of the
digital outputs yourself with commands OM1 to OM6 (IOM command with
parameter P1 = 1).

If you have selected the output mode of OMD with parameter P1 = 3, output mode OUT4
is activated while DL2 runs down. Activation is only useful if you set delay time 2 to
greater than zero. Therefore output OUT4 is not activated for DL2 with parameter P1 = 0,
independently of OMD.

The residual flow status bit is already set during delay time 1, see also RFT.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for- No
trade mode

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with P64.3 (electronics units with P64.3 see Firmware overview), P77.8
firmware version (electronics units with P77.8 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 295
Parameter P1

Meaning Delay time 2 for dosing

0: Delay time 2 is deactivated

Range/data
1 … 32,767: Delay time 2 is parameter P1 * 10 ms

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2220hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Chex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 12

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 128

PanelX
296 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.46 DMD (Dosing Mode)
Sets or reads the type of batching: Upward batching, i.e. a container is filled or deduction
batching, i.e. material is removed from a filled container (silo, tank). This command is
only useful in dosing mode (IMD command with P1 = 2).

The descriptions below referring to the functions of digital inputs apply only
to sensor electronics up to 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C,
AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics and for 4th gen-
eration FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics in compatibility
mode (IOM command with parameter P1 = 0). For sensor electronics in 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA you can define the function of the
digital inputs yourself with commands IM1 to IM2 (IOM command with para-
meter P1 = 1).

Deduction weighing involves the following special considerations

The parameter for the empty weight (EWT) has a new function: it determines the min-
imum weight that must be present in the container to start. If the empty weight is zero
(deactivated, EWT with parameter P1 = 0), a start is only executed if the gross value is
greater that the filling weight (FWT).
The general rule is:
gross value – FWT > EWT or gross value – FWT > 0
If this condition is not met, the dosing process does not start as there is insufficient
material available to complete the deduction weighing process. The alarm output is activ-
ated if you have set bit 4 in the SDF in parameter P1.
If the condition is met, the batching process is started with taring. Taring is performed
without additional conditions (taring range: 0 … NOV).
The ready signal is sent after checkweighing.

You can use the emptying function as a delay or wait time: EPT with parameter P1 = 1,
EMD with parameter P1 = 0. In this case you should not connect an emptying valve to the
“Emptying” output.
You can use fill flow monitoring (CBK, FBK) to detect clogging during the coarse and fine
flow times.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 297
Redosing (RDS with parameter P1 = 1)
If batching is interrupted before checkweighing (BRK command or via input IN1) and then
restarted (RUN command or via input IN2), taring does not take place at the start. The
batching process continues from the point at which it was interrupted (coarse flow or
fine flow). The dosing process continues with checkweighing if the net weight at restart
is above the lower tolerance limit (LTL).
If redosing is deactivated (RDS with parameter P1 = 0), each start is judged to be a new
batching process process (starting with taring), regardless of whether the previous batch-
ing process was completed or interrupted.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Batching type

0: Upward batching (filling a container)

Range/data
1: Deduction weighing (removal from a container)

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2200hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 04hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
298 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 4

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 98

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 299
10.47 DPT (Decimal Point)
Sets or reads the number of places after the decimal (position of the decimal point).

This command is only taken into consideration if you are using ASCII meas-
urement output and you have set parameter P1 to 13 or 15 or to those values
plus 32, 64 or 128 for the COF command.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) Yes

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode Yes

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Number of places after the decimal

Range/data 0…6

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2110hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 03hex (hexadecimal)

Class 101

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 3

PanelX
300 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 62

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 301
10.48 DPW (Define Password)
Sets the password for all password-protected settings (password protection = Yes).
See also SPW.
All visible characters are permitted except for quotation marks. The maximum length of
the password is 7 characters.

Password entry is case-sensitive. Password protection is only in effect when

the serial interfaces and PROFIBUS are used.

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting AED

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Information about the command

Meaning Define password

Range/data ‒

Data type ASCII characters, maximum 7 characters

Access W (Write only)

Index 2FFFhex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 04hex (hexadecimal)

DeviceNet Not available

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 100

PanelX
302 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.49 DST (Dosing Time)
Reads the time required for the last batching.
The time required for each batching process is saved. Time recording starts with RUN or
when it is started via a digital input and ends with the ready signal. The previous dosing
time is overwritten.
Dosing time is not updated if batching has been interrupted with a break or an error, etc.
The CSN command or a reset (RES) both clear the dosing time.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 303
Parameter P1

Meaning Time required for the last batching

Range/data 0 … 32,767; the dosing time is parameter P1 * 100 ms

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2230hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 03hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 3

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 105

PanelX
304 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.50 DT1 (Delay Time Output 1)

The description below referring to the functions of digital outputs applies

only to sensor electronics up to 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C,
AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics and for 4th gen-
eration FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics in compatibility
mode (IOM command with parameter P1 = 0). For sensor electronics in 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA you can define the function of the
digital outputs yourself with commands OM1 to OM6 (IOM command with
parameter P1 = 1).

Sets or reads the delay time of digital output OUT1.

The functionality is activated with the LIV1 command with parameter 2 > 2 and para-
meter 3 = 2. After calculation of the trigger result (MAV) delay time DT1 (parameter P1 *
10 ms) starts. When the delay time has elapsed, time AT1 starts. Output OUT1 is active
during this time. If you use parameter P1 = 0 for the AT1 command, the function is deac-
tivated.
The delay can be used for example to drive a sorting unit in order to sort out parts that do
not fall within the required tolerance range.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for- No
trade mode

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with P64.4 (electronics units with P64.4 see Firmware overview), P77.9
firmware version (electronics units with P77.9 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 305
Parameter P1

Meaning Delay time 1

Range/data 0 … 32,767; the delay time is parameter P1 * 10 ms

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 15hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 21

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 176

PanelX
306 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.51 DT2 (Delay Time Output 2)

The description below referring to the functions of digital outputs applies

only to sensor electronics up to 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C,
AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics and for 4th gen-
eration FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics in compatibility
mode (IOM command with parameter P1 = 0). For sensor electronics in 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA you can define the function of the
digital outputs yourself with commands OM1 to OM6 (IOM command with
parameter P1 = 1).

Sets or reads the delay time of digital output OUT2.

The functionality is activated with the LIV2 command with parameter 2 > 2 and para-
meter 3 = 2. After calculation of the trigger result (MAV) delay time DT2 (parameter P1 *
10 ms) starts. When the delay time has elapsed, time AT2 starts. Output OUT2 is active
during this time. If you use parameter P1 = 0 for the AT2 command, the function is deac-
tivated.
The delay can be used for example to drive a sorting unit in order to sort out parts that do
not fall within the required tolerance range.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for- No
trade mode

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with P64.4 (electronics units with P64.4 see Firmware overview), P77.9
firmware version (electronics units with P77.9 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 307
Parameter P1

Meaning Delay time 2

Range/data 0 … 32,767; the delay time is parameter P1 * 10 ms

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 16hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 22

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 177

PanelX
308 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.52 DT3 (Delay Time Output 3)

The description below referring to the functions of digital outputs applies

only to sensor electronics up to 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C,
AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics and for 4th gen-
eration FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics in compatibility
mode (IOM command with parameter P1 = 0). For sensor electronics in 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA you can define the function of the
digital outputs yourself with commands OM1 to OM6 (IOM command with
parameter P1 = 1).

Sets or reads the delay time of digital output OUT3.

The functionality is activated with the LIV3 command with parameter 2 > 2 and para-
meter 3 = 2. After calculation of the trigger result (MAV) delay time DT3 (parameter P1 *
10 ms) starts. When the delay time has elapsed, time AT3 starts. Output OUT3 is active
during this time. If you use parameter P1 = 0 for the AT3 command, the function is deac-
tivated.
The delay can be used for example to drive a sorting unit in order to sort out parts that do
not fall within the required tolerance range.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for- No
trade mode

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with P64.4 (electronics units with P64.4 see Firmware overview), P77.9
firmware version (electronics units with P77.9 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 309
Parameter P1

Meaning Delay time 3

Range/data 0 … 32,767; the delay time is parameter P1 * 10 ms

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 17hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 23

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 178

PanelX
310 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.53 DT4 (Delay Time Output 4)

The description below referring to the functions of digital outputs applies

only to sensor electronics up to 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C,
AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics and for 4th gen-
eration FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics in compatibility
mode (IOM command with parameter P1 = 0). For sensor electronics in 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA you can define the function of the
digital outputs yourself with commands OM1 to OM6 (IOM command with
parameter P1 = 1).

Sets or reads the delay time of digital output OUT4.

The functionality is activated with the LIV4 command with parameter 2 > 2 and para-
meter 3 = 2. After calculation of the trigger result (MAV) delay time DT4 (parameter P1 *
10 ms) starts. When the delay time has elapsed, time AT4 starts Output OUT4 is active
during this time. If you use parameter P1 = 0 for the AT4 command, the function is deac-
tivated.
The delay can be used for example to drive a sorting unit in order to sort out parts that do
not fall within the required tolerance range.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for- No
trade mode

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with P64.4 (electronics units with P64.4 see Firmware overview), P77.9
firmware version (electronics units with P77.9 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 311
Parameter P1

Meaning Delay time 4

Range/data 0 … 32,767; the delay time is parameter P1 * 10 ms

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 18hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 24

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 179

PanelX
312 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.54 DWE (Diagnosis Buffer Enable)
Sets or reads whether measured values are simulated.
See also DWR.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 2

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in Legal-For-Trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Controls the simulation of measured values

0: Simulation deactivated
1: Enables the diagnostic memory for writing via the
Range/data interface (DWR)
2: Starts a simulation cycle. At the end of the cycle, DWE
is reset to 0.

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2450hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 11hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 313
 Class 110

DeviceNet Instance 6

Attribute 17

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
314 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.55 DWR (Write Diagnostic Byte)
Writes a value to the diagnostic memory as soon as writing is enabled with the command
DWE1. The write pointer is automatically increased after writing.
See also DWE.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Write specified value (bytes) to diagnostic memory

Range/data -9,999,999 … 9,999,999

Number of ASCII characters with 10

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access W (Write only)

Index 2450hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 12hex (hexadecimal)

Class 110
DeviceNet
Instance 6

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 315
 Attribute 18

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
316 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.56 DZB (Automatic Zeroing Band)
Sets or reads the size of the range in plus and minus direction around the zero value
within which the values are used for automatic zeroing. The total bandwidth is twice the
range.
See also Automatic zeroing, DZC, DZH, DZM, DZT, ZMD

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) Yes

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode Yes

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P81 (electronics units with P81 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Range in plus and minus direction for automatic zeroing

Range/data 0 … 20,000

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT32 (Unsigned Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2010hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 18hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 317
 Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 24

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
318 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.57 DZC (Automatic Zeroing Count)
Sets or reads the number of values used for automatic zeroing.
See also Automatic zeroing, DZB, DZH, DZM, DZT, ZMD

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) Yes

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode Yes

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P81 (electronics units with P81 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Number of values for automatic zeroing

Range/data 0 … 100,000

Number of ASCII characters with 6

serial interface

Data type UINT32 (Unsigned Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2010hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 19hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 25

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 319
10.58 DZH (Automatic Zeroing Hold-off)
Sets or reads the hold-off time for automatic zeroing. Measured values acquired during
this time before exiting the bandwidth (DZB) or after entering the bandwidth are not
taken into account when calculating the zero value.
See also Automatic zeroing, DZB, DZC, DZM, DZT, ZMD

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 10

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) Yes

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode Yes

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P81 (electronics units with P81 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

Parameter P1
Hold-off time for inclusion of values for automatic zero-
Meaning
ing

Range/data 0 … 1000; Time in ms

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2010hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 17hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
320 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 23

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 321
10.59 DZM (Automatic Zeroing Mode)
Sets or reads the setting for stopping automatic zeroing.
See also Automatic zeroing, DZB, DZC, DZH, DZT, ZMD

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) Yes

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode Yes

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P81 (electronics units with P81 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Method of stopping automatic zeroing

0: Compatibility mode
Range/data 1: Counter control
2: Time control; the time specified by DZT is used

Number of ASCII characters with 1

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2010hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 16hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
322 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 22

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 323
10.60 DZT (Dynamic Zero Tracking/Automatic Zeroing Time)
Sets or reads the settings for Zero tracking or the Automatic zeroing function (available
from firmware P81). Only one of the two functions can be used.
See also CDL, DZB, DZC, DZH, DZM, ZMD, ZSE
The unit d (digit) for parameter P2 relates to the nominal value (NOV).

For NOV with parameter P1 = 0 or P1 > 100,000, the correction is always

made with a setting of 0.5 d/s relative to 100,000 d. For example, if P1 =
1,000,000 the correction is made with 5 d/s.

No. of parameters 2

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) Yes

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode Yes

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

Parameter P1
Time for mean-value calculation during dynamic zero
Meaning
tracking or automatic zeroing

Range/data 0 … 100; time in seconds

Number of ASCII characters with 3

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

PanelX
324 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Index 2010hex (hexadecimal)
CANopen
Subindex 0Ahex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 10

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 160

Parameter P2

Meaning Range for dynamic zero tracking

0: ±1 d
1: ±2 d
Range/data 2: ±5 d
3: ±10 d
4: ±20 d

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2010hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 04hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 4

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 161

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 325
10.61 EMA (Event Mask A)
You can use the EMA and EMB to define event masks to generate an alarm status for the
CANopen and DeviceNet interfaces (send PDO 5) if the defined status or error occurs.
See also Alarm status (event mask)

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Event mask A

Range/data 0 … 4,294,967,296

Number of ASCII characters with 10

serial interface

Data type UINT32 (Unsigned Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2500hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 04hex (hexadecimal)

Class 120
DeviceNet
Instance 1

PanelX
326 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Attribute 5

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 327
10.62 EMB (Event Mask B)
You can use the EMA and EMB to define event masks to generate an alarm status for the
CANopen and DeviceNet interfaces (send PDO 5) if the defined status or error occurs.
See also Alarm status (event mask)

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Event mask B

Range/data 0 … 4,294,967,296

Number of ASCII characters with 10

serial interface

Data type UINT32 (Unsigned Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2500hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 05hex (hexadecimal)

Class 120
DeviceNet
Instance 1

PanelX
328 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Attribute 6

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 329
10.63 EMD (Emptying Mode)
Sets or reads the emptying mode.

The description below referring to the functions of digital outputs applies

only to sensor electronics up to 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C,
AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics and for 4th gen-
eration FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics in compatibility
mode (IOM command with parameter P1 = 0). For sensor electronics in 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA you can define the function of the
digital outputs yourself with commands OM1 to OM6 (IOM command with
parameter P1 = 1).

You can use the emptying time command (EPT with parameter P1 > 0) to activate empty-
ing. Emptying occurs immediately after checkweighing. Then output OUT3 is activated to
control emptying and automatically switches to the gross measurement value. Emptying
is considered complete (OUT3 is deactivated) if the gross value is below the emptying
limit EWT in weight-controlled emptying mode or (in both modes) if the emptying time
(EPT) is exceeded. Time monitoring starts when output OUT3 is activated. If this empty-
ing time is exceeded, output OUT3 is deactivated, regardless of whether or not the
scaleis empty. After emptying finishes, the ready signal is set in the dosing status (SDO).

1. Time-controlled emptying (EMD with parameter P1 = 0)

The emptying time parameter alone determines the period of activation for output
OUT3.
2. Weight-controlled emptying (EMD with parameter P1 = 1)
The parameter EWT is used as the emptying limit. The emptying time EPT is also
used as a maximum duration.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

PanelX
330 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Emptying mode

0: Timer-controlled emptying
Range/data
1: Weight-controlled emptying

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2200hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 05hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 5

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 97

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 331
10.64 ENU (Engineering Unit)
Sets or reads the physical unit.
If you enter fewer than four characters, blanks are added to the input. The unit that is
entered is only appended to the measured value in certain types of output or output
formats (COF command).

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting ""

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) Yes

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode Yes

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Unit

Range/data ‒

Data type Text (ASCII), 4 characters

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2520hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 04hex (hexadecimal)

Class 120

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 4

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 102

PanelX
332 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.65 EPT (Emptying Time)
Sets or reads the emptying time
See also DMD.

The description below referring to the functions of digital outputs applies

only to sensor electronics up to 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C,
AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics and for 4th gen-
eration FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics in compatibility
mode (IOM command with parameter P1 = 0). For sensor electronics in 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA you can define the function of the
digital outputs yourself with commands OM1 to OM6 (IOM command with
parameter P1 = 1).

You can activate an emptying time with parameter P1 > 0. Emptying occurs immediately
after checkweighing. Then output OUT3 is activated to control emptying and auto-
matically switches to the gross measurement value. Emptying is considered complete
(OUT3 is deactivated) if the gross value is below the emptying limit EWT in weight-con-
trolled emptying mode (EMD with parameter P1 = 1) or (in both modes) if the emptying
time (EPT) is exceeded. Time monitoring starts when output OUT3 is activated. If this
emptying time is exceeded, output OUT3 is deactivated, regardless of whether or not the
scaleis empty. After emptying finishes, the ready signal is set in the dosing status (SDO).
If emptying is deactivated, output OUT3 works as a ready signal: It is active after check-
weighing and is not reset until the next start.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 333
Parameter P1

Meaning Emptying time

0: Emptying deactivated
Range/data
1 … 32,767: The emptying time is parameter P1 * 10 ms

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2220hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 02hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 2

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 85

PanelX
334 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.66 ERR (Extended Error Status)
Reads the extended error status.
See also ESR.

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Information about the command

Meaning Extended error status

Range/data See table

Number of ASCII characters with 10

serial interface

Data type UINT32 (Unsigned Integer 32 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2000hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 12hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 18

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 335
Meaning of the status bits

Bit Description

21 System error: Parameter memory faulty

20 Reserved

19 Reserved

18 Fewer than 5 values present for MAV

17 Taring error (TAR)

16 Error during zero tracking, deviation > 2% (ZTR, DZT)

15 Error during zero balance (CDL)

14 Error during zero on start-up (ZSE)

13 Calibration counter overflow (TCR)

12 Calibration time exceeded

11 Reserved

10 Drift tolerance for zero point of factory characteristic curve exceeded

09 Temperature too high

08 Reserved

07 Drift error compared to the last measurement with the LWT command

06 Drift error compared to the last measurement with the LDW command

05 Drift error compared to the last measurement with the SFA command

04 Drift error compared to the last measurement with command SZA

03 There is a new peak value (maximum)

02 There is a new peak value (minimum)

01 A sensor overflow occurred (SOV value changed)

00 An A/D converter overflow (ADU-Overflow) occurred (AOV value changed)

PanelX
336 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.67 ESR (Error Status)
Reads the error status.
See also ERR.
The status corresponds to the error messages defined in the IEC status and is sent as a
3-digit decimal number. Errors that occurred are linked by logical OR (add the individual
value from the tables). The content is influenced by the CSM command.
The status is cleared after the supply voltage is turned on, after a read process or by the
RES command.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

P50 (elec-
tronics with
Available starting with firmware version P50 see
Firmware
overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Status query

Range/data 0 … 255

Number of ASCII characters with 3

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R (Read only)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 337
 Index 2000hex (hexadecimal)
CANopen
Subindex 07hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 7

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 18

Meaning of the values for P1 with simple error status (CSM with parameter P1 = 0 or
P1 = 1)

Bit no. Value Explanation

5 32 0: No error
1: Command error (command not available)

4 16 0: No error
1: Execution error (error on parameter input)

3 8 0: No error
1: Device-dependent error (hardware error, e.g. memory error)

2 4 Not in use

1 2 Not in use

0 1 Not in use

PanelX
338 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Meaning of the values for P1 with extended error status (CSM with parameter P1 =
2)

Bit
Value Explanation
no.

7 128 0: No error
1: Error in the measurement output via UART error (baud rate too slow for the
set sampling rate)

6 64 0: No error
1: Communication error (Break, Parity, CRC)

5 32 0: No error
1: Error in digital outputs (overtemperature, output current too high, etc.)

4 16 0: No error
1: Parameter input error: Parameter outside of the permitted range or
unknown command

3 8 0: No error
1: Error, bridge excitation voltage too low

2 4 0: No error
1: Error in parameter memory

1 2 0: No error
1: A/D converter (ADU) overflow/underflow

0 1 0: No error
1: Gross or net overflow/underflow

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 339
10.68 EWT (Empty Weight)
Sets or reads the empty weight.
The empty weight indicates the weight up to which the scale is defined as being empty,
in other words, the weight up to which taring can occur. If a container has a weight above
this empty weight after the start (RUN container or IN2) empty weight, the container can-
not be tared. Instead it is only filled according to weight with coarse or fine flow.
If the empty weight is zero and taring is set at the start (TMD with parameter P1 > 1),
each weight smaller than the coarse flow cut-off point is tared after the start (CFD).
For NOV (maximum capacity) with parameter P1 greater than zero, the maximum capa-
city is indicated as a percentage rate. This means that with a maximum capacity of
50,000 and an empty weight of 60%, the value is 30,000.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Emptying tolerance

0 … 1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise

Range/data
0 … 160% of NOV

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

PanelX
340 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2210hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 03hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 3

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 79

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 341
10.69 FBK (Fine Flow Monitoring)
Sets or reads the value for increase in weight during the fine flow phase.
This command is used for breakage monitoring during the fine flow phase (sack break-
age). Enter the increase in the weight you expect per time interval (FBT) for a normal
filling process. After the lockout time for the fine flow (LTF), elapses, the increase is
checked after every time interval (FBT). If the increase in weight is not exceeded, this is
interpreted as breakage in the container that is being filled and batching is canceled no
later than 1.6 ms after the check. Fill flow monitoring of the fine flow is deactivated after
the fine flow cut-off point (FFD) is reached.
For NOV (maximum capacity) with parameter P1 greater than zero, the value is indicated
as a percentage rate. This means that with a maximum capacity of 50,000 and an inter-
val (differential weight) of 6%, the value is 3000.
See also Filler, CBK.
When the filling weight (FWT) is entered, monitoring is automatically deactivated (para-
meter P1 = 0).

Choose an increase in weight that is greater than the fluctuations caused by

the material escaping during the filling process.

The description below referring to the functions of digital outputs applies

only to sensor electronics up to 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C,
AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics and for 4th gen-
eration FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics in compatibility
mode (IOM command with parameter P1 = 0). For sensor electronics in 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA you can define the function of the
digital outputs yourself with commands OM1 to OM6 (IOM command with
parameter P1 = 1).

When a break is detected:

Coarse flow and fine flow are deactivated.
Bit 7 (Alarm) is set to 1 in dosing status (SDO).
If bit 1 is set for special monitoring functions (SDF), an alarm is generated.
Output OUT6 is activated for OMD with parameter P1 = 0
Dosing control goes to stop status.

PanelX
342 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Then you can use Start to continue the batching process (this leaves out the optim-
ization calculation) or end batching with Break.

Reasons for breakage during fine flow:

The actual buildup of material is less than the given limit value.
No material is received because the filling stud is clogged.
The lockout time for the fine flow assessment setting (LTF) is too short and there-
fore material does not arrive until fill flow monitoring is already active
The container is no good or not available.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Differential weight for breakage monitoring with fine flow

0: Deactivated
Range/data 1 … 1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise
0 … 160% of NOV

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 343
 Index 2210hex (hexadecimal)
CANopen
Subindex 04hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 4

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 76

PanelX
344 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.70 FBT (Fine Break Time)
Sets or reads the time interval for the increase in weight during fine flow monitoring.
If you set parameter P1 = 0, a time interval of 100 ms is used. Monitoring starts after the
lockout time for fine flow (LTF). It is deactivated after the fine flow cut-off point (FFD) is
reached. The differential weight (FBK) must be greater than zero, otherwise there will be
no check.
See also Filler, Fine flow.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 345
Parameter P1

Meaning Time interval for fine flow monitoring

0: The time interval is 100 ms (independently of HSM)

Range/data
1 … 32,767: The monitoring time is parameter P1 * 10 ms

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2220hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 03hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 3

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 93

PanelX
346 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.71 FFD (Fine Flow Disconnect)
Sets or reads the fine flow cut-off point. When you enter a filling weight (FWT), the fine
flow cut-off point is automatically set to 95% of the filling weight. For NOV (maximum
capacity) with parameter P1 greater than zero, the maximum capacity is indicated as a
percentage rate. This means that with a maximum capacity of 50,000 and a fine flow cut-
off point 60%, the value is 30,000.

You cannot set the fine flow cut-off point to less than the coarse flow cut-off
point. If you try to do this, the coarse flow cut-off point will automatically be
set to the value of the fine flow cut-off point – minimum fine flow (FFM).

If optimization is activated (OSN with parameter P1 > 0), the fine flow cut-off point is
tracked automatically. When the filling weight is entered (FWT), the fine flow cut-off point
is automatically set to 95% of the filling weight.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Fine flow cut-off point

0 … 1,200,000 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise

Range/data
0 … 120% of NOV

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 347
 Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2210hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 05hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 5

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 72

PanelX
348 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.72 FFL (First Fine Flow Time)
Sets or reads the duration for an initial fine flow phase before the coarse flow.

The function is not active with deduction weighing (DMD with parameter P1
= 1).

The fine flow signal is activated for the set time after the start or after taring and before
the coarse flow for the set duration. You can also use this additional fine flow time before
the coarse flow to prevent the coarse flow causing excessive foaming in the liquid being
filled.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 349
Parameter P1

Meaning Duration of fine flow phase before coarse flow

0: The fine flow phase is deactivated

Range/data 1 … 32,767: The fine flow phase continues parameter P1
* 10 ms

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2220hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Ahex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 10

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 95

PanelX
350 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.73 FFM (Fine Feed Minimum)
Sets or reads the minimum fine flow amount.
The minimum fine flow amount determines how close the coarse flow cut-off point can
be taken to the fine flow cut-off point. This means that when the fill material has pieces,
you can set the coarse flow to fine flow interval in such a way that fine flow will run in all
cases. When the fill material has pieces, set the minimum fine flow amount setting to
slightly more than the heaviest piece. For NOV (maximum capacity) with parameter P1
greater than zero, the maximum capacity is indicated as a percentage rate. This means
that with a maximum capacity of 50,000 and a minimum fine flow amount of 6%, the
value is 3000.

To obtain the most consistent dosing result possible, you should set the min-
imum fine flow amount in such a way that the batching process always ends
with fine flow.

The coarse flow cut-off point cannot be set to less than 0, even if you set the minimum
fine flow amount to greater than the fine flow cut-off point (FFD). When the filling weight
is entered (FWT), the minimum fine flow amount is automatically set to 1% of the filling
weight.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 351
Parameter P1

Meaning Minimum fine flow component

0 … 1,200,000 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise

Range/data
0 … 120% of NOV

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2210hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 06hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 6

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 78

PanelX
352 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.74 FFT (Fine Flow Time)
Reads out the fine flow duration.
The duration of the fine flow is recorded for each batching process (query with FFT?;).
Recording of time starts when fine flow is turned on and ends when it is turned off. There-
fore it also includes the lockout time for fine flow (LTF). With each new ready signal the
current duration is set as the duration for the next process.
See also Filler.

Notes
The fine flow duration is not updated if batching has been interrupted with a break
(BRK) or an error.
Commands CSN (clear dosing result) and RES (reset) clear the fine flow duration.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Fine flow duration

0 … 32,767: The fine flow duration is parameter P1 *

Range/data
10 ms

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 353
 Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2230hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 04hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 4

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 59

PanelX
354 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.75 FLO (Flow Rate)
Reads the current flow rate.
You can set the time base for determining the flow rate with the FRT command.

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Information about the command

Meaning Flow rate

Range/data 0 … 1,599,999,999

Number of ASCII characters with 10

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2000hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 14hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 20

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 355
10.76 FMD (Filter Mode)
Sets or reads the filter mode (digital filter).
See also Filter mode.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in Legal-For-Trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

PanelX
356 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P1

Meaning Filter mode

0: Standard filter (IIR 2nd order low-pass filter)

1: 3-stage fast-settling digital filter (FIR low-pass filter)
2: IIR 8th order low-pass filters
3: Fast-settling digital filter (IIR 4th order low-pass filter)
4: Fast-settling digital filter (FIR low-pass filter, settling
time <100 ms); as from P80 plus mean value calculation
Range/data
(MAC) as with P1 = 5
5 (from P77.9): Fast-settling digital filter (FIR low-pass
filter, settling time <250 ms, as with P1 = 4) plus mean
value calculation (MAC); the parameter is no longer
necessary as from P80, and has been retained for com-
patibility reasons.

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2010hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 05hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 5

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 42

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 357
10.77 FNB (Dosing Parameter Set)
Reads the parameter set number of the last batching performed.
See also RDP.

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Information about the command

Parameter set number of the batching most recently per-
Meaning
formed

Range/data 0 … 31

Number of ASCII characters with 2

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2200hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Dhex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 13

PanelX
358 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 106

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 359
10.78 FPT (Time Base Fine Flow Prediction)
Sets or reads the time interval for fill flow prediction. Monitoring detects a change in the
material flow rate based on the most recent filling processes. If the fine flow is stronger
or weaker, the fine flow cut-off point is moved to a lower or higher value so that not too
much or too little material will be added in the residual flow phase.
See also Fine flow.
Specify a longer time interval for the fine flow prediction if brief interference peak may
occur during the filling process.

When fine flow prediction is activated, automatic optimization (OSN) of the

fine flow cut-off point is deactivated.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P78.3 (electronics units with P78.3 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

PanelX
360 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P1

Meaning Time interval for fine flow prediction

0: Fine flow prediction deactivated

Range/data
1 … 32,767: The time interval is parameter P1 * 10 ms

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2220hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Dhex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 13

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 361
10.79 FRS (Filling Result)
Reads the measured value and status of the last batching process.
See also SDO.

No. of parameters 2

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Measured value of the last batching process

Range/data -1,638,399 … 1,638,399

Number and type of characters for Depends on COF

the serial interface

Data type otherwise SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2000hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 05hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 5

PanelX
362 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 22

Parameter P2

Meaning Status of the last batching process

Range/data 0 … 65,535

Number and type of characters for Depends on COF

the serial interface

Data type otherwise UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2000hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 06hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 6

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 22

Meaning of the values for P1 with simple dosing status (CSM with parameter P1 = 0)

Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

7 Alarm dependent on SDF function:

If an alarm bit of the monitor functions is activated, this bit and output OUT4 will be
activated (see also OMD). This bit and OUT4 are reset when
– there is no more overflow,
– the BRK command is sent,
– the digital input for Stop filling is set,
– the next RUN command is sent.

6 Ready signal for batching (FRS can be read out) or emptying active

5 Fine flow active

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 363
 Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

4 Coarse flow active

3 Standstill (MTD)

2 A/D converter (ADU) overflow/underflow

1 Gross overflow (e.g. scaling too sensitive)

0 Net overflow (e.g. tare value too high)

Meaning of the values for P1 with extended dosing status (CSM with parameter P1 =
2)

Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

7 Error, see ESR

6 Alarm output active (SDF)

5 Fill flow active, see also CBK, FBK

4 Emptying active, see also EWT

3 Redosing active, see also RDS

2 Batching ready signal (FRS can be read out)

1 Fine flow active

0 Coarse flow active

PanelX
364 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.80 FRT (Flow Rate Measurement Time)
Sets or reads the time base used to determine the current flow rate.
Reads out the current flow rate via the FLO command.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Time base for determining the current flow rates

Range/data 0 … 65,535; the time base is in ms (milliseconds)

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2000hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 13hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 19

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 365
10.81 FST (Filter Settling Time)
Reads the settling time of the entire filter chain as currently set.
See also TMA.
The low-pass filters FMD and ASF, notch filters NTF and NFA as well as the average filter
MAC are taken into consideration. As the time is indicated in cycles, the value also
depends on the setting for HSM.

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Information about the command

Meaning Settling time of the filter chain in milliseconds

Range/data ‒

Number of ASCII characters with 8

serial interface

Data type UINT32 (Unsigned Integer 32 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2010hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 10hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
366 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 16

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 367
10.82 FTL (Fast Track Level (FMD3))
Sets or reads the threshold for the Fast Track Filter option in filter mode 3. The setting is
made in the user-defined scaling set with NOV. The settling time is also influenced by the
ASF command.
See also Filter cut-off frequency for settling times, Filter mode, FMD.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 20

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1
Level for Fast Track filter option using FMD with para-
Meaning
meter P1 = 3

0: Fast Track filter option deactivated

Range/data
1 … 99,999: Level value

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT32 (Unsigned Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 24C0hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 05hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
368 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Class 110

DeviceNet Instance 13

Attribute 5

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 139

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 369
10.83 FWT (Filling Weight)
Sets or reads the filling weight.
See also Filler.
The filling weight is on the characteristic curve defined with the LDW and LWT com-
mands. It is the target weight for a batching process. The weight is indicated in the unit
defined with ENU if you are using NOV (maximum capacity) with parameter P1 greater
than zero. The value is then indicated as a percentage rate. This means that with a max-
imum capacity of 50,000 and a filling weight of 60%, the value is 30,000.

Entering the filling weight automatically makes the following settings:

Command Meaning Setting

CFD Coarse flow cutoff point 50.0% of the filling weight

CBK Coarse flow fill flow monitoring 0 (= switched off)

FFD Fine flow cutoff point 95.0% of the filling weight

FBK Fine flow fill flow monitoring 0 (= switched off)

FFM Minimum fine flow 1.0% of the filling weight

LTL Lower tolerance limit 99.8% of the filling weight (not with WTX)

UTL Upper tolerance limit 100.2% of the filling weight (not with WTX)

SYD Systematic difference 0 (= switched off)

Therefore do not set these parameters until after the filling weight has been entered.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in Legal-For-Trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

PanelX
370 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P1

Meaning Filling weight (batching setpoint)

Industrial mode: 0 … 1,000,000 for NOV with parameter

P1 = 0, otherwise 0 … 100% of NOV
Range/data
Legal-for-trade mode: 50,000 … 1,000,000 for NOV with
parameter P1 = 0, otherwise 5 … 100% of NOV

Number of ASCII characters with 8

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2210hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 07hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 7

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 70

Example
Containers will be filled on a scale to a maximum weight of 50 kg.

Action Unload the scale.

Command LDW; The initial load is set to 0 kg.

Action Load the scale with 50 kg.

Command LWT; The current measured value is applied. The measured value (MSV?)
for a load of 50 kg and COF with parameter P1 = 3 is 1,000,000 d.

Command NOV5000 This command causes 5000 d to be displayed for a load of 50 kg.

Action Enter the filling weight of your container with FWT. In the Legal-For-
Trade range the entry is limited to values between 250 and 5000 (5 …
100% of NOV). Otherwise all values between 0 and 5000 are allowed

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 371
10.84 GRU (Group Address)

This command only concerns serial interfaces.

Sets or reads a group address. This makes it possible for you to assign multiple sensor
electronics units to a group: Give the same group address to each sensor electronics unit
that will belong to the group. Subsequent selection commands (S) with this (group)
address will initially be received by all sensor electronics units. Only the sensor elec-
tronics units with this group address will perform the command and place the response
in output memory. The sensor electronics unit with the same address and the group
address will respond immediately. The other sensor electronics units in the group will not
transfer the data until requested.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 90

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Group selection

0 … 89: Group address

Range/data
90: Cancel grouping

Number of ASCII characters with 2

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

PanelX
372 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2600hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 9hex (hexadecimal)

Class 130

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 9

PROFIBUS Not available

Example (output of a 2-byte measured values is set with COF2)

Command S01; Select the sensor electronics with address 1.

Command GRU01; Set group address 1.

Command S02; Select the sensor electronics with address 2.

Command GRU01; Set group address 1.

Command S03; Select the sensor electronics with address 3.

Command GRU01; Set group address 1.

Command S01; Select the sensor electronics with address 1; the rest of Group 1
is partially active.

Command MSV? All sensor electronics units in group 1 save the current measured
value in output memory.

Response 2-byte meas- The sensor electronics with address 1 also sends the value imme-
ured value diately as the sensor electronics are active.

Command S02; Select the device with address 2.

Response 2-byte meas- The sensor electronics with address 2 also sends the (saved)
ured value value as there is no group 2.

Command S03; Select the device with address 3.

Response 2-byte meas- The sensor electronics with address 3 also sends the (saved)
ured value value as there is no group 3.

Command S01; Select the device with address 1 (restore initial status).

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 373
10.85 HRN (High Resolution)
Sets or reads the status of 10x resolution.
When 10x resolution is activated the MSV? command causes all measured values to be
sent with the resolution 10 times higher. Entering NOV or LFT with parameter P1 > 0 deac-
tivates 10x resolution.
10x resolution is deactivated after the sensor electronics are turned on or after the RES
command.

You cannot turn on 10x resolution if LFT is set with parameter P1 > 0 (legal-
for-trade mode) or if you are using NOV with parameter P1 = 0 or with para-
meter P1 > 100,000. In this case you receive ?crlf as the response to the
HRN1 command.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) Yes

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode Yes

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
374 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P1

Meaning 10x resolution

0: 10x resolution is deactivated

Range/data
1: 10x resolution is active

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2110hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 04hex (hexadecimal)

Class 101

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 4

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 169

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 375
10.86 HSM (High Speed Mode ADC)
Sets or reads the sample rate of the A/D converter.
This command influences a number of other settings, especially filter behavior (ASF) and
the output rate (ICR).
See also Filters, Filter cut-off frequency, Increased analog-to-digital converter sample
rate.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in Legal-For-Trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Sample rate

0: 600 measured values/s

Range/data
1: 1200 measured values/s

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2110hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 05hex (hexadecimal)

Class 101

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 5

PanelX
376 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 55

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 377
10.87 HWV (Hardware Version)
Reads the hardware version.
See also IDN, NAM, PDT, PZN, SNR, SRV, SWI, SWV.

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting Device-dependent

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in Legal-For-Trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Information about the command

Meaning Hardware version

Range/data ‒

Number of ASCII characters with 10

serial interface

Data type Text (ASCII), 10 characters

Access R (Read only)

Index 2520hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Ahex (hexadecimal)

Class 120

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 15

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
378 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Examples

Command HWV?; Read hardware version.

Response PAD4000 crlf or A total of 10 characters plus end marker (2 char-

FIT5AE crlf or acters) are sent.
FIT7AS crlf depending
on device

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 379
10.88 ICR (Internal Conversion Rate)
Sets or reads the output rate of the measured values. The output rate is the rate at which
measured values are outputted with the MSV? command. The output rate also depends
on the filter settings FMD, ASF, and on HSM.
See also Filters, Filter cut-off frequency, Output rate of measured values, Increased ana-
log-to-digital converter sample rate.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 2

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in Legal-For-Trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Output rate

Range/data 0…7

Number of ASCII characters with 2

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2010hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 06hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
380 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 6

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 44

The following two tables do not apply to electronics with P50 (electronics with P50 see
Firmware overview) and AD105D, for which the output rate is independent of FMD, and
depends only on ICR and HSM - see third table.

Output rates (measured values per second) for filter modes FMD01), FMD2, FMD3,
FMD4 and FMD5 depending on parameter P1 of ICR

P1 Output rate for HSM0 Output rate for HSM1

0 610 1221

1 305 610

2 153 305

3 76 153

4 38 76

5 19 38

6 10 19

7 5 10

1) Notation for the FMD and HSM commands with parameter P1 = x.

Output rates for filter mode FMD1 depending on the filter limit frequency ASF
Always use ICR with parameter P1 = 0 with filter mode FMD1, as the filter is intended for
dynamic measurements. Depending on the set filter limit frequency (command ASF)
there will still be different output rates:

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 381
 ASF Output rate for HSM0 Output rate for HSM1

0 610 1221

1 610 1221

2 305 610

3 204 407

4 153 305

5 122 244

6 102 203

7 87 174

8 77 153

9 68 136

10 61 122

For AD105D and electronics with P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)
the following applies for all FMDx filter modes:

P1 Output rate for HSM0 Output rate for HSM1

0 100 200

1 50 100

2 25 50

3 12 25

4 6 12

5 3 6

6 2 3

7 1 2

PanelX
382 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.89 IDN (Identification)
Reads the identification of the sensor electronics or sets a new type name. The serial
interface returns more information: the manufacturer, type name, serial number, and firm-
ware version. The additional data can only be read however. Newer electronics units (pos-
sible as from P80) also use 10-digit serial numbers. In this case, 10 digits are outputted
on the serial interface as soon as 9,999,999 is exceeded; otherwise 7.
See also HWV, NAM, PDT, PZN, SNR, SRV, SWI, SWV.

Parameter P1

Meaning Identification of sensor electronics

Range/data ‒

Write: Text (ASCII), 15 characters

Data type Read: Text (ASCII), 15 characters; serial interface 31 or
34 characters respectively

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2520hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 01hex (hexadecimal)

Class 120

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 7

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 111

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 383
Example

Command IDN?; Read identification.

Response HBM,AD103C Over the serial interface, the manufacturer (HBM), the
,1234567,P80crlf type name (AD103C plus 9 spaces), the serial number
1) (1234567, here 7 digits; see also SNR) and the firmware
version (P80, always 3 characters) are sent. A total of 31
characters plus end marker (2 characters) are sent.

Command IDN" scale 1"; Set new type name. The entry is padded to 15 characters
with space characters.

1) With CANopen, DeviceNet and PROFIBUS only “AD103C ” is sent, meaning the
type name is AD103C (plus 9 spaces). A total of 15 characters are sent.

PanelX
384 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.90 IM1 (Input Mode Input 1)
Sets or reads the function of digital input 1. To be able to set this function, you must
enable it with the IOM command with parameter P1 = 1.
You can also read out the current status of digital input 1 with the IS1? command.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 385
Parameter P1

Meaning Function of digital input 1

0: No function
1: Tare
2: Trigger 1 (only in trigger mode, see IMD with para-
meter P1 = 1)
3: Trigger 2 (only in trigger mode, see IMD with para-
meter P1 = 1)
Range/data 4: Stop batching (only in dosing mode, see IMD with
parameter P1 = 2)
5: Start batching (only in dosing mode, see IMD with
parameter P1 = 2)
6: Reserved
7: PAD/AD105D/AD112D: Sync Follower, otherwise not
used

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2022hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 01hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 10

Attribute 1

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
386 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.91 IM2 (Input Mode Input 2)
Sets or reads the function of digital input 2. To be able to set this function, you must
enable it with the IOM command with parameter P1 = 1.
You can also read out the current status of digital input 2 with the IS2? command.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 387
Parameter P1

Meaning Function of digital input 2

0: No function
1: Tare
2: Trigger 1 (only in trigger mode, see IMD with para-
meter P1 = 1)
3: Trigger 2 (only in trigger mode, see IMD with para-
meter P1 = 1)
Range/data 4: Stop batching (only in dosing mode, see IMD with
parameter P1 = 2)
5: Start batching (only in dosing mode, see IMD with
parameter P1 = 2)
6: Reserved
7: PAD/AD105D/AD112D: Sync Follower, otherwise not
used

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2022hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 02hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 10

Attribute 2

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
388 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.92 IMD (Input Mode)
Sets or reads the function of the sensor electronics and therefore also the function of the
inputs and outputs.

Command IMD affects the content of the measurement status, see MSV
The descriptions below referring to the functions of digital inputs and out-
puts apply only to sensor electronics up to 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C,
AD105C, AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics and for
4th generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics in com-
patibility mode (IOM command with parameter P1 = 0). For sensor elec-
tronics of 4th generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA, you can define the
function of the digital inputs yourself with the IM1 and IM2 commands, and
the function of the digital outputs with commands OM1 to OM6 (IOM com-
mands with parameter P1 = 1).

Standard mode (scale)

You can also query the states of inputs IN1 and IN2 with the POR command. A change in
the level does not affect the sensor electronics.
Digital outputs OUT1 to OUT4 can be general control outputs or limit value outputs (LIV1
to LIV4, POR).

Trigger mode (checkweigher)

The function of the inputs is set to checkweigher. Input IN1 is the external trigger input
for the trigger function (TRC). Input IN2 is the input for an external tare command (TAR).
The wait time until the tare command is performed depends on which sampling rate is
selected and the filter, see also ASF, FMD, ICR, TAR. A tare command via input IN2 has
the same effect in this mode as the TAR command.
Digital outputs OUT1 to OUT4 can be general control outputs or limit value outputs (LIV1
to LIV4, POR).

Dosing mode
The inputs are set for the filling/batching function, see Filler (Filling). Input IN1 is the
Stop input and input IN2 the Start input for the filling process.
The digital outputs have different output functions depending on the OMD command.
The limit values (LIV1 to LIV4) must be deactivated.
See also DMD (Upward/Downward batching).

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 389
 No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
390 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P1

Meaning Function of digital inputs and outputs

0: Standard mode
Range/data 1: Trigger mode
2: Dosing mode

Number of ASCII characters with 2

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2010hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 07hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 7

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 69

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 391
10.93 IOM (IO Mode)
Sets or reads whether the function of the digital inputs and outputs is freely assignable.
Use the IOM command with parameter P1 = 1 for the 4th generation FIT5A, FIT7A,
PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics if possible. Use P1 = 0 only if the relevant sensor
electronics unit will be operated in compatibility mode. For all other sensor electronics up
to 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C, AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and
C16i electronics, no free assignment is possible.

PW15iA and PAD400x use shared connections for input and output. There-
fore you should only activate the output function using OM1 to OM6 if the
connection is also being used as an output and is connected accordingly.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

PanelX
392 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P1

Meaning IO mode

0: The inputs and outputs are permanently assigned

according to the settings for IMD/OMD
Range/data 1: You can adjust the function of the digital inputs indi-
vidually using commands IM1 and IM2, and the function
of the digital outputs using commands OM1 to OM6

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2021hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 07hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 9

Attribute 7

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 393
10.94 IS1 (Digital Input State Input 1)
Reads the current state of digital input 1.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Status of digital input 1

0: LOW level
Range/data
1: HIGH level

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2020hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 18hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 24

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
394 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.95 IS2 (Digital Input State Input 2)
Reads the current state of digital input 2.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Status of digital input 2

0: LOW level
Range/data
1: HIGH level

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2020hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 19hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 25

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 395
10.96 LDW (Load Cell Dead Weight)
Sets or reads the zero point of the user characteristic curve.
You can have the zero point measured or enter it as a value. During the measurement,
the current input signal ( scale not loaded = initial load) is assigned an output value of 0.
The LDW value is not converted via NOV. The value is not activated until you actually
measure or enter LWT.
See also Balancing a scale.

1. Measure zero point

Unload the scale.
Measure the zero point with the LDW; command.
The sensor electronics measure the input signal (zero load) of the scale and
save the measured value. Activation does not occur until the parameter for LWT
is entered.
Use 0x7FFFFFFF as the parameter to send a command that does not use
parameters via CANopen or DeviceNet.

2. Manual input of the zero point

Enter the zero point of the scale with the LDW<zero point>; command.
The value entered is stored, but only activated after the parameter for LWT is
entered.
Use CWT if you are not balancing via LDW/LWT with 100% of the nominal
maximum capacity. Entering or measuring a factory characteristic curve with
SZA/SFA resets the LDW/LWT user characteristic curve to 0/1,000,000.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

<15 ms for reading or input

Response time
<4.2 s for measurement

Password protection1) Yes

PanelX
396 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Disabled in legal-for-trade mode Yes

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning User characteristic curve zero point

±1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise

Range/data
±NOV

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2110hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 06hex (hexadecimal)

Class 101

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 6

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 35/36

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 397
10.97 LFT (Legal-For-Trade)
Sets or reads the operating mode: legal-for-trade or industrial.

Every change to the status increases the legal-for-trade counter (TCR) by 1.

After switching to legal-for-trade mode, the following commands are disabled for write
access:
CRC, CWT, DPT, ENU, IDN, LDW, LIC, LWT, MRA, MTD, NOV, RSN, SFA, SZA, TDD
with parameter P1 = 0, TRF, ZSE, ZTR
If you send one of these commands with write functionality, the response will be ?crlf.

Switching by hardware switch is also possible for some sensor electronics

units. In these cases the command has no effect if the switch is set to legal-
for-trade.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) Yes

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

PanelX
398 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P1

Meaning Operating mode: legal-for-trade or industrial

0: Industrial mode
1: Legal-for-trade mode for OIML
Range/data 2: Legal-for-trade mode for NTEP
3: Legal-for-trade mode for OIML with manual tare
(entered tare value)1)

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2300hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 02hex (hexadecimal)

Class 103

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 2

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 120

1) Starting with firmware version P81.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 399
10.98 LIC (Linearization Coefficient)
Sets or reads the coefficients of a 3rd order polynomial for linearization of the scale's
characteristic curve.
See also Using linearization.
The user characteristic curve defined with the command pair LDW/LWT is defined by two
points. With this command you can use a 3rd order polynomial to compensate for a less
than ideal linear characteristic curve.
Measured value = K0 + K1 * x + K2 * x2 + K3 * x3
where x = measured value of the A/D converter
Parameters P1 to P4 are multiplied by 10-6 and inserted into the formula: Kx = Px * 10-6.
You must calculate the coefficients yourself with a suitable program based on meas-
urements of the actual characteristic curve. The coefficients are not calculated by the
sensor electronics.

In contrast to the normal notation for commands, you must also enter the
coefficients individually (one after the other) for serial interfaces (see the
example).

No. of parameters 4

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) Yes

Disabled in Legal-For-Trade mode Yes

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

Parameter P1 = 0

Meaning 0.000001 * linearization coefficient K0 (absolute term)

Range/data ±1,599,999

PanelX
400 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)
serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2120hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 01hex (hexadecimal)

Class 101

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 1

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 156

Parameter P1 = 1

Meaning 0.000001 * linearization coefficient K1 (linear term)

Range/data ±1,599,999

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2120hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 02hex (hexadecimal)

Class 101

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 2

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 157

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 401
Parameter P1 = 2

Meaning 0.000001 * linearization coefficient K2 (quadratic term)

Range/data ±1,599,999

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2120hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 03hex (hexadecimal)

Class 101

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 3

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 158

Parameter P1 = 3

Meaning 0.000001 * linearization coefficient K3 (cubic term)

Range/data ±1,599,999

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2120hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 04hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
402 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Class 101

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 4

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 159

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 403
Example

Command LIC0,+10; Set linearization coefficient K0 to +0.000010.

Response 0crlf Entry OK.

Command LIC1,+1000345; Set linearization coefficient K1 to +1.000345.

Response 0crlf Entry OK.

Command LIC2,-345; Set linearization coefficient K2 to -0.000345.

Response 0crlf Entry OK.

Command LIC3,+45; Set linearization coefficient K3 to 0.000045.

Response 0crlf Entry OK.

PanelX
404 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.99 LIV1 (Limit Value 1 Monitoring)
Sets or reads the settings for limit value switch 1.

For compatibility reasons, you must send the LIV?1; command with a
query, not LIV1?; as is otherwise usual.

The limit switch switch can monitor gross or net measured values. The monitoring speed
depends on the filter settings (ASF, FMD) and the set sample rate (HSM). Monitoring is
always implemented, even when there is no communication via one of the interfaces.

The descriptions below referring to the functions of digital outputs apply only
to sensor electronics up to 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C,
AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics and for 4th gen-
eration FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics in compatibility
mode (IOM command with parameter P1 = 0). For sensor electronics in 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA you can define the function of the
digital outputs yourself with commands OM1 to OM6 (IOM command with
parameter P1 = 1).
The settings for P1 > 2 are only executed if you set P2 = 2 and for AT1
(switch-on period of OUT1) parameter P1 has a value greater than zero. In
this case you can also delay switching on of the output with the DT1 com-
mand.

No. of parameters 4

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 405
Parameter P1 (optional)

Meaning Limit value monitoring

0: Monitoring deactivated
1: Limit value in measured value status only; the digital
outputs are not changed
2: Limit value in measured value status and GW1 = OUT1
3: OUT1 active if P3 < measured value < P4 (only if P2 =
Range/data
2)
4: OUT1 not active if P3 < measured value < P4 (only if
P2 = 2)
5: OUT1 active if measured value > P3 (only if P2 = 2)
6: OUT1 active if measured value < P4 (only if P2 = 2)

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 01hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 1

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 50

Parameter P2 (optional)

Meaning Signal source

0: Net measured value

1: Gross measured value
Range/data 2: Trigger result (MAV)
3: Minimum measured value
4: Maximum measured value

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

PanelX
406 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 02hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 2

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 50

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 407
Parameter P3 (optional)
Activation level
P2 = 2: Activates OUT1 or the status bit if measured
Meaning
value > P3
Otherwise: Activation level

±1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise

Range/data
±NOV

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 03hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 3

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 50

PanelX
408 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P4 (optional)
Deactivation level
P2 = 2: Activates OUT1 or the status bit if measured
Meaning
value < P4
Otherwise: Deactivation level

±1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise

Range/data
±NOV

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 04hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 4

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 50

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 409
10.100 LIV2 (Limit Value 2 Monitoring)
Sets or reads the settings for limit value switch 2.

For compatibility reasons, you must send the LIV?2; command with a
query, not LIV2?; as is otherwise usual.

The limit switch switch can monitor gross or net measured values. The monitoring speed
depends on the filter settings (ASF, FMD) and the set sample rate (HSM). Monitoring is
always implemented, even when there is no communication via one of the interfaces.

The descriptions below referring to the functions of digital outputs apply only
to sensor electronics up to 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C,
AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics and for 4th gen-
eration FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics in compatibility
mode (IOM command with parameter P1 = 0). For sensor electronics in 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA you can define the function of the
digital outputs yourself with commands OM1 to OM6 (IOM command with
parameter P1 = 1).
The settings for P1 > 2 are only executed if you set P2 = 2 and for AT2
(switch-on period of OUT2) parameter P1 has a value greater than zero. In
this case you can also delay switching on of the output with the DT2 com-
mand.

No. of parameters 4

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
410 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P1 (optional)

Meaning Limit value monitoring

0: Monitoring deactivated
1: Limit value in measured value status only; the digital
outputs are not changed
2: Limit value in measured value status and W2 = OUT2
3: OUT2 active if P3 < measured value < P4 (only if P2 =
Range/data
2)
4: OUT2 not active if P3 < measured value < P4 (only if
P2 = 2)
5: OUT2 active if measured value > P3 (only if P2 = 2)
6: OUT2 active if measured value < P4 (only if P2 = 2)

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 05hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 5

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 51

Parameter P2 (optional)

Meaning Signal source

0: Net measured value

1: Gross measured value
Range/data 2: Trigger result (MAV)
3: Minimum measured value
4: Maximum measured value

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 411
 Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 06hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 6

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 51

PanelX
412 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P3 (optional)
Activation level
P2 = 2: Activates OUT2 or the status bit if measured
Meaning
value > P3
Otherwise: Activation level

±1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise

Range/data
±NOV

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 07hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 7

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 51

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 413
Parameter P4 (optional)
Deactivation level
P2 = 2: Activates OUT2 or the status bit if measured
Meaning
value < P4
Otherwise: Deactivation level

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

±1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise

Range/data
±NOV

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 08hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 8

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 51

PanelX
414 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.101 LIV3 (Limit Value 3 Monitoring)
Sets or reads the settings for limit value switch 3.

For compatibility reasons, you must send the LIV?3; command with a
query, not LIV3?; as is otherwise usual.

The limit switch switch can monitor gross or net measured values. The monitoring speed
depends on the filter settings (ASF, FMD) and the set sample rate (HSM). Monitoring is
always implemented, even when there is no communication via one of the interfaces.

The descriptions below referring to the functions of digital outputs apply only
to sensor electronics up to 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C,
AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics and for 4th gen-
eration FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics in compatibility
mode (IOM command with parameter P1 = 0). For sensor electronics in 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA you can define the function of the
digital outputs yourself with commands OM1 to OM6 (IOM command with
parameter P1 = 1).
The settings for P1 > 2 are only executed if you set P2 = 2 and for AT3
(switch-on period of OUT3) parameter P1 has a value greater than zero. In
this case you can also delay switching on of the output with the DT3 com-
mand.

No. of parameters 4

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 415
Parameter P1 (optional)

Meaning Limit value monitoring

0: Monitoring deactivated
1: Limit value in measured value status only; the digital
outputs are not changed
2: Limit value in measured value status and GW3 = OUT3
3: OUT3 active if P3 < measured value < P4 (only if P2 =
Range/data
2)
4: OUT3 not active if P3 < measured value < P4 (only if
P2 = 2)
5: OUT3 active if measured value > P3 (only if P2 = 2)
6: OUT3 active if measured value < P4 (only if P2 = 2)

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 09hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 9

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 48

Parameter P2 (optional)

Meaning Signal source

0: Net measured value

1: Gross measured value
Range/data 2: Trigger result (MAV)
3: Minimum measured value
4: Maximum measured value

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

PanelX
416 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Ahex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 10

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 48

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 417
Parameter P3 (optional)
Activation level
P2 = 2: Activates OUT3 or the status bit if measured
Meaning
value > P3
Otherwise: Activation level

±1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise

Range/data
±NOV

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Bhex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 11

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 48

PanelX
418 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P4 (optional)
Deactivation level
P2 = 2: Activates OUT3 or the status bit if measured
Meaning
value < P4
Otherwise: Deactivation level

±1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise

Range/data
±NOV

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Chex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 12

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 48

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 419
10.102 LIV4 (Limit Value 4 Monitoring)
Sets or reads the settings for limit value switch 4.

For compatibility reasons, you must send the LIV?4; command with a
query, not LIV4?; as is otherwise usual.

The limit switch switch can monitor gross or net measured values. The monitoring speed
depends on the filter settings (ASF, FMD) and the set sample rate (HSM). Monitoring is
always implemented, even when there is no communication via one of the interfaces.

The descriptions below referring to the functions of digital outputs apply only
to sensor electronics up to 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C,
AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics and for 4th gen-
eration FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics in compatibility
mode (IOM command with parameter P1 = 0). For sensor electronics in 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA you can define the function of the
digital outputs yourself with commands OM1 to OM6 (IOM command with
parameter P1 = 1).
The settings for P1 > 2 are only executed if you set P2 = 2 and for AT4
(switch-on period of OUT4) parameter P1 has a value greater than zero. In
this case you can also delay switching on of the output with the DT4 com-
mand.

No. of parameters 4

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
420 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P1 (optional)

Meaning Limit value monitoring

0: Monitoring deactivated
1: Limit value in measured value status only; the digital
outputs are not changed
2: Limit value in measured value status and GW4 = OUT4
3: OUT4 active if P3 < measured value < P4 (only if P2 =
Range/data
2)
4: OUT4 not active if P3 < measured value < P4 (only if
P2 = 2)
5: OUT4 active if measured value > P3 (only if P2 = 2)
6: OUT4 active if measured value < P4 (only if P2 = 2)

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Dhex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 13

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 49

Parameter P2 (optional)

Meaning Signal source

0: Net measured value

1: Gross measured value
Range/data 2: Trigger result (MAV)
3: Minimum measured value
4: Maximum measured value

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 421
 Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Ehex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 14

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 49

PanelX
422 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P3 (optional)
Activation level
P2 = 2: Activates OUT4 or the status bit if measured
Meaning
value > P3
Otherwise: Activation level

±1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise

Range/data
±NOV

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Fhex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 15

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 49

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 423
Parameter P4 (optional)
Deactivation level
P2 = 2: Activates OUT4 or the status bit if measured
Meaning
value < P4
Otherwise: Deactivation level

±1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise

Range/data
±NOV

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 10hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 16

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 49

PanelX
424 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.103 LTC (Lockout Time Coarse Flow)
Sets or reads the lockout time for coarse flow. Once coarse flow is activated, comparison
of the actual weight for reaching the coarse flow cut-off point is disabled for the spe-
cified duration. The time does not delay the filling process.
Especially when the fill material has pieces, it may happen that the first pieces that fall in
the container after coarse flow has started will generate peak loads that will already
cause the coarse flow cut-off point to be exceeded. You can prevent that with this set-
ting. Based on experience, the lockout time should be about 10 % of the coarse flow dos-
ing time. If you are using monitoring of the fill flow limit value (CBK), the time must be
long enough for material to reach the container within the lockout time.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 425
Parameter P1

Meaning Lockout time for coarse flow

Range/data 0 … 32,767. The lockout time is parameter P1 * 10 ms

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2220hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 04hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 4

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 81

PanelX
426 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.104 LTF (Lockout Time Fine)
Sets or reads the lockout time for fine flow. The time starts when the coarse flow cut-off
point is reached. Comparison of the actual weight for reaching the fine flow cut-off point
is disabled for the specified duration. The time does not delay the filling process.
When the coarse flow shuts off, settling processes may occur that will already cause the
coarse flow cut-off point to be exceeded. You can prevent that with this setting. Based
on experience, the lockout time should be about 10 % of the fine flow dosing time.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 427
Parameter P1

Meaning Lockout time for fine flow

Range/data 0 … 32,767; the activation time is parameter P1 * 10 ms

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2220hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 05hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 5

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 82

PanelX
428 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.105 LTL (Lower Tolerance Limit)
Sets or reads the lower tolerance limit for the dosing result.

The description below referring to the functions of digital outputs applies

only to sensor electronics up to 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C,
AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics and for 4th gen-
eration FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics in compatibility
mode (IOM command with parameter P1 = 0). For sensor electronics in 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA you can define the function of the
digital outputs yourself with commands OM1 to OM6 (IOM command with
parameter P1 = 1).

If the dosing result (FRS) falls below the tolerance limit, the status “Tolerance limit under-
shot“ (bit 6) is set in the dosing status (SDO). The status is cleared with the next start. If
you have set parameter P1 = 0 for OMD, output OUT5 is also active.
When the filling weight is entered (FWT), the lower tolerance limit is automatically set to
99.8% of the filling weight (not with WTX).

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Lower tolerance limit for dosing result

0 … 1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise

Range/data
0 … 160% of NOV

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 429
 Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)
serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2210hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 08hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 8

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 73

PanelX
430 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.106 LWT (Load Cell Weight)
Sets or reads the nominal weight of the user characteristic curve.
You can have the nominal weight measured or enter it as a value. During the meas-
urement, the current input signal ( scale loaded = maximum capacity) is assigned an out-
put value of 1,000,000. The LWT value is not converted via NOV. The value is not
activated until you actually measure or enter LDW.
See also Balancing a scale.

1. Measuring a nominal weight

Load the scale with the maximum capacity.
Measure the nominal weight with the LWT; command.
The sensor electronics measure the input signal (maximum capacity) of the
scale and save the measured value. However, activation does not occur until you
have actually entered or measured LDW.
Use 0x7FFFFFFF as the parameter to send a command that does not use
parameters via CANopen or DeviceNet.

2. Manual input of the nominal weight

Enter the nominal weight of the scale with the LDW<nominal weight>; command.
The value entered is stored, but only activated after the parameter for LDW is
entered.
Use CWT if you are not balancing via LDW/LWT with 100% of the nominal
maximum capacity. Entering or measuring a factory characteristic curve with
SZA/SFA resets the LDW/LWT user characteristic curve to 0/1,000,000.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 1000000

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) Yes

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode Yes

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 431
 Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Nominal weight balancing

±1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise

Range/data
±NOV

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2110hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 07hex (hexadecimal)

Class 101

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 7

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 37/38

PanelX
432 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.107 MAC (Moving Average Filter for FMD5)
Sets or reads the number of values used by the average filter when filter mode FMD is
active with parameter P1 = 5. The function is available as from P64.4 (electronics units
with P64.4 see Firmware overview).
As from P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware overview), the function is available
in all FMD filter modes.
See Average filter for filter mode 5, ADF, NTF.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in Legal-For- No
Trade mode

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with P64.4 (electronics units with P64.4 see Firmware overview), P77.9
firmware version (electronics units with P77.9 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 433
Parameter P1

Meaning Number of values for the moving average

0 … 99
Range/data
From P64.4/P77.9: 0 … 199

Number of ASCII characters with 2 characters for 0 … 99; from P64.4/P77.9: 3

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2010hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Chex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 12

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 129

PanelX
434 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.108 MAV (Measured Alternative Data)
Reads the measured value (trigger result) and status of the trigger function.
The measured value is only sent once. It is set after the query for the overflow value
(ASCII = -1,638,400).

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Trigger result

±1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise

Range/data
±NOV

Number and type of characters for Depends on COF

the serial interface

Data type otherwise SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2000hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 03hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 3

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 435
 Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 16

Parameter P2

Meaning Status of the trigger function

Range/data 0 … 65,536

Number and type of characters for Depends on COF

the serial interface

Data type otherwise UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2000hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 04hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 4

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 16

Meaning of the values for P1 with simple trigger status (CSM with parameter P1 = 0)

Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

7 Error, measured value output is no longer possible in the chosen configuration. The
data rate and transmission speed are no longer compatible (baud rate too low)

6 Trigger function active (TRC) or error if bit 7 is also active (then the trigger status will be
overwritten)

5 Limit value 2 active (LIV2)

4 Limit value 1 active (LIV1)

3 Standstill (MTD)

2 A/D converter (ADU) overflow/underflow

PanelX
436 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

1 Gross overflow (e.g. scaling too sensitive)

0 Net overflow (e.g. tare value too high)

Meaning of the values for P1 with extended trigger status (CSM with parameter P1 =
2)

Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

7 Error, see ESR

6 Trigger function active (TRC)

5 Limit value 2 active (LIV2)

4 Limit value 1 active (LIV1)

3 Standstill (MTD)

2 Trigger result available (MAV)

1 True zero (0 ± 0.25 d)

0 Gross (bit0 = 0 means the net signal will be transmitted), see also TAS

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 437
10.109 MDT (Maximum Dosing Time)
Sets or reads the maximum dosing time.
See also Filler.

The description below referring to the functions of digital outputs applies

only to sensor electronics up to 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C,
AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics and for 4th gen-
eration FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics in compatibility
mode (IOM command with parameter P1 = 0). For sensor electronics in 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA you can define the function of the
digital outputs yourself with commands OM1 to OM6 (IOM command with
parameter P1 = 1).

The dosing time starts when dosing/batching begins (RUN control input or activation by
control input) and ends with checkweighing (ready signal). If the dosing time is exceeded,
batching is aborted with an error and the outputs for coarse and fine flow are set to inact-
ive again (for output OUT4 see command SDF).

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Maximum dosing time

0: The maximum dosing time is deactivated

Range/data
1 … 32,767: The activation is parameter P1 * 100 ms

PanelX
438 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Number of ASCII characters with 5
serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2220hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 06hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 6

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 94

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 439
10.110 MFO (Material Flow Last Dosing Cycle)
Reads out the material flow during the fine flow phase of the last batching process. The
value of the last complete measuring interval is sent. The duration of the measurement is
determined by the time specified for the FPT command (fine flow prediction).

If you have set the time interval for the fine flow prediction to 0, no meas-
urement of the material flow will be performed.

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P78.3 (electronics units with P78.3 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

PanelX
440 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Information about the command
Material flow during the fine flow phase of the last batch-
Meaning
ing process

Range/data 0 … 1,638,399

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2000hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Ehex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 14

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 441
10.111 MRA (Multirange Switch Point)
Sets or reads the switch point for the measuring range with dual-range balance or
switches to single-range balance.

Dual-range balance
In legal-for-trade mode (LFT with parameter P1 > 0) you must always activate the motion
detection function (MTD with parameter P1 > 0). If motion detection is turned off for
industrial applications (MTD with parameter P1 = 0), zero will not automatically be set if
the scale is switched from range 2 back to range 1.
In measuring range the digit set with the RSN command is used, in measuring range 2
the next digit following. For example, 2 as the digit in measuring range 1 results in 5 as
the digit in measuring range 2.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) Yes

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode Yes

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1
Define the switch point for the second measuring range
Meaning
or single-range balance

0: Single-range balance
Range/data 1 … 1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise
0 … ±160% of NOV: Switch point for dual-range scale

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

PanelX
442 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2110hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 08hex (hexadecimal)

Class 101

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 8

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 63

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 443
10.112 MRM (Multi-Range Mode)
Sets or reads the method of switching to weighing range 1 for a multi-range scale.
See also second weighing range, Multi-range scale, SCR.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 10

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) Yes

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode Yes

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P81 (electronics units with P81 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Method of switching to weighing range 1

0: Automatic (gross or net)

Range/data 1: Gross only
2: Manual, see SCR

Number of ASCII characters with 1

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2110hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Fhex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
444 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Class 101

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 15

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 445
10.113 MSV (Measured Signal Value)
Reads out the current measured value and depending on the setting the status as well.
See also Measured value status (CANopen) and Measured value status (DeviceNet)
The output format for serial interfaces depends on COF. The measured value can be the
gross or net value.

Special forms of the command

MSV?; generates the current measured value (and status).
MSV?0; starts continuous data output. You cannot use this command in two-wire mode.
MSV?x; starts output of x data sets. A maximum of 65,535 data sets are possible. The
end identifier crlf is not generated until after the last measured value (or status) unless
you use the TEX command with parameter P1 > 127.

Writing: 1 (optional)
No. of parameters
Reading: 2 (P2 is optional)

Factory setting ‒

Depends on the filter mode (FMD), filter (ASF) and index (P1)
of the output rate (ICR)
Response time FMD0/2/3/4: <2ICR * 1.6 ms + 1.6 ms
FMD1 and ASF0: <2ICR * 1.6 ms + 1.6 ms
FMD1: <2ICR * ASF-Parameter * 1.6 ms + 1.6 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade No
mode

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firm- P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)
ware version

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
446 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P1

Meaning Measured value

Input: 0 … 65,535
Range/data Output: ±1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, oth-
erwise ±NOV

Number and type of characters for Depends on COF

the serial interface

Data type otherwise SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2000hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 01hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 1

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 10

Parameter P2 (only possible for output)

Meaning Status

Range/data 0 … 65,536

Number and type of characters for Depends on COF

the serial interface

Data type otherwise UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2000hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 02hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 447
 Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 2

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 14

Meaning of the bits in the measured value status

The status information depends on the operating mode (IMD command) and the CSM
command (normal or extended measured value status).
See also ERR, ESR.

Only 8 bits are sent to the serial interfaces. For CANopen and DeviceNet up
to 16 bits are available in the measured value status.

IMD with parameter P1 = 0 and CSM with parameter P1 = 0, standard mode

Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

7 Error, measured value output is no longer possible in the chosen configuration. The
data rate and transmission speed are no longer compatible (baud rate too low)
6

5 Limit value 2 active (LIV2)

4 Limit value 1 active (LIV1)

3 Standstill (MTD)

2 A/D converter (ADU) overflow/underflow

1 Gross overflow (e.g. scaling too sensitive)

0 Net overflow (e.g. tare value too high)

PanelX
448 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
IMD with parameter P1 = 1 and CSM with parameter P1 = 0, trigger mode

Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

7 Error, measured value output is no longer possible in the chosen configuration. The
data rate and transmission speed are no longer compatible (baud rate too low)

6 Trigger function active (TRC) or error if bit 7 is also active (then the trigger status will be
overwritten)

5 Limit value 2 active (LIV2)

4 Limit value 1 active (LIV1)

3 Standstill (MTD)

2 A/D converter (ADU) overflow/underflow

1 Gross overflow (e.g. scaling too sensitive)

0 Net overflow (e.g. tare value too high)

IMD with parameter P1 = 2 and CSM with parameter P1 = 0, dosing mode

Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

7 Alarm dependent on SDF function:

If an alarm bit of the monitor functions is activated, this bit and output OUT4 will be
activated (see also OMD). This bit and OUT4 are reset when
– there is no more overflow,
– the BRK command is sent,
– the digital input for Stop filling is set,
– the next RUN command is sent.

6 Ready signal for batching (FRS can be read out) or emptying active

5 Fine flow active

4 Coarse flow active

3 Standstill (MTD)

2 A/D converter (ADU) overflow/underflow

1 Gross overflow (e.g. scaling too sensitive)

0 Net overflow (e.g. tare value too high)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 449
IMD with parameter P1 = 0 and CSM with parameter P1 = 2, standard mode with
extended measured value status

Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

7 Error, see also ESR

6 Measuring range 2 active (bit 6 = 0 means measuring range 1 is active), see also MRA

5 Limit value 2 active (LIV2)

4 Limit value 1 active (LIV1)

3 Standstill (MTD)

2 —

1 True zero (0 ± 0.25 d)

0 Gross (bit0 = 0 means the net signal will be transmitted), see also TAS

IMD with parameter P1 = 1 and CSM with parameter P1 = 2, trigger mode with exten-
ded measured value status

Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

7 Error, see ESR

6 Trigger function active (TRC)

5 Limit value 2 active (LIV2)

4 Limit value 1 active (LIV1)

3 Standstill (MTD)

2 Trigger result available (MAV)

1 True zero (0 ± 0.25 d)

0 Gross (bit0 = 0 means the net signal will be transmitted), see also TAS

PanelX
450 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
IMD with parameter P1 = 2 and CSM with parameter P1 = 2, dosing mode with exten-
ded measured value status

Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

7 Error, see ESR

6 Alarm output active (SDF)

5 Fill flow active, see also CBK, FBK

4 Emptying active, see also EWT

3 Redosing active, see also RDS

2 Batching ready signal (FRS can be read out)

1 Fine flow active

0 Coarse flow active

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 451
10.114 MSW (Minimum Start Weight)
Sets or reads the minimum start weight for batching.
The batching process is not started if the current gross value is less than the minimum
start weight. Use this command and the empty weight (EWT) to define the range in which
the batching start will be performed. However, the two functions are independent of each
other.

This setting is ignored for deduction weighing (DMD command with para-
meter P1 = 1).

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
452 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P1

Meaning Minimum start weight

0 … 1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise

Range/data
0 … 160% of NOV

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2210hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Bhex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 11

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 198

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 453
10.115 MTD (Motion Detection)
Sets or reads the range for motion detection.
The range refers to the nominal value set with the NOV command. Motion detection is
performed at 1 d/s if you turn off user-defined scaling (NOV with parameter P1 = 0) or set
scaling to over 100,000.
Information about whether the measured values within one second fall within the selec-
ted standstill range is transferred in measurement status information (see command
MSV) in bit 3. If motion detection is deactivated, the bit is still 1.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) Yes

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode Yes

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
454 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P1

Meaning Range for motion detection

0: Standstill recognition deactivated

1: ±0.25 d/s of NOV
2: ±0.5 d/s of NOV
Range/data
3: ±1 d/s of NOV
4: ±2 d/s of NOV
5: ±3 d/s of NOV

Number of ASCII characters with 2

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2110hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 09hex (hexadecimal)

Class 101

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 9

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 65

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 455
10.116 MUX (Control of Digital Outputs OUT5 And OUT6)
Sets the digital outputs 5 and 6, if present and IMD with parameter P1 = 2 (dosing mode)
and OMD with parameter P1 > 0 is used.
This command was retained for compatibility reasons. On the 4th generation FIT5A,
FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics units use commands OM5, OM6 and OS5,
OS6 instead.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in Legal-For-Trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

PanelX
456 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P1

Meaning Set digital outputs 5 and 6

0: OUT5 and OUT6 = Low

4: OUT5 = High, OUT6 = Low
8: OUT5 = Low, OUT6 = High
Range/data
12: OUT5 and OUT6 = High
All other values do not result in an error, and are not
answered with ?CrLf !

Number of ASCII characters with 2

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2450hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 01hex (hexadecimal)

Class 110

DeviceNet Instance 6

Attribute 1

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 64

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 457
10.117 MVC (Retrigger Mean Value Count)
Sets or reads the number of segments of measuring time (see TRC command, parameter
P5) over which the mean value will be calculated if you are using pre-triggering operating
mode via level (TRC command with parameter P2 = 0).
As soon as the mean value is outside of the tolerance band (plus and minus) assigned
with the RTB command, re-triggering occurs, which restarts the measuring time. P1 of
RTB must be greater than 0, otherwise there will be no retriggering.
See also Pre-triggering via level, Re-triggering.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for- No
trade mode

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with P64.4 (electronics units with P64.4 see Firmware overview), P77.9
firmware version (electronics units with P77.9 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
458 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P1
Number of segments of measuring time over which the
Meaning
mean value will be formed for retriggering

Range/data 0 … 99

Number of ASCII characters with 2

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 1Ahex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 26

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 181

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 459
10.118 NAM (Manufacturer)
Sets or reads the manufacturer code.
See also HWV, IDN, PDT, PZN, SNR, SRV, SWI, SWV.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting "HBM"

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) Yes

Disabled in Legal-For-Trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Manufacturer code

Range/data ‒

Number of ASCII characters with 3

serial interface

Data type Text (ASCII), 3 characters

Access R (Read only)

Index 2520hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 02hex (hexadecimal)

Class 120

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 8

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 110

PanelX
460 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.119 NDS (Number of Dosings)
Reads out the dosing counter (number of dosing results).
Each time there is a dosing result, the counter is increased by 1. Use the CSN command
to clear the counter. Turning on the supply voltage again and the RES command also
clear the counter. The counter does not overflow. It stops when it reaches 65,535 if it is
not cleared.
Cumulative weight memory SUM, the mean value (SDM) and the standard deviation
(SDS) of the dosing results as well as the dosing counter are updated simultaneously.
This means that the cumulative weight memory represents the sum of dosing results for
the number of batching processes specified in the dosing counter.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 461
Parameter P1

Meaning Dosing counter

Range/data 0 … 65,535

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2230hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 05hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 5

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 20

PanelX
462 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.120 NOV (Nominal Value)
Sets or reads the user-defined scaling.
ASCII measurement output is scaled at the factory to 1,000,000. Enter the number that
will be generated for maximum capacity with this command. For a measurement output
of 2000 digits at maximum capacity, use NOV2000; as the command.

If user-defined scaling is active, the parameters for the limit values (LIV1 to
LIV4), the level value of the trigger function (TRC), the peak values (PVA), trig-
ger result (MAV) and tare value (TAV) are scaled with NOV.

After balancing with LDW/LWT, first set the user-defined scaling and then
the other parameters.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) Yes

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode Yes

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning User scaling

0: User-defined scaling deactivated

Range/data
1 … 1,599,999: Value at maximum capacity

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 463
 Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2110hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Ahex (hexadecimal)

Class 101

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 10

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 39

Output format and output value for maximum capacity depending on P1

Output format Value with P1 = 0 Value with P1 > 0

2 byte binary 20000 NOV value

4 byte binary 5120000 NOV value

ASCII 1000000 NOV value

PanelX
464 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.121 NTF (Notch Filter)
Sets or reads the preset notch filters when the filter mode is FMD with parameter P1 = 2,
3 or 4.
As from P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware overview), the function is available
in all FMD filter modes.
See also ADF, HSM.
The notch filters are connected on line side of the respective low-pass filter (ASF com-
mand).
See Filter mode, Notch filter.

No. of parameters 2

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Notch filter 1

0: Filter deactivated
Range/data
1 … 63: Filter active

Number of ASCII characters with 2

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 465
 Index 24C0hex (hexadecimal)
CANopen
Subindex 06hex (hexadecimal)

Class 110

DeviceNet Instance 13

Attribute 6

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 60

Parameter P2

Meaning Notch filter 2

0: Filter deactivated
Range/data
1 … 63: Filter active

Number of ASCII characters with 2

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 24C0hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 07hex (hexadecimal)

Class 110

DeviceNet Instance 13

Attribute 7

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 61

Calculation of the notch frequency with parameter P known

For parameter P set with the NTF command, the notch frequency of the notch filter at the
standard analog-to-digital converter sample rate (HSM with parameter P1 = 0) is:
fnotch = 610 / (2 * (P-1))

PanelX
466 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
For the increased analog-to-digital converter sampling rate (HSM with parameter P1 = 1)
use:
fnotch = 1220 / (2 * (P-1))

Please note: For electronics with P7x, put 613 instead of 610 and 1226 instead of 1220.

For electronics with P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview) and AD105D dif-
ferently:
fnotch = 400 / (2 * (P-1))

Calculation of parameter P with known interference frequency fnotch

Use the same equation to calculate the NTF parameter P with known interference fre-
quency and standard analog-to-digital converter sample rate (HSM with parameter P1 =
0):
P = 1+ 610 / (2 * fnotch)

For the increased analog-to-digital converter sampling rate (HSM with parameter P1 = 1)
use:
P = 1+ 1220 / (2 * fnotch)

Please note: For electronics with P7x, put 613 instead of 610 and 1226 instead of 1220.

For electronics with P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview) and AD105D dif-
ferently:
P = 1+ 400 / (2 * fnotch)

Settling time calculation

Each filter increases the settling time. If you activate multiple filters, the resulting times
must be added. The settling time in milliseconds depending on parameter P at the stand-
ard analog-to-digital converter sampling rate (HSM with parameter P1 = 0) is:
Tdelay = P * 1000 / 610

For the increased analog-to-digital converter sampling rate (HSM with parameter P1 = 1)
use:
Tdelay = P * 1000 / 1220

Please note: For electronics with P7x, put 613 instead of 610 and 1226 instead of 1220.

For electronics with P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview) and AD105D dif-
ferently:
Tdelay = P * 1000 / 400

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 467
Example:
The interference frequency is 5.1 Hz and is used as the standard analog-to-digital con-
verter sample rate (HSM0).
P = 1+ 610 / (2 * 5.1)
This results in a value of 60 (rounded) for P. The additional settling time is:
Tdelay = 60 * 1000 / 610 ≈ 100 ms

So send the NTF60; command for the first notch filter or NTF,60; for the second.

PanelX
468 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.122 OM1 (Output Mode Output 1)
Sets or reads the function of digital output 1.

It must be possible to assign the function of the outputs freely (IOM com-
mand with parameter P1 = 1). Otherwise the command will not have any
effect.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 469
Parameter P1

Meaning Function of digital output 1

0: No function
1: Manual with command OS1
2: Limit value 1
3: Limit value 2
4: Limit value 3
5: Limit value 4
6: Stop material flow (only for MultiHead application with
IMD and parameter P1 = 1)
7: Coarse flow (only for batching with IMD and para-
meter P1 = 2)
8: Fine flow (only for batching with IMD and parameter
P1 = 2)
9: Ready signal (only for batching with IMD and para-
meter P1 = 2)
Range/data 10: Upper tolerance limit exceeded (only for batching
with IMD and parameter P1 = 2)
11: Lower tolerance limit undershot (only for batching
with IMD and parameter P1 = 2)
12: Tolerance limits exceeded or undershot (only for
batching with IMD and parameter P1 = 2)
13: Alarm exceeded (only for batching with IMD and para-
meter P1 = 2)
14: The output is controlled by commands DL1/DL2
15: Limit value 1 (flashing)
16: Limit value 2 (flashing)
17: Limit value 3 (flashing)
18: Limit value 4 (flashing)
19: PAD/AD105D/AD112D: Sync Leader, otherwise not
used

Number of ASCII characters with 2

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

PanelX
470 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Index 2021hex (hexadecimal)
CANopen
Subindex 01hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 9

Attribute 1

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 471
10.123 OM2 (Output Mode Output 2)
Sets or reads the function of digital output 2.

It must be possible to assign the function of the outputs freely (IOM com-
mand with parameter P1 = 1). Otherwise the command will not have any
effect.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

PanelX
472 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P1

Meaning Function of digital output 2

0: No function
1: Manual with command OS2
2: Limit value 1
3: Limit value 2
4: Limit value 3
5: Limit value 4
6: Stop material flow (only for MultiHead application with
IMD and parameter P1 = 1)
7: Coarse flow (only for batching with IMD and para-
meter P1 = 2)
8: Fine flow (only for batching with IMD and parameter
P1 = 2)
9: Ready signal (only for batching with IMD and para-
meter P1 = 2)
Range/data 10: Upper tolerance limit exceeded (only for batching
with IMD and parameter P1 = 2)
11: Lower tolerance limit undershot (only for batching
with IMD and parameter P1 = 2)
12: Tolerance limits exceeded or undershot (only for
batching with IMD and parameter P1 = 2)
13: Alarm exceeded (only for batching with IMD and para-
meter P1 = 2)
14: The output is controlled by commands DL1/DL2
15: Limit value 1 (flashing)
16: Limit value 2 (flashing)
17: Limit value 3 (flashing)
18: Limit value 4 (flashing)
19: PAD/AD105D/AD112D: Sync Leader, otherwise not
used

Number of ASCII characters with 2

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 473
 Index 2021hex (hexadecimal)
CANopen
Subindex 02hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 9

Attribute 2

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
474 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.124 OM3 (Output Mode Output 3)
Sets or reads the function of digital output 3.

It must be possible to assign the function of the outputs freely (IOM com-
mand with parameter P1 = 1). Otherwise the command will not have any
effect.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 475
Parameter P1

Meaning Function of digital output 3

0: No function
1: Manual with command OS3
2: Limit value 1
3: Limit value 2
4: Limit value 3
5: Limit value 4
6: Stop material flow (only for MultiHead application with
IMD and parameter P1 = 1)
7: Coarse flow (only for batching with IMD and para-
meter P1 = 2)
8: Fine flow (only for batching with IMD and parameter
P1 = 2)
9: Ready signal (only for batching with IMD and para-
meter P1 = 2)
Range/data 10: Upper tolerance limit exceeded (only for batching
with IMD and parameter P1 = 2)
11: Lower tolerance limit undershot (only for batching
with IMD and parameter P1 = 2)
12: Tolerance limits exceeded or undershot (only for
batching with IMD and parameter P1 = 2)
13: Alarm exceeded (only for batching with IMD and para-
meter P1 = 2)
14: The output is controlled by commands DL1/DL2
15: Limit value 1 (flashing)
16: Limit value 2 (flashing)
17: Limit value 3 (flashing)
18: Limit value 4 (flashing)
19: PAD/AD105D/AD112D: Sync Leader, otherwise not
used

Number of ASCII characters with 2

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

PanelX
476 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Index 2021hex (hexadecimal)
CANopen
Subindex 03hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 9

Attribute 3

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 477
10.125 OM4 (Output Mode Output 4)
Sets or reads the function of digital output 4.

It must be possible to assign the function of the outputs freely (IOM com-
mand with parameter P1 = 1). Otherwise the command will not have any
effect.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

PanelX
478 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P1

Meaning Function of digital output 4

0: No function
1: Manual with command OS4
2: Limit value 1
3: Limit value 2
4: Limit value 3
5: Limit value 4
6: Stop material flow (only for MultiHead application with
IMD and parameter P1 = 1)
7: Coarse flow (only for batching with IMD and para-
meter P1 = 2)
8: Fine flow (only for batching with IMD and parameter
P1 = 2)
9: Ready signal (only for batching with IMD and para-
meter P1 = 2)
Range/data 10: Upper tolerance limit exceeded (only for batching
with IMD and parameter P1 = 2)
11: Lower tolerance limit undershot (only for batching
with IMD and parameter P1 = 2)
12: Tolerance limits exceeded or undershot (only for
batching with IMD and parameter P1 = 2)
13: Alarm exceeded (only for batching with IMD and para-
meter P1 = 2)
14: The output is controlled by commands DL1/DL2
15: Limit value 1 (flashing)
16: Limit value 2 (flashing)
17: Limit value 3 (flashing)
18: Limit value 4 (flashing)
19: PAD/AD105D/AD112D: Sync Leader, otherwise not
used

Number of ASCII characters with 2

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 479
 Index 2021hex (hexadecimal)
CANopen
Subindex 04hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 9

Attribute 4

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
480 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.126 OM5 (Output Mode Output 5)
Sets or reads the function of digital output 5.

It must be possible to assign the function of the outputs freely (IOM com-
mand with parameter P1 = 1). Otherwise the command will not have any
effect.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 481
Parameter P1

Meaning Function of digital output 5

0: No function
1: Manual with command OS5
2: Limit value 1
3: Limit value 2
4: Limit value 3
5: Limit value 4
6: Stop material flow (only for MultiHead application with
IMD and parameter P1 = 1)
7: Coarse flow (only for batching with IMD and para-
meter P1 = 2)
8: Fine flow (only for batching with IMD and parameter
P1 = 2)
9: Ready signal (only for batching with IMD and para-
meter P1 = 2)
Range/data 10: Upper tolerance limit exceeded (only for batching
with IMD and parameter P1 = 2)
11: Lower tolerance limit undershot (only for batching
with IMD and parameter P1 = 2)
12: Tolerance limits exceeded or undershot (only for
batching with IMD and parameter P1 = 2)
13: Alarm exceeded (only for batching with IMD and para-
meter P1 = 2)
14: The output is controlled by commands DL1/DL2
15: Limit value 1 (flashing)
16: Limit value 2 (flashing)
17: Limit value 3 (flashing)
18: Limit value 4 (flashing)
19: PAD/AD105D/AD112D: Sync Leader, otherwise not
used

Number of ASCII characters with 2

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

PanelX
482 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Index 2021hex (hexadecimal)
CANopen
Subindex 05hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 9

Attribute 5

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 483
10.127 OM6 (Output Mode Output 6)
Sets or reads the function of digital output 6.

It must be possible to assign the function of the outputs freely (IOM com-
mand with parameter P1 = 1). Otherwise the command will not have any
effect.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

PanelX
484 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P1

Meaning Function of digital output 6

0: No function
1: Manual with command OS6
2: Limit value 1
3: Limit value 2
4: Limit value 3
5: Limit value 4
6: Stop material flow (only for MultiHead application with
IMD and parameter P1 = 1)
7: Coarse flow (only for batching with IMD and para-
meter P1 = 2)
8: Fine flow (only for batching with IMD and parameter
P1 = 2)
9: Ready signal (only for batching with IMD and para-
meter P1 = 2)
Range/data 10: Upper tolerance limit exceeded (only for batching
with IMD and parameter P1 = 2)
11: Lower tolerance limit undershot (only for batching
with IMD and parameter P1 = 2)
12: Tolerance limits exceeded or undershot (only for
batching with IMD and parameter P1 = 2)
13: Alarm exceeded (only for batching with IMD and para-
meter P1 = 2)
14: The output is controlled by commands DL1/DL2
15: Limit value 1 (flashing)
16: Limit value 2 (flashing)
17: Limit value 3 (flashing)
18: Limit value 4 (flashing)
19: PAD/AD105D/AD112D: Sync Leader, otherwise not
used

Number of ASCII characters with 2

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 485
 Index 2021hex (hexadecimal)
CANopen
Subindex 06hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 9

Attribute 6

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
486 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.128 OMD (Output Mode)
Sets or reads the function of digital outputs 4 to 6 if present. The function of digital out-
puts 1 to 3 is always identical.
This command was retained for compatibility reasons. On the 4th generation FIT5A,
FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics units use commands OM1 to OM6 instead.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P64.3 (electronics units with P64.3 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Function of outputs

Range/data 0 … 31)

Number of ASCII characters with 2

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2200hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 06hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 487
 Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 6

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 88

1) P1 = 3 is only available as from P64.3 or P77.8 respectively.

Meaning of values for P1 depending on the output

P1 OUT1 OUT2 OUT31) OUT4 OUT5 OUT6

0 Coarse Fine Ready sig- Upper tolerance Lower tolerance Alarm

flow flow nal/Emptying limit exceeded limit undershot

1 Coarse Fine Ready sig- Error with tol- Depends on MUX com-
flow flow nal/Emptying erance limits mand

2 Coarse Fine Ready sig- Alarm Depends on MUX com-

flow flow nal/Emptying mand

3 Coarse Fine Ready sig- Depends on com- Depends on MUX com-

flow flow nal/Emptying mands DL1/DL2 mand

1) The specified emptying time (EPT) determines whether the ready signal function or the
emptying function will be used for OUT3.

PanelX
488 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.129 OS1 (Digital Output 1)
Reads the state of digital output 1.
If you have used the OM1 command with parameter P1 = 1 (manual mode), you can also
set the output.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Digital output 1

Range/data 0…1

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Standard: R (Read only)

Access
For OM1 with P1 = 1: R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2020hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 1Ehex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 30

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 489
10.130 OS2 (Digital Output 2)
Reads the state of digital output 2.
If you have used the OM2 command with parameter P1 = 1 (manual mode), you can also
set the output.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Digital output 2

Range/data 0…1

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Standard: R (Read only)

Access
For OM2 with P1 = 1: R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2020hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 1Fhex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 31

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
490 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.131 OS3 (Digital Output 3)
Reads the state of digital output 3.
If you have used the OM3 command with parameter P1 = 1 (manual mode), you can also
set the output.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Digital output 3

Range/data 0…1

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Standard: R (Read only)

Access
For OM3 with P1 = 1: R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2020hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 20hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 32

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 491
10.132 OS4 (Digital Output 4)
Reads the state of digital output 4.
If you have used the OM4 command with parameter P1 = 1 (manual mode), you can also
set the output.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Digital output 4

Range/data 0…1

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Standard: R (Read only)

Access
For OM4 with P1 = 1: R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2020hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 21hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 33

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
492 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.133 OS5 (Digital Output 5)
Reads the state of digital output 5.
If you have used the OM5 command with parameter P1 = 1 (manual mode), you can also
set the output.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Digital output 5

Range/data 0…1

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Standard: R (Read only)

Access
For OM5 with P1 = 1: R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2020hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 22hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 34

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 493
10.134 OS6 (Digital Output 6)
Reads the state of digital output 6.
If you have used the OM6 command with parameter P1 = 1 (manual mode), you can also
set the output.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Digital output 6

Range/data 0…1

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Standard: R (Read only)

Access
For OM6 with P1 = 1: R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2020hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 23hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 35

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
494 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.135 OSN (Optimization)
Sets or reads the degree of optimization.
When optimization is active, the coarse flow (CFD) and fine flow (FFD) are optimized by
the sensor electronics. The minimum fine flow weight (FFM) ensures that the tolerances
will be observed. This limit prevents the fine flow component being minimized still further
by increasing the coarse flow component.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Optimization

0: Optimization deactivated
1: Highest degree of optimization
Range/data
2: Medium degree of optimization
3: Lowest degree of optimization

Number of ASCII characters with 2

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 495
 Index 2200hex (hexadecimal)
CANopen
Subindex 07hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 7

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 86

Effect of the degree of optimization

A portion of the material oversupply or undersupply is taken into account at the next fine
flow cut-off point. The quantity depends on the degree of optimization and the difference
between the actual weight and the target weight. The factor used to calculate the quant-
ity is the correction factor, and ranges from 0.25 to 1.

Degree of optimization Difference between current weight and target weight in %

1 <0.2 0.2 … 0.4 >0.4

2 <0.6 0.6 … 1.2 >1.2

3 <2.0 2…4 >4

Resulting correction factor 0.25 0.5 1

A correction factor of 1 means that the difference between the actual weight and target
weight (either too much or not enough material added) will be included in the next cut-off
point at a rate of 100%. A correction factor of 0.5 means the difference will only be
included at a rate of 50%.

Example
Fine flow cut-off point 480 g, target weight 500 g. An actual weight of 505 g (1% too
much) and a degree of optimization of 2 results in a correction factor of 0.5. So the fine
flow cut-off point for the next process is set to 477.5 g (480 g minus 0.5 times 5 g).

PanelX
496 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.136 PDT (Firmware Date)
Reads the date of the firmware in the format “hh:mm:ss, month day year”, e.g. “08:54:23,
Nov 15 2015”.
See also HWV, IDN, NAM, PZN, SNR, SRV, SWI, SWV.

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Information about the command

Meaning Firmware date

Range/data ‒

Data type Text (ASCII)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2520hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 05hex (hexadecimal)

Class 120

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 10

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 497
10.137 POL (Light Sensor Polarity)
Sets or reads the polarity of the input signal range of the light sensor(s). Logical 0 is
expected as the quiescent level in the default setting. You can invert the logic level if
necessary with this command.

The command affects both inputs (IN1 and IN2).

Input signal Internal signal

Quiescent level
Logical 0 not
inverted

Quiescent level
Logical 1
inverted

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

PanelX
498 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P1

Meaning Polarity of the input signal range of the light sensor(s)

0: Input signal not inverted

Range/data
1: Input signal inverted

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 21hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 33

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 499
10.138 POR (Port Set And Read)
Sets or reads the status of the digital inputs and outputs.
This command was retained for compatibility reasons. On the 4th generation FIT5A,
FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics units instead use commands OS1 to OS6 for
the outputs and IS1/IS2 for the inputs.

2 for input
No. of parameters
4 for output

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

PanelX
500 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameters P1 ... P4 with serial interface
Status of digital inputs and outputs, P1 = OUT1, P2 =
Meaning
OUT2, P3 = IN1, P4 = IN2

0: LOW
Range/data
1: HIGH

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Example

Command POR P1,P2; Input: Parameters P1 and P2 can be 0 or 1. Note that 0 = LOW
and 1 = HIGH for digital outputs (P1 for OUT1, P2 for OUT2).

Command POR?; Query

Response 0,1,1,0crlf The switching states of outputs OUT1 and OUT2 and the signal
levels on the two inputs IN1 and IN2 are returned. If the limit val-
ues are activated (commands LIV1, etc.), the limit values states
will be generated.

Parameters for CANopen

Meaning Status of digital inputs and outputs

Bit 7: Short circuit on digital outputs

Bit 6: Reserved
Bit 5: Status OUT4
Bit 4: Status OUT3
Read data
Bit 3: Status OUT2
Bit 2: Status OUT1
Bit 1: Status IN2
Bit 0: Status IN1

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 501
 Bit 7: Reserved
Bit 6: Reserved
Bit 5: Reserved
Bit 4: Reserved
Write data
Bit 3: Nominal status OUT4
Bit 2: Nominal status OUT3
Bit 1: Nominal status OUT2
Bit 0: Nominal status OUT1

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2020hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 03hex (hexadecimal)

Parameters for DeviceNet

Meaning Status of digital inputs and outputs

Bit 7: Short circuit on digital outputs

Bit 6: Reserved
Bit 5: Status OUT4
Bit 4: Status OUT3
Read data
Bit 3: Status OUT2
Bit 2: Status OUT1
Bit 1: Status IN2
Bit 0: Status IN1

Bit 7: Reserved
Bit 6: Reserved
Bit 5: Reserved
Bit 4: Reserved
Write data
Bit 3: Nominal status OUT4
Bit 2: Nominal status OUT3
Bit 1: Nominal status OUT2
Bit 0: Nominal status OUT1

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

PanelX
502 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 3

Parameter PROFIBUS

Meaning Status of digital inputs and outputs

Bit 3: Status IN2

Bit 2: Status IN1
Read data
Bit 1: Status OUT2
Bit 0: Status OUT1

Bit 1: Nominal status OUT2

Write data
Bit 0: Nominal status OUT1

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 17

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 503
10.139 PTD (Post-Trigger Delay)
Sets or reads the number of values by which the post-trigger will be delayed if you use
the external post-triggering operating mode (command TRC with parameter P2 = 3).
The settling times (delays) of the signal differ depending on the filters that are used (ASF,
FMD, NTF). You can compensate for this delay with PTD by increasing the number of
measured values used for the trigger result. The following formula will return a rough
approximation of parameter P1:
P1 = 0.2 * settling time of the filters in ms / time between two measured values
in ms
Use the scope function of the PanelX program to determine the delay time
between the trigger event and the drop in measured values, i.e. when the
weight being measured leaves the weighing platform, and to determine the
parameter more precisely.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for- No
trade mode

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with P64.4 (electronics units with P64.4 see Firmware overview), P77.9
firmware version (electronics units with P77.9 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Delay of the post-trigger

0 … 99; the delay time is the time between measured val-

Range/data
ues multiplied by the parameter value1)

PanelX
504 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Number of ASCII characters with 2
serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 1Ehex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 30

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 171

1) Depending on parameter P1 of the HSM command, the time between two measured values
is 1.66 ms (P1 = 0, 600 measured values/s) or 0.83 ms (P1 = 1, 1200 measured values/s).

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 505
10.140 PVA (Read Peak Value)
Reads the peak values (minimum and maximum).
See also Peak values, PVS, CPV.

You must activate peak value acquisition with the PVS command, otherwise
no peak values will be available.
After the supply voltage is turned on again, peak values can be cleared with
the RES command.

The output is scaled depending on NOV and without a decimal point.

No. of parameters 2

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Output peak value minimum

±1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise

Range/data
±NOV

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R (Read only)

PanelX
506 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Index 2020hex (hexadecimal)
CANopen
Subindex 04hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 4

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 12

Parameter P2

Meaning Output peak value minimum

±1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise

Range/data
±NOV

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2020hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 05hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 5

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 13

Example

Command S05; Select the device with address 5.

Command PVA?; Read out peak values.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 507
 Response -0000355, 1000723crlf This results in a minimum of -355 digits and a max-
imum of +1,000,723 digits.

PanelX
508 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.141 PVS (Peak Value Select)
Sets or reads the activation and monitored signal source of the peak value function (min-
imum and maximum).
See also Peak values, CPV, PVA.

No. of parameters 2

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Activation of peak values

0: Peak value acquisition deactivated

Range/data
1: Peak value acquisition activated

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2020hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 06hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 6

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 54

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 509
Parameter P2

Meaning Signal source of the peak value function

0: Net signal
Range/data 1: Gross signal
2: trigger results

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2020hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 07hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 7

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 54

PanelX
510 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.142 PZN (Check Number)
Reads the check number used to identify the version in legal-for-trade applications. For
SWI = 80 the check number is 240413; for SWI = 81 it is 244554 (as stated in the OIML
approval).
See also HWV, IDN, NAM, PDT, SNR, SRV, SWI, SWV.
The check number is formed from the version numbers of the software modules. The
parameterization of the sensor electronics has no effect on the check number.

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Information about the command

Meaning Check number

Range/data ‒

Number of ASCII characters with 7

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2300hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 04hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 511
 Class 130

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 4

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
512 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.143 RDP (Select Dosing Parameter Set)
Sets or reads the parameter set for the next batching start.
A maximum of 32 parameter sets are available. They are saved in memory and retained
through a power failure. The parameter set that was current during the last TDD com-
mand with parameter P1 = 1 is activated when the supply voltage is turned on again or
with the RES command.
See also FNB, WDP, Filler.
The parameter set contains:
The number of the parameter set
The dosing parameters (weight values, time values, etc.)
The dosing results

Explanation of the function

Working memory (RAM) of the sensor electronics contains two parameter sets: one for
dosing control and one for parameter changes during batching. When batching starts
(RUN command or via digital input) the parameters from the area for parameter changes
are copied to the area for dosing control and the batching process starts. During the
batching process you can change the parameters of the active parameter set (in the area
for parameter changes). These changes have no effect on the batching process that is
running. They do not take effect until the next batching process. After the batching pro-
cess the dosing results from the dosing control area are written to the parameter
changes area. Then they can be read out. If optimization is activated, the cut-off points
for coarse flow and fine flow (CFD and FFD) are also updated.

If you send the RDP command during a batching process, the new parameters will not be
applied from non-volatile memory until the start of the next batching process. The res-
ults of the last process can therefore be read until the next process starts.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 513
 Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Selection of parameter set for the next dosing start

Range/data 0 … 31

Number of ASCII characters with 2

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2200hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 02hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 2

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 56

PanelX
514 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.144 RDS (Redosing)
Sets or reads whether a redosing process is activated.
See also Filler.
The result of redosing does not change the cut-off points when optimization is set (OSN
command with parameter P1 > 0). The previously measured actual value must be below
the tolerance limit. Otherwise no redosing will be performed.
Redosing occurs with fine flow.

You can also turn on coarse flow briefly at the beginning of redosing with the
VCT command and parameter P1 = 0 until a rise in the weight value is detec-
ted so that the fine flow valve opens. This function is intended for valves that
only open if coarse and fine flow are triggered.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Redosing

0: Redosing deactivated
Range/data 1 … 3: Redosing occurs if the corresponding condition is
fulfilled

Number of ASCII characters with 2

serial interface

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 515
 Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2200hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 08hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 8

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 90

Meaning of values for P1

P1 Redosing if Redose when?

1 Fine flow cut-off point (FFD) < current measured value < At the start of the batch-
lower tolerance limit (LTL) ing process

2 the previously determined actual weight is less than the After checkweighing
lower tolerance limit (LTL)

3 Fine flow cut-off point (FFD) < current measured value < At the start of the batch-
lower tolerance limit (LTL) ing process

or or

if the previously determined actual weight is less than the After checkweighing
lower tolerance limit

PanelX
516 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.145 RES (Reset)
Starts a reset (warm start). This command does not generate a response.
All parameters are restored as they were saved during the last TDD command with para-
meter P1 = 1.

Use 0x7FFFFFFF as the parameter to send a command that does not use
parameters via CANopen or DeviceNet.

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting ‒

Response time <3 s

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Information about the command

Meaning Starts a reset

Range/data ‒

Data type ‒

Access W (Write only)

Index 2D00hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 04hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 5

Attribute 3

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 517
10.146 RFO (Residual Flow Last Dosing Cycle)
Reads out the material flow during the residual flow phase of the last batching process.
Use a residual flow time (RFT) that is long enough so that the residual flow has ended
when the filler result is determined.

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P78.3 (electronics units with P78.3 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Information about the command

Material flow during the residual flow phase of the last
Meaning
batching process

Range/data 0 … 1,638,399

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2000hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Fhex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
518 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 15

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 519
10.147 RFT (Residual Flow Time)
Sets or reads the time interval for the residual flow.
The time for the residual flow starts after the fine flow cut-off point is reached. During
this time, amount of material that has still to flow into the canister after fine flow is deac-
tivated is acquired. The amount of material should be small and should be the same for
every batching process if possible. It is important to record the residual flow for proper
optimization and for an accurate actual weight value. The time to be set depends exclus-
ively on the proportioning device.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
520 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P1

Meaning Time interval for residual flow

0: Residual flow deactivated

Range/data
1 … 32,767: The activation time is parameter P1 * 10 ms

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2220hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 07hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 7

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 83

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 521
10.148 RIO (Read Status Digital I/O)
Reads the status of digital inputs and outputs (if present).

The descriptions below referring to the functions of digital inputs and out-
puts apply only to sensor electronics up to 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C,
AD105C, AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics and for
4th generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics in com-
patibility mode (IOM command with parameter P1 = 0). For sensor elec-
tronics of 4th generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA, you can define the
function of the digital inputs yourself with the IM1 and IM2 commands, and
the function of the digital outputs with commands OM1 to OM6 (IOM com-
mands with parameter P1 = 1).

The function of the outputs depends on the setting of the digital inputs and outputs with
the IMD command and activation of limit values (LIV1 to LIV4):

1. IMD with parameter P1 = 2 (dosing mode): Control outputs OUT1 … 6 are sent.
2. IMD with parameter P1 < 2 and active limit values: The states of the limit values are
sent.
3. IMD with parameter P1 < 2 and deactivated limit values: Control outputs OUT1 … 6
are sent. OUT1 and OUT2 can also be set and read by the POR command.

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
522 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Information about the command

Meaning Status of digital inputs and outputs

Range/data 0 … 65,535

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2020hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 12hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 18

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 126

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 523
Meaning of the status bits

Bit Meaning

0 Status of input IN1 (1: active, 0: inactive)

1 Status of input IN2

2 Status of input OUT1 (1: active, 0: inactive)

3 Status of output OUT2

4 Status of output OUT3

5 Status of output OUT4

6 Status of output OUT5

7 Status of output OUT6

8 1: Thermal overload of outputs OUT1 … 4

9 1: true zero (±0.25 d)

10 1: Standstill (MTD)

11 1: Range 2, 0: Range 1 (multi-range scale, MRA)

12 1: Gross signal is sent, 0: Net signal is sent (TAS)

13 1: Overflow or underflow (gross or net measured value)

14 1: Indicating range exceeded (LFT)

15 1: Zero balance (CDT) performed; the bit is cleared after RIO is read.

PanelX
524 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.149 RSN (Resolution)
Sets or reads the set resolution.
The increment limits the resolution of the measured value. The digit is automatically
changed to the next larger value after switching to second measuring range with a dual-
range balance (MRA command with parameter P1 > 0).

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 1

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) Yes

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode Yes

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Digit

Range/data 1, 2, 5, 10, 20, 50, 100, 500

Number of ASCII characters with 3

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2110hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Bhex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 525
 Class 101

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 11

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 89

Example
You are using the NOV command with parameter P1 = 10,000 and RSN with parameter
P1 = 5. Then the measured values are sent in increments of 5: 0, 5, 10, 15, …, 9990, 9995,
10,000.

PanelX
526 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.150 RTB (Re-Trigger Tolerance Band)
Sets or reads the tolerance band for the number of segments of measuring time (see TRC
command, parameter P5) over which the mean value will be calculated (MVC) if you are
using pre-triggering operating mode via level (TRC command with parameter P2 = 0).
As soon as the mean value is outside of the tolerance band (plus and minus) assigned
here, re-triggering occurs, which restarts the measuring time. P1 must be greater than 0,
otherwise there will be no retriggering.
See also Pre-triggering via level, Re-triggering.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for- No
trade mode

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with P64.4 (electronics units with P64.4 see Firmware overview), P77.9
firmware version (electronics units with P77.9 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 527
Parameter P1

Meaning Tolerance band for retriggerung

0: Tolerance band deactivated

Range/data 1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise 1 …
NOV

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 19hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 25

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 180

PanelX
528 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.151 RUN (Start Filling)
Starts a batching process if the sensor electronics are in dosing mode (IMD command
with parameter P1 = 2).
See also Filler.

The description below referring to the functions of digital inputs applies only
to sensor electronics up to 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C,
AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics and for 4th gen-
eration FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics in compatibility
mode (IOM command with parameter P1 = 0). For sensor electronics in 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA you can define the function of the
digital inputs yourself with commands IM1 to IM2 (IOM command with para-
meter P1 = 1).

The result outputs and the status (SDO) of a previous batching are cleared. Any internal
calibration process that is still running is aborted. You can also start batching via a
digital input (IN1).

Use 0x7FFFFFFF as the parameter to send a command that does not use
parameters via CANopen or DeviceNet.

If necessary, choose the parameter set to be used with the RDP command
before you start batching. Read out the parameter set to be used for the cur-
rent batching process with the FNB command.

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 529
Information about the command

Meaning Start batching

Range/data ‒

Data type ‒

Access W (Write only)

Index 2240hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 02hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 5

Attribute 2

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 27

PanelX
530 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.152 S (Select)

This command only concerns serial interfaces.

Selects one or more nodes for subsequent communication. This command does not gen-
erate any response unless the command is faulty.
See also ADR.
The sensor electronics are always active after the RES command or after the supply
voltage has been turned on unless you have previously used the COF command with
parameter P1 > 127. Therefore you must use the S command in bus mode so that the
other bus nodes will not respond. If there is only one sensor electronics unit, you do not
need this command.
Send a semicolon (;) before the command to clear the input buffer of any
commands that are still there and have not been processed yet.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 31

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in Legal-For-Trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 531
Parameter P1

Meaning Selection of nodes for serial interfaces

0 … 89: Only the sensor electronics with the selected will

be selected
96: All sensor electronics units respond to the S com-
mand
Range/data
97, 98: All sensor electronics units perform the following
commands, but do not respond
99: All sensor electronics units execute all commands
and respond

Number of ASCII characters with 2

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access W (Write only)

CANopen Not available

DeviceNet Not available

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
532 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.153 SCR (Set Current Range)
Sets or reads the weighing range for a multi-range scale.
The switch to weighing range 1 is only made if the gross value is 0 (no stop required).
Switching to weighing range 2 is always possible.
See also second weighing range, Multi-range scale, MRM.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) Yes

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode Yes

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P81 (electronics units with P81 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Weighing range

0: Weighing range 1 (only if gross value = 0)

Range/data
1: Weighing range 2

Number of ASCII characters with 1

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2110hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 10hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 533
 Class 101

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 16

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
534 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.154 SDF (Special Dosing Functions)
Sets or reads the activation status of specific monitoring functions, and expands some
functions if the sensor electronics are in dosing mode (IMD with parameter P1 = 2).
See also Filler.
The activation status is an 8-bit value, see the table below for the meaning of the indi-
vidual bits.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 2

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Special functions for batching

Range/data 0 … 255

Number of ASCII characters with 3

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2200hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Ahex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 535
 Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 10

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 96

Meaning of the status bits

Bit Function

6 … 7 Reserved

5 Alarm in case of falling below the minimum start weight MSW or exceeding the empty
weight EWT.

4 Alarm during deduction weighing (DMD command with parameter P1 = 1) and gross
weight value < empty weight (EWT) or gross weight value < filling weight (FWT).

3 Output alarm, maximum dosing time exceeded (MDT).

2 Output alarm in case of overflow or underflow of gross signal, net signal or A/D con-
verter value.

1 Output alarm, fill flow error (level monitoring, see also CBK and FBK).

0 Empty weight monitoring at the start of dosing If the measured value is greater than the
empty weight (EWT), the batching process will not be started. Filling to completion
when the container is damaged (for example a burst sack) is pointless.

PanelX
536 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.155 SDM (Mean Value Dosing Results)
Reads the mean value of dosing results (FRS) calculated since the last time the system
was turned on, the last CSN command (clear dosing results) or the last RES command
(reset).

There is no correction of the mean value during redosing (RDS).

Cumulative weight memory SUM, the mean value (SDM) and the standard deviation
(SDS) of the dosing results as well as the dosing counter (NDS) are updated sim-
ultaneously. This means that the dosing counter contains the number of dosing results
offset in the mean value.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 537
Parameter P1

Meaning Mean value of the dosing results

Range/data -1,638,399 … 1,638,399

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2230hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 06hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 6

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 29

PanelX
538 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.156 SDO (State of Dosing)
Reads the current batching status if the sensor electronics are in dosing mode (IMD with
parameter P1 = 2).
The dosing status is an 8-bit value, see the table below for the meaning of the individual
bits.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Dosing status

Range/data 0 … 255

Number of ASCII characters with 3

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2D00hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 02hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 539
 Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 11

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 23

Meaning of the status bits

Bit Meaning when bit is set (= 1)

0 Coarse flow active

1 Fine flow active

2 Residual flow active

3 Ready signal indicating the filler result (FRS) has been saved. The bit is reset the
next time batching starts.

4 Ready signal indicating the filler result (FRS) has been saved. The bit is reset the
next time batching starts.
or
Emptying, if this dosing type (EPT with parameter P1> 0) is active. The bit is only act-
ive during emptying.

5 Upper tolerance limit exceeded

6 Lower tolerance limit undershot

7 Alarm, for example if level monitoring (SDF) is turned on and an error occurs

PanelX
540 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.157 SDS (Standard Deviation Dosing Results)
Reads the standard deviation of dosing results (FRS) calculated since the last time the
system was turned on, the last CSN command (clear dosing results) or the last RES com-
mand (reset).

There is no correction of the standard deviation during redosing (RDS).

Cumulative weight memory SUM, the mean value (SDM) and the standard deviation
(SDS) of the dosing results as well as the dosing counter (NDS) are updated sim-
ultaneously. This means that the dosing counter contains the number of dosing results
offset in the standard deviation.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 541
Parameter P1

Meaning Standard deviation

Range/data -1,638,399 … 1,638,399

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2230hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 07hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 7

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 123

PanelX
542 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.158 SFA (Sensor Fullscale Adjust)
Sets or reads the nominal value of the factory characteristic curve for an input signal of
2 mV/V.
See also SZA (zero value of factory characteristic curve).

You must measure or enter the value for SZA before using the SFA com-
mand. The values are not activated until both values are present.
Entering or measuring the factory characteristic curve sets the user char-
acteristic curve (LDW/LWT) to 0/1,000,000 and resets the value for CWT to
1,000,000.

You can have the nominal value measured or enter it as a value. During the meas-
urement, the current input signal is assigned an output value of 1,000,000.
See also Balancing a scale.

1. Measure nominal value

Connect a calibration standard.
Measure the zero value with the SZA command.
Set the calibration standard to misalignment of 2 mV/V
Measure the nominal value with the SFA; command (response time < 4.2 s).
The sensor electronics measure the input signal and offset it with the value
measured by the SZA command.
Use 0x7FFFFFFF as the parameter to send a command that does not use
parameters via CANopen or DeviceNet.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 543
2. Manual input of the nominal value
Enter the value for SZA.
Enter the nominal value with the SFA<nominal value>; command (response time
< 1.5 s).
The value that is entered is offset with the value entered for the SZA command
and both are activated.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 1000000

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) Yes

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode Yes

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Nominal value of factory characteristic curve

±1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise

Range/data
±NOV

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2100hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 01hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
544 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Class 101

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 1

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 32/33

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 545
10.159 SNR (Serial Number)
Reads the serial number. Newer electronics units use up to 10-digit serial numbers. In
this case, 10 digits are used as soon as 9,999,999 is exceeded, otherwise 7.
See also HWV, IDN, NAM, PDT, PZN, SRV, SWI, SWV.

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting Serial number

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P80.1.7 (electronics units with P80.1.7 see Firmware
sion overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

Information about the command

Meaning Serial number

Range/data ‒

Number of ASCII characters with 7 or 10

serial interface

Data type UINT32 (Unsigned Integer 32 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2600hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 15hex (hexadecimal)

Class 130

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 21

PanelX
546 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Slot 0
PROFIBUS1)
Index 112

1) The command is already available for PROFIBUS as from P70 (electronics units with P70
see Firmware overview).

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 547
10.160 SOV (Sensor Overflow Counter)
Reads the counter for sensor overflow (number of overflows).
The counter is incremented by one each time 150% of the measuring range (NOV) is
exceeded.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Counter for sensor overflow

Range/data 0 … 8,388,607

Number of ASCII characters with 7

serial interface

Data type UINT32 (Unsigned Integer 32 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2500hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 02hex (hexadecimal)

Class 120

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 2

PanelX
548 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 116

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 549
10.161 SPL (Input Level)
Sets or reads the switching threshold for the digital inputs of AD105D, AD112D and
PAD400xA.
See also UIT.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade No
mode

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with P80 (electronics units with P80, but not for FIT5A, FIT7A and
firmware version PW15iA; see also Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Switching threshold for digital inputs

0: LOW = 0 … 1 V; HIGH = 4 … 12 V
Range/data
1: LOW = 0 … 6 V; HIGH = 10 … 24 V (PLC)

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2600hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 23hex (hexadecimal)

Class 130

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 35

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
550 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.162 SPW (Set Password)
Cancels password protection if the correct password is entered as a parameter.
See also DPW.

Password entry is case-sensitive. Password protection is only in effect when

the serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

After the RES command or after the supply voltage is turned on again, protected com-
mands are disabled again.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting AED

Response time <70 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Information about the command

Meaning Cancel password protection

Range/data ‒

Data type ASCII, maximum 7 characters

Access W (Write only)

CANopen Not available

DeviceNet Not available

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 101

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 551
10.163 SRV (Software Sub-Version)
Reads the number of the firmware patch version, e.g. 115359290 is returned in case of
version 1.17.115359290. The patch version is also displayed together with the firmware
version in the PanelX.
See also HWV, IDN, NAM, PDT, PZN, SNR, SWI, SWV.

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Information about the command

Meaning Patch version number

Range/data ‒

Number of ASCII characters with 9

serial interface

Data type UINT32 (Unsigned Integer 32 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2600hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 21hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
552 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Class 130

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 33

PROFIBUS Not available

10.164 SST (Sync Status)

Reads the number of synchronizations performed. The information is only useful if the
device is working in Leader/Follower mode for synchronization.
See also Synchronization of multiple sensor electronics units, SYN, SYT.

Synchronization is only possible with the AD105D, AD112D and PAD400xA

sensor electronics units.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Synchronization status

Range/data 0 … 65535

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 553
 Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2600hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 27hex (hexadecimal)

Class 130

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 39

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
554 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.165 STB (Control Byte)
Control byte for triggering various actions if you are using APP with parameter P1 = 1.
During a read process you receive the last control byte that was sent.
See also Control word, STW.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Control byte

Range/data 0 … 255

Number of ASCII characters with 3

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2000hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 16hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100
DeviceNet
Instance 1

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 555
 Attribute 22

PROFIBUS Not available

Meaning of the status bits

Bit Description

7 Deletes peak value (CPV)

6 Zero balance (CDL)

5 Deletes trigger results (CTR)

4 Abort batching (BRK)

3 Start batching (RUN)

2 Delete batching results (CSN)

1 Gross/Net selection3) (TAS)

0 Taring (TAR)

PanelX
556 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.166 STP (Stop)
Terminates output of measured values if you have activated continuous output with the
MSV?0; command.
Output that has started will be completed, but no additional measured values will be
sent.

Use 0x7FFFFFFF as the parameter to send a command that does not use
parameters via CANopen or DeviceNet.

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Information about the command

Meaning Stop

Range/data ‒

Data type ‒

Access W (Write only)

CANopen Not available

DeviceNet Not available

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 557
10.167 STR (Set Termination Resistor)
Sets or reads activation of the bus termination resistor.
The bus termination resistors ensure the quiescent level on the interface lines when no
node is sending. The bus termination may only be active for two nodes per bus system
and must be located on the ends on the lines.

For some sensor electronics the bus termination resistors can or must be
activated via a DIP switch. In this case the command will have no effect.
Therefore check the behavior or read the relevant operating manual.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

PanelX
558 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P1

Meaning Bus termination resistors

0: Bus termination resistors deactivated

Range/data
1: Bus termination resistors activated

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2600hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Ahex (hexadecimal)

Class 130

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 10

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 559
10.168 STT (Stabilization Time)
Sets or reads the stabilization time
If standstill recognition (MTD) is activated, checkweighing - i.e. determining the actual
weight - is performed after standstill but within the stabilization time. Otherwise check-
weighing starts immediately.
If no standstill occurs within the stabilization time, the actual weight is measured in any
case once the stabilization time expires. The actual weight acquired after the sta-
bilization time is the basis for optimization of the filling process.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
560 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P1

Meaning Stabilization time

0 … 32,767; the stabilization time is parameter P1 *

Range/data
10 ms

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2220hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 08hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 8

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 84

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 561
10.169 STW (Control Word)
Control word for triggering various actions. When reading you get the last control word
sent.
See also Control word, APP, STB.

This function is only available for serial interfaces starting with P79.0.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Control word

Range/data 0 … 65,535

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2000hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Ahex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
562 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 10

PROFIBUS Not available

For bits 0 and 2 through 7, trigger the corresponding function by setting the bit (= 1). If
you would like to read out the function, first delete the bit and then reset it. For bit 1: If
the bit is set (= 1), gross values will be transmitted, otherwise net values (= 0). Bits 10
through 15 set the target status to the value of the bit.

Meaning of the bits in the control word

Bit Meaning

15 Desired state Output 61)

14 Desired state Output 51)

13 Desired state Output 41)

12 Desired state Output 31)

11 Desired state Output 21)

10 Desired state Output 11)

9 Reserved2)

8 Reserved2)

7 Clear peak values (CPV)

6 Zero balance (CDL)

5 Clear trigger results (CTR)

4 Cancel batching (BRK)

3 Start batching (RUN)

2 Delete batching results (CSN)

1 Gross/Net selection3) (TAS)

0 Taring (TAR)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 563
 1) The target status of outputs 1 through 6 is only activated if the “Batching” mode of oper-
ation is turned off (IMD with parameter P1 = 0) and the corresponding limit switches 1
through to 4 are deactivated (LIV1 to LIV4).
2) The reserved bits are assigned to internal functions and cannot be set.
3) Starting with firmware version P73.

PanelX
564 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.170 SUM (Cumulative Weight)
Reads the cumulative weight memory of dosing results (FRS) calculated since the last
time the system was turned on, the last CSN command (clear dosing results) or the last
RES command (reset).

There is no correction of the cumulative weight memory during redosing

(RDS).

Cumulative weight memory SUM, the mean value (SDM) and the standard deviation
(SDS) of the dosing results as well as the dosing counter (NDS) are updated sim-
ultaneously. This means that the cumulative weight memory represents the sum of dos-
ing results for the number of batching processes specified in the dosing counter.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 565
Parameter P1

Meaning Cumulative value

Range/data 0 … 2,147,483,647

Number of ASCII characters with 10

serial interface

Data type UINT32 (Unsigned Integer 32 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2230hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 08hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 8

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 19

PanelX
566 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.171 SWI (Software Identification)
Reads the software identifier for the part of the firmware relevant to legal validation, i.e.
the main version, e.g. 80 for P80.1.7.
See also HWV, IDN, NAM, PDT, PZN, SNR, SRV, SWV.

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Information about the command

Software identifier for the part of the firmware relevant
Meaning
to legal validation

Range/data ‒

Number of ASCII characters with 3

serial interface

Data type UINT32 (Unsigned Integer 32 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2600hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 22hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 567
 Class 130

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 34

Slot 0
PROFIBUS1)
Index 113

1) PROFIBUS returns not only the number but also the letter P. So for the software version
P80.1.7 the text (ASCII) P80 is returned (no UINT32 (Unsigned Integer 32 bit)).

PanelX
568 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.172 SWV (Software Version)
Reads the software version of the sensor electronics unit, e.g. 100020 for version 1.20.
See also HWV, IDN, NAM, PDT, PZN, SNR, SRV, SWI.

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Information about the command

Meaning Firmware version of sensor electronics

Range/data 100,001 … 9,999,999,999

Number of ASCII characters with 10

serial interface

Data type UINT32 (Unsigned Integer 32 bit)1)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2600hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 16hex (hexadecimal)

Class 130

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 22

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 569
 1) The first five (possible) decimal places indicate the primary version number, the last five
the sub-version. A value of 100012 corresponds to version 1.12.

Example

Command S05; Select the device with address 5.

Command SWV?; Query firmware version.

Response 0000100013crlf The firmware version is 1.13: 00001 and 00013, together
1.13

PanelX
570 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.173 SYD (Systematic Difference)
Sets or reads the systematic difference.
When the filling weight (FWT) is entered, the systematic difference is automatically deac-
tivated (parameter P1 = 0).

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Systematic difference

-50,000 … +50,000 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, oth-

Range/data
erwise 0 … ±5% of NOV

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2210hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 09hex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 571
 Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 9

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 77

10.174 SYN (Sync Mode)

Sets (activates) or reads the mode for synchronization.
See also Synchronization of multiple sensor electronics units, SST, SYT.

Synchronization is only possible with the AD105D, AD112D and PAD400xA

sensor electronics units.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

PanelX
572 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
Parameter P1

Meaning Synchronization mode

0: Synchronization deactivated
1: Sync Leader, IO
Range/data 2: Sync Follower, IO
3: Sync Leader, CANopen
4: Sync Follower, CANopen

Number of ASCII characters with 1

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2600hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 26hex (hexadecimal)

Class 130

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 38

PROFIBUS Not available

10.175 SYT (Sync Cycle Ticks)

Sets or reads the cycle for synchronization in multiples of time for one oscillation
(period) of the carrier frequency.
See also Synchronization of multiple sensor electronics units, SST, SYN.

Example
At a carrier frequency of 1200 Hz, one oscillation (period) lasts 0.833 ms. If you enter
120, synchronization takes place every 100 ms.

Synchronization is only possible with the AD105D, AD112D and PAD400xA

sensor electronics units.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 573
 No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 120

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Synchronization cycle

Range/data 0 … 65535

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2600hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 28hex (hexadecimal)

Class 130

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 40

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
574 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.176 SZA (Sensor Zero Adjust)
Sets or reads the zero value of the factory characteristic curve.
See also SFA (nominal value of factory characteristic curve).

You must measure or enter the value for SZA before using the SFA com-
mand. The values are not activated until both values are present.
Entering or measuring the factory characteristic curve sets the user char-
acteristic curve (LDW/LWT) to 0/1,000,000 and resets the value for CWT to
1,000,000.

You can have the zero value measured or enter it as a value. During the measurement,
the current input signal is assigned an output value of 0.
See also Balancing a scale.

1. Measure zero value

Connect a calibration standard.
Measure the zero value with the SZA; command (response time < 4.2 s).

Use 0x7FFFFFFF as the parameter to send a command that does not use
parameters via CANopen or DeviceNet.

2. Manual input of the zero value

Enter the value for SZA.
Enter the zero value with the SZA<zero value>; command (response time <
15 ms).

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) Yes

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode Yes

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 575
 1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Factory characteristic curve zero point

Range/data ±1,599,999

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2100hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 02hex (hexadecimal)

Class 101

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 2

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 30/31

PanelX
576 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.177 TAD (Tare Delay)
Sets or reads the delay time for taring.
See also Tare balance after a time delay, TAR, TMD.

For DMD with parameter P1 = 1 (deduction weighing) or if the empty weight

or coarse flow cut-off point is exceeded during start, there is no delay and no
taring.

You can use this time for example to blank out interference from putting up sacks or put-
ting on containers. Then taring occurs after the delay time elapses.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 577
Parameter P1

Meaning Delay time for taring

Range/data 0 … 32,767; the delay time is parameter P1 * 10 ms

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2220hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 09hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 9

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 80

PanelX
578 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.178 TAR (Tare)
Performs a tare and switches to display of the net measured value (TAS). Standstill must
be reached in addition in legal-for-trade mode. The current value is stored in the tare buf-
fer (TAV) and subtracted from all the subsequent gross measurements.
See also Tare balance, TAD.

Use 0x7FFFFFFF as the parameter to send a command that does not use
parameters via CANopen or DeviceNet.

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting ‒

Depends on the filter mode (FMD), filter (ASF) and index (P1)
of the output rate (ICR)
Response time FMD0/2/3/4/5: <2ICR * 1.6 ms + 1.6 ms
FMD1 and ASF0: <2ICR * 1.6 ms + 1.6 ms
FMD1: <2ICR * ASF parameter * 1.6 ms + 1.6 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade No
mode

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firm- P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)
ware version

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 579
Information about the command

Meaning Tare

Range/data ‒

Data type ‒

Access W (Write only)

Index 2040hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 01hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 5

Attribute 1

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 45

PanelX
580 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.179 TAS (Gross Signal)
Sets or reads whether the gross or net measured value should be sent.
See also Tare balance, TAR, TAV.
For the gross measured value the value in tare memory is subtracted from the current
measured value.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 1

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Gross / net selection

0: Output net measured value

Range/data
1: Output gross measured value

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2040hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 02hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 5

Attribute 2

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 581
 Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 11

PanelX
582 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.180 TAV (Tare Value)
Sets or reads the value in the tare buffer. As from firmware P81, it is also possible to
enter a tare value (directly) in legal-for-trade mode. The tare value is converted with the
value entered with the NOV command.

The tare value must fall on the LDW/LWT characteristic curve scaled with the
NOV command. Entering a characteristic curve with the SZA/SFA commands
or LDW/LWT clears the tare buffer.

Entering a value does not switch to output of the net measured value. Use
the TAS command to do this.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode Input disabled, output allowed

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 583
Parameter P1

Meaning Tare value

Range/data -8,388,608 … 8,388,607

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2040hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 03hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 5

Attribute 3

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 46

PanelX
584 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.181 TCR (Trade Counter)
Reads out the legal-for-trade counter.
This counter that cannot be reset is incremented by one every time the LFT command is
performed with a new parameter (switching to legal-for-trade or to industrial mode). No
adjustment is possible in legal-for-trade mode. The adjustment must be performed in
industrial mode. As the counter state is noted on the scale for legal-for-trade applic-
ations, changes to the adjustment or calibration can be discovered by comparing.
The maximum counter state is 8,388,607. If this counter value is reached, the counter
stops and only overflow values are included in measured value output. The counter can
only be reset in the HBM factory.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 585
Parameter P1

Meaning Legal-for-trade counter

Range/data 0 … 8,388,607

Number of ASCII characters with 7

serial interface

Data type UINT32 (Unsigned Integer 32 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2300hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 03hex (hexadecimal)

Class 103

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 3

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 121

PanelX
586 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.182 TDD (Store Parameters)
Saves the sensor electronics parameters ( scale parameters) or restores the setting. A
query (TDD?;) is not permitted.
The sensor electronics contain non-volatile memory divided into two areas. Your (cus-
tomized) parameters are stored in the first area and are retained through a power failure.
The second area contains the write-protected factory setting.
See also RDP.

The communication settings, including the address (ADR) and baud rate
(BDR), as well as the commands marked with 1) in the table below, such as
the factory-set characteristic curve (SZA/SFA), are not reset.

The PanelX performs the TDD1 command after every write process (click the
Write button).

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting ‒

TDD0: <2.2 s, from P80 <0.5 s

Response time TDD1: <0.1 s, from P80 <0.7 s
TDD2: <1.3 s, from P80 <0.3 s

TDD0: Yes
Password protection1) TDD1: No
TDD2: No

TDD0: Yes
Disabled in legal-for-trade mode TDD1: No
TDD2: No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 587
Parameter P1

Meaning Save parameters

0: Restore factory setting

1: Save current parameters in non-volatile memory
Range/data
2: Read out the saved parameters of the current para-
meter set from non-volatile memory and activate them

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access W (Write only)

Index 2450hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 02hex (hexadecimal)

Class 110

DeviceNet Instance 6

Attribute 2

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 104

Sensor electronics settings based on TDD with parameter P1 = 0

Factory set-
Command Comment
ting

ASF 5 Filter 3 Hz

CDT 0 No delay time for zero balance after triggering

COF 9 Measured value output in ASCII format

CRC1) 0 External checksum

CSM 0 Standard measured value status

CWT 1,000,000 Partial load value

DPT 0 Decimal point off

DPW1) AED Password

PanelX
588 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Factory set-
Command Comment
ting

DZT 0.0 Dynamic zero tracking deactivated

ENU1) — Physical unit

FMD 0 Filter mode: Standard filter

HSM 0 Analog-to-digital converter sampling rate: 600 meas-

urements/s

ICR 2 Sample rate: 150 measurements/s

IDN1) HBM… Identification of sensor electronics

IMD 0 IN1 and IN2 are inputs only

LDW1) 0 User characteristic curve zero point

LFT1) 0 Operating mode industrial (not legal-for-trade )

LIC1) 0,1,000,000,0,0 Linearization deactivated

LIV1 … LIV4 0,0,0,0 Limit values 1 ... 4 deactivated

LWT1) 1,000,000 User characteristic curve full scale

MRA 0 Single-range balance

MTD 0 Standstill recognition deactivated

NOV 0 User-defined scaling deactivated

NTF 0.0 Notch filter deactivated

POR 0.0 Outputs set to logical 0 (Low)

PVS 0.1 Peak value function deactivated

RSN 1 Resolution 1 d

SFA1) Factory setting Full scale (for 2 mV/V characteristic curve)

STR 0 Termination resistors deactivated

SZA1) Factory setting Zero value (for 2 mV/V characteristic curve)

TAS 1 Output gross measured value

TAV 0 Tare buffer cleared

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 589
 Factory set-
Command Comment
ting

TCR Unchanged Legal-for-trade counter

TEX 172 Separator

TRC 0,0,0,0,0 Trigger function off, all parameters = 0

TRF 1,000,000 Correction value for trigger function

ZSE 0 Zero balance deactivated for switching on

ZTR 0 Zero tracking deactivated

1) These parameters are saved in non-volatile memory as soon as they are entered. The com-
mands TDD1; and TDD2; have no effect.

PanelX
590 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.183 TEX (Text Separator)
Sets or reads the separator for ASCII output of measured values and for output of values
to the log records.
The separator is placed between the individual values. If you add 128 to the value for the
desired ASCII character, for multiple output of measured values (MSV? command with
parameter P1 ≥ 0), the output will be terminated with crlf. The individual parts of the out-
put (e.g. measured value and status) are separated by the preset separator however.
See also MSV, COF.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 172

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Separator

Range/data 0 … 127, 128 … 255

Number of ASCII characters with 3

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2600hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Bhex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 591
 Class 130

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 11

PROFIBUS Not available

Example

Command TEX44; Select comma as separator.

Response 0crlf Command OK.

Command MSV?3; Send 3 measured values.

Measurement output for COF9; 0000021, 31, 001, 0000025, 31, 001, 0000023, 31, 001crlf

Command TEX172; Select comma as separator and crlf as end identifier.

Response 0crlf Command OK.

Command MSV?3; Send 3 measured values.

Measurement output for COF9; -0000004, 31, 001crlf

0000000, 31, 003crlf
0000006, 31, 001crlf

PanelX
592 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.184 TIM (Date/Time)
Sets or reads the date and time present in the sensor electronics in Unix time format
(POSIX standard). The Unix time is the time in seconds that has elapsed since Thursday
January 1, 1970 at 00:00 UTC (Universal Time, Coordinated). Leap seconds are not taken
into account

The sensor electronics have a clock, but the date and time are lost when
there is no supply voltage. After switching on, the date and time when the
TDD command was last executed with parameter P1 = 1 is applied.
When a sensor electronics unit is connected with the PanelX program, the
current date and time of the PCs are transferred to the sensor electronics. To
ensure that the sensor electronics also contain the correct data when they
are connected via PLC or other programs, you should set the date and time
after switching on (to be able to assign log entries correctly, for example).

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Date/time

Range/data 0 … 4,294,967,296

Number of ASCII characters with 10

serial interface

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 593
 Data type UINT32 (Unsigned Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2E00hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 2hex (hexadecimal)

Class 190

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 2

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
594 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.185 TMA (Maximum Filter Settling Time)
Sets or reads the set maximum filter settling time of the filter chain.
If no limit is set, the maximum additional settling time of the notch filter (MAC and two fil-
ters for NTF) is 530 ms (MAC with parameter P1 = 199, NTF with parameter P1 and P2 =
63). You can shorten the maximum filter settling time with this command. This will
reduce the number of filters used.
See also ADF, FST.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 595
Parameter P1

Meaning Maximum filter settling time of the filter chain

0: No limit
Range/data
1 … 9999: Maximum settling time of the filter chain in ms

Number of ASCII characters with 6

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2010hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 13hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 19

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
596 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.186 TMD (Tare Mode)
Sets or reads the tare mode. The function is especially useful for batching processes.
See also Tare balance, Tare balance after a time delay.
You can choose from three methods:

1. Off: No taring is performed after the start (RUN command or digital input). There is
no wait for a set delay time for taring (TAD).
2. On: If the measured value is less than the fine flow cut-off point after starting (RUN
command or digital input), the delay time elapses before taring occurs. After taring
the coarse and fine flow are activated.
3. Extended: If the measured value is less than the overflow weight (150% of NOV) after
the start (RUN command or digital input), there is a wait for the delay time for taring.
Then taring occurs followed by coarse and fine flow.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Tare mode

0: Off
Range/data 1: On
2: Advanced

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 597
 Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2200hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Bhex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 11

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 87

PanelX
598 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.187 TMO (Temperature Alarm Sensor)
Sets or reads which sensor is used for temperature monitoring .

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Sensor for temperature monitoring

0: Monitoring with internal sensor

Range/data
1: Monitoring with external sensor

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2700hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Chex (hexadecimal)

Class 140

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 12

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 599
10.188 TMP (Temperature)
Reads the temperature of the internal temperature sensor, if present. A value of 250,000
corresponds to +25°C.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Temperature of the internal temperature sensor

Range/data -50,000 … +125,000

Number of ASCII characters with 9

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2460hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 03hex (hexadecimal)

Class 110

DeviceNet Instance 7

Attribute 3

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 24

PanelX
600 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.189 TRC (Trigger Command)
Sets or reads the parameters for the trigger function.
See also Trigger, MSV, MAV, COF128.

No. of parameters 5

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Trigger function

0: Trigger function deactivated

Range/data
1: Trigger function activated

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2020hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 08hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 8

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 68

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 601
Parameter P2

Meaning Trigger mode

0: Pre-trigger level
1: External pre-trigger (only for IMD with parameter P1 =
1)
Range/data
2: Post-trigger level
3: External post-trigger (only for IMD with parameter P1
= 1)

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2020hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 09hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 9

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 68

Parameter P3 (only for P2 = 0, 2, 3)

Meaning Trigger level (P2 = 0, 2) or setpoint (P2 = 3)

±1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise

Range/data
±NOV

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2020hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Ahex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
602 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 10

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 68

Parameter P4
Number of measured values for the settling time (P2 < 2,
Meaning pre-trigger mode) or tolerance in digits (P2 > 1, post-trig-
ger mode)

0 … 99
Range/data
From P80: 0 … 255

Depends on the filter mode (FMD), filter (ASF) and index

(P1) of the output rate (ICR)
Settling time for P2 < 2 FMD0/2/3/4/5 and ASF0: P4 * 2ICR * 1.6 ms
FMD1 and ASF with P1 > 0: P4 * 2ICR * ASF parameter *
1.6 ms

Number of ASCII characters with 2/3 (the leading zero is omitted for values less than 100
serial interface for compatibility reasons)

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2020hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Bhex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 11

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 68

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 603
Parameter P5
Number of segments of the measuring time (P2 < 2, pre-
Meaning trigger mode) or number of valid values for the trigger
result (P2 > 1, post-trigger mode)

0 … 99
Range/data
From P80: 0 … 255

Depends on the filter mode (FMD), filter (ASF) and index

(P1) of the output rate (ICR)
Measuring time for P2 < 2 FMD0/2/3/4/5 and ASF0: P5 * 2ICR * 1.6 ms
FMD1 and ASF with P1 > 0: P5 * 2ICR * ASF parameter *
1.6 ms

Number of ASCII characters with 2/3 (the leading zero is omitted for values less than 100
serial interface for compatibility reasons)

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Number of measured values for the measurement time:

R/W (Read/Write)
Access
Number of valid values for the trigger result: R (Read
only)

Index 2020hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Chex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 12

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 68

PanelX
604 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.190 TRF (Trigger Correction Factor)
Sets or reads the correction factor for the trigger result in post-trigger mode (TRC with
P2 > 1).
See also Trigger.
You can use this function to make a correction between the static adjustment of the
scale and the dynamic result. Each valid trigger result (MAV) is multiplied by this cor-
rection factor. The general rule is:
Correction factor = P1/1,000,000

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 1000000

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) Yes

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode Yes

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Correction factor for the trigger result

Range/data 900,000 … 1,100,000

Number of ASCII characters with 7

serial interface

Data type UINT32 (Unsigned Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2020hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Dhex (hexadecimal)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 605
 Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 13

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 107

PanelX
606 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.191 TRM (Trigger Mean Value)
Reads the mean value memory of trigger results (MAV) calculated since the last time the
system was turned on, the last CTR command (clear trigger results) or the last RES com-
mand (reset).
See also Trigger.
The counter for the number of trigger results TRN, the mean value (TRM) and standard
deviation (TRS) of trigger results as well as the trigger result itself (MAV) are updated at
the same time.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 607
Parameter P1

Meaning Mean value of the trigger results

±1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise

Range/data
±NOV

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2020hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Ehex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 14

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 108

PanelX
608 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.192 TRN (Trigger Number)
Reads the trigger counter (number of trigger results).
See also Trigger.
Each time there is a trigger result, the counter is incremented by 1. Use the CTR com-
mand to clear the counter. The counter does not overflow. It stops when it reaches
65,535 if you do not clear it.
The counter for the number of trigger results TRN, the mean value (TRM) and standard
deviation (TRS) of trigger results as well as the trigger result itself (MAV) are updated at
the same time.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 609
Parameter P1

Meaning Number of trigger results

Range/data 0 … 65,535

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2020hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Fhex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 15

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 99

PanelX
610 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.193 TRS (Trigger Standard Deviation)
Reads the standard deviation of trigger results (MAV) calculated since the last time the
system was turned on, the last CTR (Clear trigger results) command, or the last RES
(Reset) command.
See also Trigger.
The counter for the number of trigger results TRN, the mean value (TRM) and standard
deviation (TRS) of trigger results as well as the trigger result itself (MAV) are updated at
the same time.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 611
Parameter P1

Meaning Standard deviation of the trigger results

±1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise

Range/data
±NOV

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2020hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 10hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 16

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 109

PanelX
612 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.194 TSL (Trigger Stop Level)
Sets or reads the stop level for the trigger if you are using the pre-triggering via level oper-
ating mode (TRC command with parameter P2 = 0).
See also Trigger.
You cannot start the weighing process again after determining a trigger result until the
weight value is below the stop level (TSL) and then the wait time TST has elapsed.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for- No
trade mode

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with P64.4 (electronics units with P64.4 see Firmware overview), P77.9
firmware version (electronics units with P77.9 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 613
Parameter P1

Meaning Stop level for trigger

0: Stop level deactivated

Range/data Otherwise: ±1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0,
otherwise ±NOV

Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)

serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 1Chex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 28

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 183

PanelX
614 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.195 TST (Trigger Stop Time)
Sets or reads the number of measured values for the trigger wait time if you are using the
pre-triggering via level operating mode (TRC command with parameter P2 = 0).
See also Trigger.
You cannot start the weighing process again after determining a trigger result until the
weight value is below the stop level (TSL) and then the wait time TST has elapsed.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for- No
trade mode

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with P64.4 (electronics units with P64.4 see Firmware overview), P77.9
firmware version (electronics units with P77.9 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 615
Parameter P1

Meaning Number of measured values for the trigger wait time

Range/data 0 … 99

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 1Dhex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 29

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 184

PanelX
616 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.196 TSW (Software Trigger)
Initiates a software trigger if the electronics unit is configured as a checkweigher (trigger
mode) (IMD with parameter P1 = 1) and the external trigger is active (TRC with parameter
P1 = 1 and P2 = 1).
The command has the same effect as a signal at IN1 on the electronics units of the 3rd
generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C, AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i elec-
tronics and of the 4th generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA when it is in com-
patibility mode (command IOM with parameter P1 = 0). Otherwise (IOM with parameter
P1 = 1) the input on 4th generation electronics units may be IN1 or IN2, because you can
freely assign IM1 and IM2 to the digital inputs.
See also Checkweigher.

Use 0x7FFFFFFF as the parameter to send a command that does not use
parameters via CANopen or DeviceNet.

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Information about the command

Meaning Software trigger

Range/data ‒

Data type ‒

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 617
 Access W (Write only)

Index 2020hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 24hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 3

Attribute 36

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
618 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.197 TVT (Trigger Delay Time)
Sets or reads the number of measured values for the delay time for the trigger if you are
using the pre-triggering via level operating mode TRC command with parameter P2 = 0).
See also Trigger.
The delay time starts when the trigger level (parameter 3 of TRC) is exceeded. If the level
does not all below the trigger level again , the settling time starts (parameter 4 of TRC).
Otherwise the system waits for a new trigger event and then the delay time TVT starts
again.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for- No
trade mode

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with P64.4 (electronics units with P64.4 see Firmware overview), P77.9
firmware version (electronics units with P77.9 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 619
Parameter P1
Number of measured values for the delay time for the
Meaning
trigger

Range/data 0 … 99

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2030hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 1Bhex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 4

Attribute 27

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 182

PanelX
620 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.198 TYP (Amplifier Type)
Reads the amplifier (electronics unit) type. This is not identical to the module or load cell
type. The AD112D is present in both the PAD400x and the PW15iA for example.

Up to and including P7x, the software subversion is outputted in the high

nibble and the electronics unit type in the low nibble. If type 81 (= 51hex (hexa-
decimal)) is outputted, a FIT is installed as the electronics unit (1) and the
software subversion is 5, e.g. P7x.5.

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 621
Information about the command

Meaning Amplifier (electronics unit) type

For P5x/P6x/P7x:
Low nibble: Electronics; High nibble: Software sub-
version
0: AD103C
1: FIT
4: AD112C
5: AD104C
6: AD105C
Range/data
7: AD116C
P8x
4: AD112D CAN
5: AD112D RS485
6: FIT7 CAN
7: FIT7 RS485
114: AD105D CAN
115: AD105D RS485

Number of ASCII characters with 3

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 24B0hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 03hex (hexadecimal)

Class 110

DeviceNet Instance 12

Attribute 3

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 217

PanelX
622 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.199 UDC (Supply Voltage)
Reads the supply voltage of the amplifier in mV.

No. of parameters ‒

Factory setting ‒

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Information about the command

Meaning Supply voltage in mV

Range/data ‒

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R (Read only)

Index 2021hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 08hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 9

Attribute 8

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 623
10.200 UIT (Input Threshold)
Sets or reads the switching threshold for digital inputs.
See also SPL.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 2047

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P80 (electronics units with P80 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Switching threshold for digital inputs in mV

Range/data 0 … 32,000

Number of ASCII characters with 5

serial interface

Data type UINT16 (Unsigned Integer 16 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2021hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 09hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 9

Attribute 9

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
624 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.201 UTL (Upper Tolerance Limit)
Sets or reads the upper tolerance limit for the dosing result.

The description below referring to the functions of digital outputs applies

only to sensor electronics up to 3rd generation AD103C, AD104C, AD105C,
AD116C, PW15AHi, PW20i, some FIT and C16i electronics and for 4th gen-
eration FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA sensor electronics in compatibility
mode (IOM command with parameter P1 = 0). For sensor electronics in 4th
generation FIT5A, FIT7A, PAD400x, PW15iA you can define the function of the
digital outputs yourself with commands OM1 to OM6 (IOM command with
parameter P1 = 1).

If the dosing result (FRS) exceeds the tolerance limit, the status “Tolerance limit
exceeded” (bit 5) is set in the dosing status (SDO). The status is cleared with the next
start. If you have set parameter P1 = 0 for OMD, output OUT4 is also active.
When the filling weight is entered (FWT), the upper tolerance limit is automatically set to
100.2% of the filling weight (not with WTX).

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Upper tolerance limit

0 … 1,599,999 for NOV with parameter P1 = 0, otherwise

Range/data
0 … 160% of NOV

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 625
 Number of ASCII characters with 8 (7 digits with sign)
serial interface

Data type SINT32 (Signed Integer 32 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2210hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Ahex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 10

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 74

PanelX
626 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.202 VCT (Valve Control)
Sets or reads the operating mode for valve control.
See also Filler.
You can choose from four methods:

1. P1 = 0: Coarse and fine flow are always activated during opening. When the fill flow
limit value (CBK) is reached, coarse flow is deactivated. If opening occurs in the fine
flow phase, e.g. during redosing RDS or when starting from a stopped state, coarse
and fine flow are activated together, though the coarse flow is then deactivated
again as soon as the weight increases.
The method was introduced because in practice there are often valves that open
only when controlled by coarse and fine flow.

Coarse flow FFL with parameter P1 = 0

ON
OFF
RUN CFD Time
Fine flow
ON
OFF
RUN FFD Time

Coarse flow FFL with parameter P1 > 0

ON
OFF
FFL CFD Time
Fine flow
ON
OFF
RUN FFD Time

2. P1 = 1: Coarse and fine flow are always activated at the start of coarse flow. When
the fill flow limit value (CBK) is reached, coarse flow is deactivated. If opening
occurs during the fine flow phase, for example after redosing (RDS), or when starting
from stop status, only fine flow is activated.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 627
 Coarse flow FFL with parameter P1 = 0
ON
OFF
RUN CFD Time
Fine flow
ON
OFF
RUN FFD Time

Coarse flow FFL with parameter P1 > 0

ON
OFF
FFL CFD Time
Fine flow
ON
OFF
RUN FFD Time

3. P1 = 2: Coarse flow and fine flow are always activated separately (never sim-
ultaneously). Only the coarse flow is active in the coarse flow phase. Only the fine
flow is active in the fine flow phase.

Coarse flow FFL with parameter P1 = 0

ON
OFF
RUN CFD Time
Fine flow
ON
OFF
CFD FFD Time

Coarse flow FFL with parameter P1 > 0

ON
OFF
FFL CFD Time
Fine flow
ON
OFF
RUN CFD FFD Time

4. P1 = 3: Coarse flow is always activated during opening. It is active from the start of
the batching process to the end. Fine flow is activated in addition.

PanelX
628 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
 Coarse flow FFL with parameter P1 = 0
ON
OFF
RUN Time
Fine flow
ON
OFF
RUN CFD FFD Time

Coarse flow FFL with parameter P1 > 0

ON
OFF
RUN Time
Fine flow
ON
OFF
RUN FFL CFD FFD Time

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 629
Parameter P1

Meaning Valve control

Range/data 0…3

Number of ASCII characters with 2

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2200hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 0Chex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 12

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 91

PanelX
630 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.203 WDP (Write Dosing Parameter Set)
Saves the current parameter set with dosing parameters under the specified parameter
set number.
Save the current parameter set with TDD and parameter set P1 = 1 under the current
parameter set number.

You can still save the parameter set before saving. However, you should then
reload the parameter set you will be using with RDP before the start of batch-
ing.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) No

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode No

Save parameters ‒

Available starting with firmware ver- P60 (electronics units with P60 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 631
Parameter P1
Save the dosing parameter set under the specified num-
Meaning
ber

Range/data 0 … 31

Number of ASCII characters with 2

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access W (Write only)

Index 2200hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 01hex (hexadecimal)

Class 102

DeviceNet Instance 1

Attribute 1

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 57

PanelX
632 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.204 ZMD (Zeroing Mode)
Sets or reads the setting for the zeroing range allowed when zeroing with CDL.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) Yes

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode Yes

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware ver- P81 (electronics units with P81 see Firmware over-
sion view)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Zeroing range

0: Zeroing range as before; see CDL, ZSE

Range/data 1: Zeroing range ±100% of NOV, where LFT = 0 (Industrial
mode)

Number of ASCII characters with 1

serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2010hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 1Ahex (hexadecimal)

Class 100
DeviceNet
Instance 2

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 633
 Attribute 26

PROFIBUS Not available

PanelX
634 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.205 ZSE (Zero Setting)
Sets or reads the setting for zeroing when switching on.
If a standstill occurs within about 2.5 seconds after switching on the supply voltage or
after the RES command and the gross value is within the selected range, the current
gross value will be transferred to zero memory. If there is no standstill, there is no zero-
ing.
See also Zeroing on start-up, MTD, Standstill recognition, CDL.

Zero memory is cleared after the supply voltage is turned on or by the RES
command. Reads out the current value of zero memory with CDL?;.

A change in the setting for zeroing on start-up does not take effect until after
a reset (RES) command or the next time the supply voltage is turned on.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) Yes

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode Yes

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS are used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Zeroing on start-up

0: Zeroing on start-up disabled

1: Zeroing range ±2% of NOV
Range/data 2: Zeroing range ±5% of NOV
3: Zeroing range ±10% of NOV
4: Zeroing range ±20% of NOV

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 635
 Number of ASCII characters with 2
serial interface

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2010hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 08hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 8

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 67

PanelX
636 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
10.206 ZTR (Zero Tracking)
Sets or reads the setting for (static) zero tracking.
See also Zero tracking.
Automatic zero tracking is executed when all gross or net measured values within one
second are less than the zero value plus/minus the specified value for zero tracking.
Then the mean value is transferred to zero memory. The unit d (digit) relates to the nom-
inal value (NOV). If one of the measured values drops out of the range within that second,
a new period begins.

For NOV with parameter P1 = 0 or P1 > 100,000, the correction is always

made with a setting of 0.5 d/s relative to 100,000 d. For example, if P1 =
1,000,000 the correction is made with 5 d/s.

No. of parameters 1

Factory setting 0

Response time <10 ms

Password protection1) Yes

Disabled in legal-for-trade mode Yes

Save parameters TDD1

Available starting with firmware version P50 (electronics with P50 see Firmware overview)

1) Only available if serial interfaces or PROFIBUS used.

Parameter P1

Meaning Zero tracking

0: Zero tracking deactivated

1: Zero tracking 0.5 d/s
Range/data 2: Zero tracking 1 d/s
3: Zero tracking 2 d/s
4: Zero tracking 3 d/s

Data type UINT8 (Unsigned Integer 8 bit)

PanelX
10 COMMAND REFERENCE 637
 Access R/W (Read/Write)

Index 2010hex (hexadecimal)

CANopen
Subindex 09hex (hexadecimal)

Class 100

DeviceNet Instance 2

Attribute 9

Slot 0
PROFIBUS
Index 66

PanelX
638 10 COMMAND REFERENCE
11 Index Addition 111
Address 200
1 Address range
CANopen 33
10x resolution 374 DeviceNet 49
PROFIBUS 72
ADF 198
A
Adjustment
Abort batching 232 calibration 88
general 88
Abort dosing 232
in mV/V 92
Activate peak values 509
options 87
Activation time
Adjustment in mV/V 88
output 217, 219, 221, 223
ADR 200
Active Time Output 1 217
Alarm
Active Time Output 2 219
Alarm section, PanelX 104
Active Time Output 3 221 empty weight 105
Active Time Output 4 223 fill flow check 107, 109
Acyclic data exchange (PROFIBUS) 74 Status 202
Adaptive status for CANopen 42
delay time for taring 211 ALS 202
dosing time 211 Alternative Control Word 209
lockout time 225 Alternative Poll Data 207
residual flow time 211
Amplifier input signal 214
trigger settling time 216
Amplifier Signal Filter 213
zero value settling time 211
Amplifier Signal Selection 214
Adaptive Dosing Times 211
Amplifier Type 621
Adaptive Lockout And Residual Flow
Time 225 Analog-to-digital converter sampling rate
increased 137, 151
Adaptive Noise Suppression 198
Analysis mode in Scope 167
Adaptive Residual Flow Time 210
AOV 205
Adaptive Trigger Settling 216
APD 207
ADC overflow counter 205
APP 209
Add serial number 27

PanelX
11 INDEX 639
Applications 101 read out mean values 537
ARP 210 result 362
select parameter set 513
ASD 211
select upward/downward 297
ASF 213 special function 535
ASS 214 standard deviation 541
AST 216 start 529
AT1 217 start weight 452
status 539
AT2 219
tolerance 625
AT3 221
tolerance limit 429
AT4 223 write parameter set 631
ATP 225 Baud rate 227
Auto-zero 127, 635 BDR 227
Automatic zeroing 131 BOF 230
Automatic Zeroing Band 317 BRK 232
Automatic Zeroing Count 319 BSY 234
Automatic Zeroing Hold-off 320 Bus-off behavior 230
Automatic Zeroing Mode 322 Bus termination resistor 164, 558
Automatic Zeroing Time 324 Busy flag
Average filter 433 CANopen 45
Busy State 234
B Byte sequence
PROFIBUS 74
Balancing
with direct load 90
C
Batching 101
abort 232 Calculate
clear results 270 calibration 92
cumulative weight memory 565
Calibration
dosing time 303
(and adjustment) with direct load 90
material flow of last dosing cycle 440
general 88
maximum dosing time 438
Calibration weight 90, 276
number of results 461
parameter set 358

PanelX
640 11 INDEX
CANopen Clear Dead Load Time 247
address range 33 Clear Dosing Results 270
alarm status 42 Clear Peak Values 264
busy flag 45
Clear Trigger Results 274
communication 34
connection 32 Coarse flow 106
control word 44 cut-off point 249
emergency object 46 cutoff point 106
estimate bus load 33 duration 251
introduction 31 fill level monitoring 107
maximum cable length 32 fine flow phase first 106
measured value status 40 lockout time 107, 425
PDO 34 time interval for fill flow
process data objects 34 monitoring 107
project configuration of a bus Coarse Flow Disconnect 249
system 33 Coarse Flow Monitoring 236
SDO 36 Coarse Flow Monitoring Time 239
service data objects 36
Coarse Flow Time 251
special features 34
Coefficients 95
CBK 236
COF 253
CBT 239
Command
CD1 241
description 22
CD2 243
Command format with serial
CDL 245 interfaces 81
CDT 247 Command reference 171
CFD 249 Commands and firmware 172
CFT 251 Commands for P8x sorted by
Change address 27 significance 190
Change IP address 27 Communication
Check Number 511 CANopen 34
command format with serial inter-
Checking for code changes 165
faces 81
Checksum 266, 268 DeviceNet 50
Checkweigher 112, 389 examples of DeviceNet 50
Clear Dead Load 245 examples of serial interfaces 83

PanelX
11 INDEX 641
 PROFIBUS 72 Define Password 302
via interface 31 Degree of optimization 495
Component window 22 Delay Time 1 293
Configure Output Format 253 Delay Time 2 295
Connecting with sensor electronics 26 Delay time for output 305, 307, 309, 311
Connection Delay time for taring 577
CANopen 32
Delay Time Output 1 305
DeviceNet 48
PROFIBUS 71 Delay Time Output 2 307

Control Byte 555 Delay Time Output 3 309

Control of Digital Outputs OUT5 And Delay Time Output 4 311

OUT6 456 Device
Control word add 27
CANopen 44 find 27
Control Word 562 Device address 27
CPV 264 Device Address 200
CRC 266 Device information 25
CSM 268 Device status 25
CSN 270 DeviceNet
address range 49
CTO 272
communication 50
CTR 274
connection 48
Cumulative Weight 565 estimate bus load 49
Cursor in Scope 167 examples of communication 50
CWT 276 introduction 47
Cyclic data exchange (PROFIBUS) 73 maximum cable length 49
measured value status 66
Cyclic Redundancy Check 266
project configuration of a bus
system 49
D special features 50
DGA 278
Data rate 136
DGL 280
Date/Time 593
DGN 282
Decimal Point 89, 300
DGP 284
Decrease 111

PanelX
642 11 INDEX
DGR 286 Documentation
DGS 288 Applicability 20
Diagnosis Buffer Enable 313 for which sensor electronics units 20
further documentation 21
Diagnostic Activation 278
installation instructions 21
Diagnostic Filter 284 operating instructions 21
Diagnostic functions 169 target groups 19
Diagnostic interface 170 Dosing 101
Diagnostic Number 282 delay time 293, 295
Diagnostic Read 286 mode 104
Diagnostic Start And Status 288 Dosing mode 389
Diagnostic Trigger Level 280 Dosing Mode 297
Diagnostics Dosing Parameter Set 358
activate 170, 278 Dosing result 362, 461
number of values 170, 282 Dosing status 362
read 170 Dosing Time 303
read out 286
Downloading PanelX 22
relevant commands 170
start 170, 288 Downward dosing 104
status 170, 288 DPT 300
trigger level 170, 280 DPW 302
Digit 525 DST 303
Digital Input State 1 394 DT1 305
Digital Input State 2 395 DT2 307
Digital Output 1 489 DT3 309
Digital Output 2 490 DT4 311
Digital Output 3 491 Dual-range balance 442
Digital Output 4 492 Dual-range scale 88
Digital Output 5 493 DWE 313
Digital Output 6 494 DWR 315
DL1 293 Dynamic help 22
DL2 295 Dynamic Zero Tracking 324
DMD 297 DZB 317

PanelX
11 INDEX 643
DZC 319 DeviceNet 49
DZH 320 Ethernet (WTX110/120) 85
DZM 322 Event mask 326, 328
DZT 324 CANopen 42
Event Mask A 326
Event Mask B 328
E
EWT 340
E-mail support 13 Example
EMA 326 serial communication 83
EMB 328 Examples
DeviceNet 50
EMD 330
Explanation of characters 17
Emergency object
CANopen 46 Extended Error Status 335
Empty weight 105 External trigger 116, 118, 154, 157
Empty Weight 340
Emptying F
emptying time 111
timer-controlled 111 Factory characteristic curve
types of monitoring 111 measure full scale 94
weight-controlled 111 measure zero point 94
emptying mode 330 nominal value 543
zero point 575
Emptying Mode 330
Factory settings 587
Emptying Time 333
Fast Track Level (FMD3) 368
Engineering Unit 332
FBK 342
ENU 332
FBT 345
EPT 333
FFD 347
ERR 335
FFL 349
Error status 335
FFM 351
Error Status 337
FFT 353
ESR 337
Fill flow limit value 236
Estimate bus load
monitoring 107, 109
CANopen 33

PanelX
644 11 INDEX
Fill flow monitoring minimum 351
time interval 239 Monitoring time 345
Fill weight 104 phase before coarse flow 106
prediction 109
Filling 101
time interval for fill flow
general settings 103
monitoring 109
timer-controlled 111
time interval for fine flow
types of monitoring 111 prediction 109
weight 370
Fine Flow Disconnect 347
weight-controlled 111
Fine Flow Monitoring 342
Filling mode 389
Fine Flow Time 353
Filling Result 362
Firmware and commands 172
Filling weight
systematic difference 571 Firmware Date 497

Filter 136 Firmware update

cut-off frequency 142 download from HBM 13
in PanelX 137 Firmware version of the sensor elec-
maximum settling time 595 tronics 569
mode 138 First Fine Flow Time 349
settling time 366 FLO 355
Filter cut-off frequency 142 Flow rate
filter limit frequency 213 time base 365
Filter Mode 138, 356 Flow Rate 355
Filter Settling Time 366 Flow Rate Measurement Time 365
Fine Break Time 345 Flow time
Fine Feed Minimum 351 interval 520
Fine flow 108 FMD 356
cut-off point 347 FNB 358
cutoff point 108 Format of commands (serial) 81
duration 353 Format of responses (serial) 82
duration before coarse flow 349
FPT 360
fill level monitoring 109
level monitoring 342 FRS 362
lockout time 108, 427 FRT 365
material flow 440 FST 366

PanelX
11 INDEX 645
FTL 368 IMD 389
Function of the sensor electronics 389 In-flight 110
Functions (overview) 123 Industrial mode 398
FWT 370 Input
function 385, 387, 389, 392
signal level 164
G
state 394-395
status 500, 522
General settings 89
switching threshold 550
Gross Signal 581
Input data (PROFIBUS) 73
Group Address 372
Input level 550
GRU 372
Input mode 389
Input Mode 1 385
H
Input Mode 2 387

Hardware Version 378 Input Threshold 624

HBM on the Internet 13 Installation 16

High Resolution 374 Installation instructions 21

High speed mode (sampling rate) 137, Interfaces

151 examples of DeviceNet 50
examples of serial interfaces 83
High Speed Mode ADC 376
find sensor electronics unit 27
Home 24
RS-232 75
HRN 374 RS-422 76
HSM 376 RS-485 78
HWV 378 serial (general information) 74
Internal Conversion Rate 380
I Introduction
CANopen 31
ICR 380 DeviceNet 47
Identification 383 PROFIBUS 70

IDN 383 Introduction to this help 15

IM1 385 IO 163

IM2 387 IO Mode 392

PanelX
646 11 INDEX
IOM 392 Load Cell Weight 431
IS1 394 Lockout time
IS2 395 coarse flow 107, 425
fine flow 108, 427
Lockout Time Coarse Flow 425
L
Lockout Time Fine 427
LDW 396 Lockout time for coarse/fine flow 225
Legal-For-Trade 398 Low-pass filter 138
Legal-for-trade counter 398 Lower tolerance limit 111
Legal-for-trade mode 165, 398 Lower Tolerance Limit 429
Legal verification 88 LTC 425
Level monitoring LTF 427
fine flow 342 LTL 429
Level post-trigger 155 LWT 431
Level pre- and post trigger 117
Level pre-trigger 114, 153 M
LFT 398
LIC 400 MAC 433
Light sensor Manufacturer Code NAM 460
polarity 498 Material Flow Last Dosing Cycle 440
Light Sensor Polarity 498 Material flow of residual flow 518
Limit monitoring 119 MAV 435
Limit switches 119, 162 Maximum cable length
Limit value monitoring 405, 410, 415, 420 CANopen 32
Linearization 88, 94-95 DeviceNet 49
PROFIBUS 71
Linearization Coefficient 400
Maximum dosing time 104
LIV1 405
Maximum Dosing Time 438
LIV2 410
Maximum Filter Settling Time 595
LIV3 415
MDT 438
LIV4 420
Mean value calculation 458, 527
Load cell count 92
Mean Value Dosing Results 537
Load Cell Dead Weight 396

PanelX
11 INDEX 647
Mean value filter 141 Monitoring the program code 165
Measured Alternative Data 435 Motion detection 110, 125
Measured Signal Value 446 Motion Detection 454
Measured value 446 Motorola format (PROFIBUS) 74
output 164 Moving Average Filter for FMD5 433
Measured value output rate 380 MRA 442
Measured value resolution 525 MRM 444
Measured value status MSV 446
CANopen 40 MSW 452
DeviceNet 66
MTD 454
Measurement status 446
Multi-Range Mode 444
Measuring dead load (initial load) 91
Multirange Switch Point 442
Measuring full scale 92
MUX 456
Measuring unit 89
MVC 458
Menu item
Home 24
N
Menu ribbon 22
MFO 440
NAM 460
Minimum fine flow amount 108
NDS 461
Minimum Start Weight 105, 452
Net Signal 581
Modbus/TCP (CiA309) 86
Nominal value 89
Monitoring
Nominal Value 463
coarse flow 107
Nominal weight of user characteristic
fill flow 107, 109
curve 431
fill flow limit value 107, 109
fine flow 109 Notch filter 138-139, 465
fine flow prediction 109 Notch Filter 1 465
sack breakage 107, 109 NOV 463
Monitoring flash memory 165 NTF 465
Monitoring rate Number of Dosings 461
for limit values 136
for peak values 136
for triggers 136

PanelX
648 11 INDEX
 O Output Mode 3 475
Output Mode 4 478
OM1 469
Output Mode 5 481
OM2 472
Output Mode 6 484
OM3 475
Output rate 136-137, 149, 380
OM4 478
Overflow A/D converter 205
OM5 481
Overflow counter 205
OM6 484
Overview
OMD 487
Commands for P8x sorted by sig-
Opening help 22 nificance 190
Operating instructions 21 of commands and firmware 172
Operating mode 398 To which sensor electronics units
Operating requirements 15 does the documentation
apply? 20
Optimization 495
Overview of taring 134
Optimization of coarse and fine flow 104
OS1 489
P
OS2 490
OS3 491 PanelX Introduction 22
OS4 492 Parameter set
OS5 493 last batching 358
OS6 494 load 587
OSN 495 save 587
Output Parameter set for dosing 513
delay time 305, 307, 309, 311 Partial range calibration 91
function 389, 392, 469, 472, 475, 478, Password 302, 551
481, 484, 487 Password protection 90
status 489-494, 500, 522
PDT 497
Output data (PROFIBUS) 73
Peak Value Select 509
Output format set 164
Peak values 162
Output Mode 164, 487
Places after the decimal 300
Output Mode 1 469
POL 498
Output Mode 2 472

PanelX
11 INDEX 649
Polarity of the light sensor's input signal Q
range 498
Quick start 19
Polynomial 95
POR 500
Port Set And Read 500 R

Post-trigger 117-118, 155, 157

Range selection 89
delay 504
RDP 513
Post-Trigger Delay 504
RDS 515
Pre-trigger 114, 116, 153-154
Re-Trigger Tolerance Band 527
Process data objects 34
Read maximum 506
PROFIBUS
acyclic data exchange 74 Read minimum 506
address range 72 Read Peak Value 506
byte sequence 74 Read Status Digital I/O 522
communication 72 Real-time mode in Scope 167
connection 71 Redosing 105, 111, 515
cyclic data exchange 73
Relief wait time 241, 243
input data 73
introduction 70 Requirements
maximum cable length 71 for the PC 15
output data 73 RES 517
project configuration of a bus Reset 517
system 72 Residual flow 110
special features 73 material flow 518
Project configuration of a bus system time
CANopen 33 adaptive setting 210
DeviceNet 49 time interval 520
PROFIBUS 72 Residual Flow Last Filling Cycle 518
PTD 504 Residual Flow Time 520
PVA 506 Resolution 89, 525
PVS 509 Retrigger Mean Value Count 458
PZN 511 Retriggering 159
RFO 518

PanelX
650 11 INDEX
RFT 520 Sensor
RIO 522 temperature alarm 599
RS-232 75 Sensor electronics
RS-422 76 address 200

RS-485 78 Sensor Fullscale Adjust 543

RSN 525 Sensor Overflow Counter 548

RTB 527 Sensor Zero Adjust 575

RUN 529 Serial interface 74

Serial Number 546
Service data objects 36
S
Service functions 169
S 531 Set Current Range 533
Sack breakage monitoring 107, 109 Set Password 551
Sample rate of A/D converter 376 Set Termination Resistor 558
Sampling rate Settling time 366
high speed 137, 151 SFA 543
increased 137, 151 Signal flow diagram 123
Scale dead load 91-92 Single-range balance 442
Scan window 26 SNR 546
Scope 167 Software Identification 567
SCR 533 Software Sub-Version 552
SDF 535 Software Trigger 617
SDM 537 Software update
SDO 539 download from HBM 13
SDS 541 Sort order
Search sensor electronics unit 27 To which sensor electronics units
Second measuring range 88 does the documentation
apply? 20
Select 531
Sorting
Select interface nodes 531
Commands and firmware 172
Select nodes 531 Commands for P8x sorted by sig-
Select sensor electronics 531 nificance 190
Selection Dosing Parameter Set 513 Sorting weigher 119

PanelX
11 INDEX 651
SOV 548 STP 557
Special Dosing Functions 535 STR 558
Special features STT 560
CANopen 34 STWxx 562
DeviceNet 50 SUM 565
PROFIBUS 73
Supply Voltage 623
SPL 550
Support 13
SPW 551
SWI 567
SRV 552
Switch point of dual-range balance 442
SST 553
Switching threshold for digital inputs 550
Stabilization time 110
SWV 569
Stabilization Time 560
SYD 571
Standard Deviation Dosing Results 541
SYN 572
Standard weigher 389
Sync Cycle Ticks 573
Standstill detection 125, 454
Sync mode 572
Start-up
Sync status 553
Balancing 90
Linearization 94 Synchronization
Working standard calibration 93 activating 572
WTX 98 cycle time, frequency 573
multiple sensor electronics units 95
Start Filling 529
status 553
Starting-up via CANopen 97
general 87 via digital I/Os 95
Startup System requirements 15
synchronization 95
Systematic difference
State of Dosing 539 in filling weight 111, 164
Status 446 Systematic Difference 571
Status in Scope Systematic difference in filling
show signals 168 weight 571
Status with alarm 202 SYT 573
STB 555 SZA 575
Stop 557
Store Parameters 587

PanelX
652 11 INDEX
 T Time base of flow rate 365
Time interval
TAD 577
fill flow monitoring 239
TAR 579
Time window
Tare 105, 579 in Scope 167
delay 106
TMA 595
delay time 577
max. Empty weight 136 TMD 597
mode 105 TMO 599
tare limit 136 TMP 600
Tare Delay 577 Tol- 111
Tare Mode 597 Tol+ 111
Tare Value 583 Tolerance limit 111
Target groups for this documentation 19 Trade Counter 585
Taring after delay 135 TRC 601
TAS 581 TRF 605
TAV 583 Trigger 151
TCR 585 clear results 274
TDD 587 correction factor 605
counter 609
Technical support 13
delay time 158, 619
Telephone support 13 in Scope 168
Temperature 600 mean value 607
Temperature Alarm Sensor 599 parameter 601
Terminate output 557 Retriggering 159
standard deviation 611
Termination resistor 164, 558
stop level 161, 613
TEX 591
stop time 161, 615
Text separator 164
Trigger Command 601
Text Separator 591
Trigger Correction Factor 605
TIM 593
Trigger Delay Time 619
Time 593
Trigger Mean Value 607
Time Base Fine Flow Prediction 360
Trigger mode 389
Time base of fine flow prediction 360 external post-trigger 118, 157

PanelX
11 INDEX 653
 external pre-trigger 116, 154 Upward dosing 104
level post-trigger 117, 155 User-defined 163
level pre-trigger 114, 153, 155
User-defined scaling 463
Trigger Number 609
User characteristic curve
Trigger result 435 nominal value 463
Trigger Standard Deviation 611 nominal weight 431
Trigger Stop Level 613 zero point 396
Trigger Stop Time 615 User interface 22
TRM 607 User level 22
TRN 609 UTL 625
TRS 611
TSL 613 V
TST 615
TSW 617 Valve control 106, 108

TVT 619 Valve Control 627

TYP 621 Variants for adjustment and

calibration 88
Typographical conventions 17
VCT 627
Verification 165
U
Verified scale, special features 165
UDC 623
UIT 624 W
Uninstalling 16
WDP 631
Unit (physical) 332
Window
Unit of the scale 88
devices 22
Update measured values 22
download firmware update from scan 26
HBM 13
Working standard calibration 87
download software update from
changing 93
HBM 13
Working with the PanelX program 26
Upgrade 16
Write Diagnostic Byte 315
Upper tolerance limit 111
Write Dosing Parameter Set 631
Upper Tolerance Limit 625

PanelX
654 11 INDEX
WTX110 ZSE 635
Start-up 98 ZTR 637
WTX120
Start-up 98

Zero balance
after delay 130
delay 247
options for filling 133
zero tracking 127, 637
zeroing tolerance 272
Zero on start-up 635
Zero Setting 635
Zero tracking 637
Zero Tracking 127
Zeroing 245
auto-zero 127
automatic 131, 324
dynamic 324
hold-off time 132
mode for the automatic 132
on start-up 127, 635
Overview 126
performing 245
Zero tracking 324
zeroing band 132
Zeroing delay 247
Zeroing Delay 1 241
Zeroing Delay 2 243
Zeroing Mode 633
Zeroing tolerance 272
ZMD 633

PanelX
11 INDEX 655
 A05901 02 E00 01

HBK - Hottinger Brüel & Kjaer

www.hbkworld.com
info@hbkworld.com